Final Mba Syllabus CBCS 2016 1 PDF

Accredited with Grade A by NAAC, GoI
Accredited with Grade A by KCG, GoG
ACADEMIC
REGULATIONS
&
SYLLABUS
Faculty of Management Studies

Master of Business Administration
© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 1 of 533

CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF
SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY -
Accredited with Grade A by NAAC, GoI CHARUSAT
Education Campus – Changa, (ECC), hitherto a conglomerate of institutes of

professional education in Engineering, Pharmacy, Computer Applications, Management,
Applied Sciences, Physiotherapy and Nursing, is one of the choicest destinations by
students. It has been transformed into Charotar University of Science and Technology
(CHARUSAT) through an Act by Government of Gujarat. CHARUSAT is permitted to
grant degrees under Section-22 of UGC- Govt. of India.
The journey of CHARUSAT started in the year 2000, with only 240 Students, 4
Programmes, one Institute and an investment of about Rs. 3 Crores (INR 30 million). At
present there are seven different institutes falling under ambit of six different faculties.
The programmes offered by these faculties range from undergraduate (UG) to Ph.D
degrees including M.Phil. These faculties, in all offer 51 different programmes. A quick
glimpse in as under:
Faculty Institute Programmes

Offered
Faculty of Technology & Chandubhai S. Patel Institute of  B.Tech
Engineering Technology  M.Tech
 Ph.D
Faculty of Pharmacy Ramanbhai Patel College of  B.Pharm
Pharmacy  M.Pharm
 Ph.D
 PGDCT /
PGDPT
Faculty of Management Studies Indukaka Ipcowala Institute of  M.B.A
Management  PGDM
 Ph.D
 BBA
Faculty of Computer Applications Smt. Chandaben Mohanbhai Patel  M.C.A / MCA
Institute of Computer Applications. (Lateral)
 M.Sc IT
 Ph.D
 BCA

Faculty of Applied Sciences P.D. Patel Institute of Applied  M.Sc
Sciences  M.Phil
 Ph.D
 B.Sc
Faculty of Medical Sciences  Ashok and Rita Institute of  B.PT
Physiotherapy  M.PT
  Ph.D
 Manikaka Topawala Institute of  B.Sc (Nursing)
Nursing  M.Sc
 PGDHA
Charotar Institute of Paramedical  PGDMLT
Sciences  GNM
 Ph.D
The development and growth of the institutes have already led to an investment of over Rs.125
Crores (INR 1250 Million). The future outlay is planned with an estimate of Rs.250 Crores (INR
2500 Million).
The University is characterized by state-of-the-art infrastructural facilities, innovative teaching

methods and highly learned faculty members. The University Campus sprawls over 105 acres of
land and is Wi-Fi enabled. It is also recognized as the Greenest Campus of Gujarat.
CHARUSAT is privileged to have 360 core faculty members, educated and trained in IITs, IIMs
and leading Indian Universities, and with long exposure to industry. It is also proud of its past
students who are employed in prestigious national and multinational corporations.
From one college to the level of a forward-looking University, CHARUSAT has the vision of
entering the club of premier Universities initially in the country and then globally. High Moral
Values like Honesty, Integrity and Transparency which has been the foundation of ECC
continues to anchor the functioning of CHARUSAT. Banking on the world class infrastructure
and highly qualified and competent faculty, the University is expected to be catapulted into top
20 Universities in the coming five years. In order to align with the global requirements, the
University has collaborated with internationally reputed organizations like Pennsylvania State
University – USA, University at Alabama at Birmingham – USA, Northwick Park Institute –UK,
ISRO, BARC, etc.
CHARUSAT has designed curricula for all its programmes in line with the current international
practices and emerging requirements. Industrial Visits, Study Tours, Expert Lectures and
Interactive IT enabled Teaching Practice form an integral part of the unique CHARUSAT
pedagogy.

The programmes are credit-based and have continuous evaluation as an important feature. The
pedagogy is student-centred, augurs well for self-learning and motivation for enquiry and
research, and contains innumerable unique features like:
 Participatory and interactive discussion-based classes.

 Sessions by visiting faculty members drawn from leading academic institutions and
industry.
 Regular weekly seminars.
 Distinguished lecture series.
 Practical, field-based projects and assignments.
 Summer training in leading organizations under faculty supervision in relevant
programmes.
 Industrial tours and visits.
 Extensive use of technology for learning.
 Final Placement through campus interviews.
Exploration in the field of knowledge through research and development and comprehensive
industrial linkages will be a hallmark of the University, which will mould the students for global
assignments through technology-based knowledge and critical skills.
The evaluation of the student is based on grading system. A student has to pursue his/her
programme with diligence for scoring a good Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) and for
succeeding in the chosen profession and life.
CHARUSAT welcomes you for a Bright Future

CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND
TECHNOLOGY
Faculty of Management Studies
Accredited with Grade A by NAAC, GoI

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
Masters of Business Administration (MBA) Programme
Charotar University of Science and Technology (CHARUSAT)

CHARUSAT Campus, At Post: Changa – 388421, Taluka: Petlad, District: Anand
Phone: 02697-247500, Fax: 02697-247100, Email: info@charusat.ac.in
www.charusat.ac.in
Year – 2016

CHARUSAT
FACULTY OF MANAGEMENT STUDIES
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
Master of Business Administration (MBA)

To ensure uniform system of education, duration of undergraduate and post graduate
programmes, eligibility criteria for and mode of admission, credit load requirement and its
distribution between course and system of examination and other related aspects, following
academic rules and regulations are recommended.
1. System of Education
The Semester system of education should be followed across The Charotar University of
Science and Technology (CHARUSAT) both at Undergraduate and Master‟s levels. Each
semester will be at least 90 working day duration. Every enrolled student will be
required to take a specified load of course work in the chosen subject of specialization
and also complete a project/dissertation if any.
2. Duration of Programme
2.1 The Master of Business Administration (MBA) programme of Charotar University of

Science and Technology (CHARUSAT) is a two-year full-time post-graduate
programme, leading to the award of the degree of Master of Business Administration
(MBA).
2.2 The span period of the programme is three years from the date of registration in the
programme.
3. Eligibility and mode of admissions
Any graduate who is eligible for admission to the MBA programme will be admitted to
the programme according to the regulations for admission decided by Government of
Gujarat from time to time.
4. Programme Structure and Credits
A student admitted to a program should study the course and earn credits specified
in the course structure. The details of programme structure, credit requirements, areas
of specialisation proposed to be offered, etc. are presented at Appendix – I.

5. Attendance
5.1 All activities prescribed under these regulations and listed by the course faculty
members in their respective course outlines are compulsory for all students pursuing
the courses. No exemption will be given to any student from attendance except on
account of serious personal illness or accident or family calamity that may genuinely
prevent a student from attending a particular session or a few sessions. However,
such unexpected absence from classes and other activities will require to be
condoned by the Dean/Principal.
5.2 Student attendance in every course should be 80%.
6 Course Evaluation
6.1 The performance of every student in each course will be evaluated as follows:
6.1.1 Internal evaluation by the course faculty member(s) based on continuous

assessment, for 30% of the marks for the course; and
6.1.2 Final examination by the University through written paper or practical test or
oral test or presentation by the student or a combination of these, for 70% of the
marks for the course.
6.2 University Examination
6.2.1 The final examination by the University for 70% of the evaluation for the course
will be through written paper or practical test or oral test or presentation or a
combination of these.
6.2.2 In order to earn the credit in a course, a student has to obtain a grade other than
FF.
6.3 Performance at Internal Evaluation Components & University Examination
6.3.1 A student who secures at least 40% marks in the University examinations in any
course and at least a total of 50% marks in the internal evaluation components
and University examination put together will be declared to have passed that
course, as shown in the following table:
Minimum percentage marks in Minimum total percentage marks

University Exam for pass in any (i.e. Internal + University) for pass in
course any course
40% 50%
6.3.2 If a student secures minimum passing marks of 40% in the University

examinations in any course but fails to obtain the minimum passing total

percentage of 50%, he/she has to repeat the university examination in the course
till he/she secures the minimum passing total percentage of 50%.
7 Grading
7.1 The total of the internal evaluation marks and final University examination marks in
each course will be converted to a letter grade on a ten-point scale as per the following
scheme:
Grading Scheme:
Range of Marks (%) ≥80 ≥75 ≥70 ≥65 ≥60 ≥55 ≥50 <50
<80 <75 <70 <65 <60 <55
Letter Grade AA AB BB BC CC CD DD FF
Grade Point 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0
7.2 The student‟s performance in any semester will be assessed by the Semester Grade Point
Average (SGPA). Similarly, his performance at the end of two or more consecutive
semesters will be denoted by the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). The SGPA
and CGPA are calculated as follows:
(i) SGPA = ∑ CiGi/ ∑ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i
Gi is the Grade Point for the course i
and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses in the semester
(ii) CGPA = ∑ CiGi/ ∑ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i
Gi is the Grade Point for the course i
and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses of all semesters up to which CGPA is computed.
(iii) No student will be allowed to move to the second academic year if his/her CGPA is
less than 3 at the end of the first academic year.
(iv) In addition to above, a student has to comply with the requirements of the
regulatory bodies, wherever such requirements exist.
(v) A student will have a maximum of four chances* after first appearing in that
examination to clear that course, subject to the restriction on the span period
stipulated in clause 2.2 above.

(*Whenever the university conducts the examinations of that course, it will be
considered as a chance, irrespective of whether the student appears for the
examination or not.)
8. Awards of Degree
8.1 Every student of the programme who fulfils the following criteria will be eligible for
the award of the degree:
8.1.1 He should have earned at least minimum required credits as prescribed in

course structure.
8.2 Any student who fails to satisfy minimum requirement of CGPA will be allowed to
improve the grades so as to secure a minimum CGPA for the award of degree. Only the
latest grades obtained by him/her will be considered.
9. Award of Class
The class awarded to a student in the programme is decided by the final CGPA as per the
following scheme:
Distinction: CGPA ≥ 7.5
First class: CGPA≥ 6.0
Second Class: CGPA≥ 5.0
10. Transcript
The transcript issued to the student at the time of leaving the University will contain a
consolidated record of all the courses taken, credits earned, grades obtained,
SGPA,CGPA and class obtained.

Appendix – I
Details of MBA Programme Structure, Credit Requirements and

Specialisation
A1. Programme Structure
A1.1 The programme is structured into four semesters, consisting of classroom contact-based
work and a summer training / internship programme.
A1.2 Each semester will be for a minimum of 90 working days for classroom work, covering
classroom contact sessions, laboratory / tutorial / library / group work, case discussions
and presentation, field-based as well as library / internet search-based assignments and
projects, classroom exercises, management and simulation games, short quizzes, and
class tests. The duration for any organisational attachment / training during the semester
and final University examinations will be in addition to the 90 working days.
A1.3 The summer training / internship programme will be for a minimum duration of 45 days /
6-8 weeks and will commence at the end of the second semester classroom work.
A1.4 The structure of the MBA programme is as shown in the following figure:
Figure A1: MBA Programme Structure
ORIENTATION
SEMESTER 3
CLASSROOM
WORK
SEMESTER 1
SEMESTER 3
SEMESTER 4
SEMESTER 2 SUMMER
TRAINING/
Second Year
INTERNSHIP
First Year

A2. Credits
A2.1 Any student of the MBA programme who earns 100 credits by pursuing the prescribed
course work and passing all tests, examinations, assignments, laboratory work, projects
and all other evaluation components as per the passing standards of the University will
be eligible for the award of the Master of Business Administration (MBA) degree.
A2.2 A credit for the MBA programme will mean fifteen (15) classroom contact sessions of
sixty (60) minutes each or fifteen (15) laboratory / tutorial / library / group work sessions
of two hours (120 minutes) each, pursued over a semester. With a minimum of 90
working days spread over about 15 weeks at an average of 6 working days per week, a
credit will mean, on an average, one classroom contact session of sixty (60) minutes or
one laboratory / tutorial / library / group work session of two hours (120 minutes) per
week.
A2.3 The current distribution of credits over the two-year period for classroom contact
sessions and laboratory / tutorial / library / group work sessions will be as follows:
TableA2: Semester-wise Distribution of Credits
Number of
Sl. No. Semester
Credits
1 Semester - 1 23
2 Semester - 2 26
3 Semester 3 - Summer Training/ Internship 04
4 Semester - 3 - Classroom Work 24
5 Semester – 4 23
100
A2.4 A course will be of two or more credits as shown in the detailed list of courses for the
programme.
A2.5 All courses shown in the list of courses are compulsory for all MBA students. However,
students will have the option of pursuing a total of six elective courses of four credits
each, out of eight courses offered during third and fourth semesters and one
comprehensive project of six credits during the fourth semester.
A2.6 Some courses will have only classroom contact sessions and some others will have
tutorial / laboratory / library / group work sessions, as shown in the list of courses.

A2.7 The University has implemented Choice Based Credit System (CBCS), with effect from
2016-17,which provides a „cafeteria‟ approach; wherein the students can take courses of
their choice, and adopt an interdisciplinary approach to learning from the pull of courses
offered by all the Faculties/ Institutes/ Departments across university.
Below mentioned pull of courses will be offered to the students by different

departments/institutes. Each student has to choose one course (of his /her choice) from
the offered courses.
Semester 1
Course
No Course Name Department/Faculty
Code
1 MA771 Reliability and Risk Analysis Mathematics
2 EE 781 Optimization Techniques Engineering
3 ME781 Occupational Health and Safety Engineering
4 CE 770 Research Methodology Engineering
Computer
5 CA730 Internet & Web Designing
Application
6 PT795 Health & Physical Activity Physiotherapy
7 NR 751 Women‟s Health Nursing
8 RD701 Introduction to Analytical Techniques Applied Science
Introduction to Nanoscience &
9 RD702 Applied Science
Technology
Faculty of
10 MB650 Creative Leadership
Management Studies
11 PH825 Community Pharmacy Ownership Pharmacy
Semester 2
Course
No Course Name Department/Faculty
Code
1 EE782 Energy Audit and Management Engineering
2 CE771 Project Management Engineering
3 IT771 Cyber Security and Laws Engineering
Computer
4 CA 842 Mobile Application Development
Application
5 PT796 Fitness & Nutrition Physiotherapy
6 NR 752 Epidemiology and Community Health Nursing
7 OC733 Introduction to Polymer Science Applied Science
Faculty of
8 MB651 Software based Statistical Analysis
Management Studies
9 PH826 Intellectual Property Rights Pharmacy
10 MA772 Design of Experiments Mathematics

A3. Specialisation / Concentration
A3.1 The Institute will offer courses of specialisation in the following functional / sectoral
areas /streams of management:
Table A3: Areas / Streams of Specialisation/ Concentration
Functional Areas of Management
 Marketing Management
 Financial Management
 Human Resource Management
 Information Technology Management
 Health Care Management
 Project and Infrastructure Management
 Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management
 Tourism and Hospitality Management
 Journalism and Mass Communication Management
The Institute will endeavour to offer specialisation in as many areas / streams as possible
from the above list. However, any specific area / stream of specialisation / course will be
offered by the Institute during any year only if about twenty-five percent of the students
opt for it and if the faculty resources are available.
A3.2 Any student can claim to have specialised in a particular area / stream if he has
successfully completed
(i) At least six courses (amounting to a minimum of twenty four credits) in

the area / stream by taking electives offered in the area / stream during
the third and fourth semesters of the programme, and
(ii) A comprehensive project of six credits in the area / stream.
A3.3 Every student has to opt for specialisation in only one functional area of management for
the award of MBA degree.
A3.4 A student may specialise in only one functional / sectoral areas / streams of management
by taking six courses in each of the areas and carrying out a comprehensive project in
each of the areas.
A3.5 However, no student will be allowed to specialise in more than one functional stream of
management.
A4. Courses, Curricula and Revision
A4.1 The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Management Studies and the Dean of the Faculty of
Management Studies will keep the curricula current and in tune with the changes

happening in the world of management and make it relevant to the needs of different
organs of society.
A4.2 The review of the programme, its structure, the course curricula, pedagogy and
evaluation will be undertaken by the individual Boards of Studies at least once in every
two years.
A4.3 Every course of the programme will be designated by a five-digit alphanumerical code as
per the following scheme:
M B Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
Management Business Level / Year Course Serial No.

TEACHING & EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR MBA
Course Total Number

Course Title Remarks
Code of Credits
Semester – I
MB700.3 Managerial Economics 3
MB701.3 Quantitative Analysis for Management-1 3
MB702.3 Critical Thinking and Case Analysis 3
MB703.3 Managerial Communication 3
MB704.3 Financial Accounting 3
Management Process and Organizational
MB705.3 3
Behaviour
Introduction to Computers and Information
MB706.3 3
Technology
MB650 Creative Leadership 2 University Elective
Compulsory Non-Credit Course:
MB780.3 Communication Skills - 1 ---
02 Hrs.
Total 23
Semester – II
Macro-Economics and Business
MB740.3 3
Environment
MB741.3 Research Methods for Management 3
MB742.3 Quantitative Analysis for Management - 2 3
MB743.3 Human Resource Management 3
MB744.3 Costing and Control Systems 3
MB745.3 Financial Management 3
MB746.3 Marketing Management 3
MB747.3 Operations Management 3
MB651 Software Based Statistical Analysis 2 University Elective
Compulsory Non-Credit Course:
MB781.3 Communication Skills - 2 ---
02 Hrs.
Total 26

Course Total Number
Course Title Remarks
Code of Credits
Summer Internship Programme (Practical)
MB800.3 4 To be included in Semester – III credits
Duration: 06 to 08 Weeks
Semester – III
MB801.3 Strategic Management 3
MB802.3 Legal Environment and Public Systems 3
Core Courses
MB803.3 Management Information Systems 3
MB804.3 Entrepreneurship and MSMEs 3
Specialisation Course -1 4 Elective / Specialization will be offered
in only one stream / area which will
Specialisation Course – 2 4 remain same for Semester –IV also.
A student can choose any three courses
Specialisation Course – 3 4 from his/her chosen stream.
Total 28
Semester – IV
MB805.3 Comprehensive Project (Practical) 6
MB806.3 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3

Core Courses
MB807.3 Managerial Effectiveness 2
Specialisation Course – 4 4 Elective / Specialization will be offered
in only one stream / area which will
Specialisation Course – 5 4 remain same for Semester –IV also.
A student can choose any three courses
Specialisation Course – 6 4 from his/her chosen stream.
Total 23
Total Number of Credits 100

MBA Specialisation Streams and Courses for Semester-III
Stream/Area/
MM FM HRM IT HC PIM FBEM THM JMC
Group Code
Family Business Tourism Journalism and
Elective / Human Information Project and
Marketing Finance Health Care and and Mass
Specialisation Resource Technology Infrastructure
Entrepreneurship Hospitality Communication
Course 1 – Code MB810.3 MB820.3 MB830.3 MB840.3 MB850.3 MB860.3 MB870.3 MB880.3 MB890.3
Principles and
Consumer Strategic Information Health
Financial Project Concepts of
Course 1 Behaviour Human Technology in Economics Leadership Development
Decision Formulation Tourism and
Name and Resource Business and Social Skills Communication
Analysis and Execution Hospitality
Technology Management Management Policy
Management
Tourism
Management Business Introduction to
Integrated Organizational Management Hospital Social Projects Policy,
Course 2 of Regulations and Mass
Marketing and Change of Software Planning and and Destination
Name Financial Start-up Communication
Communication Development Projects in IT Management Infrastructure Planning and
Services Financing and Journalism
Development
Environmental
Sales Security Indian
System Health Creativity, Media Law
Course 3 and Analysis and Industrial Infrastructural Tourism and
Analysis and Management Incubation and and
Name Distribution Investment Relations Projects Hospitality
Design and Safety Innovation Ethics
Management Management Management
Planning
Course 4 – Code MB813.3 MB823.3 MB33.3 MB843.3 MB853.3 MB 863.3 MB873.3 MB883.3 MB893.3
Financial Introduction Legal
ERP Systems:
Reporting Human to Management of Aspects of Media
Course 4 Strategic Technology Health Care
Analysis and Resource Infrastructure Technology and Tourism and Economics and
Name Marketing Planning and Marketing
Corporate Auditing Policy for Innovation Hospitality Analysis
Implementation
Governance Development Management
Taxation Learning
Relational Financial
Management Project Social Front
Course 5 Rural Occupational Database Management Media
(Both – Management Entrepreneurship Office
Name Marketing Testing Management of Health Analytics
Direct or Through and Management Management
Systems Institutions
Indirect) Software

MBA Specialisation Streams and Courses for Semester-IV
Stream/Area /
MM FM HRM IT HC PIM FBEM THM JMC
Group Code
Family Business Journalism and
Elective / Human Information Project and Tourism and
Marketing Finance Health Care and Mass
Specialisation Resource Technology Infrastructure Hospitality
Entrepreneurship Communication
Course 1 - Code MB815.3 MB825.3 MB835.3 MB845.3 MB855.3 MB865.3 MB875.3 MB885.3 MB895.3
Data Project and International
Product and Human Hospital Succession
Course 1 Behavioural Warehousing Infrastructure Tourism and Print Media
Brand Resource Operations Planning and
Name Finance and Data Marketing and Hospitality Communication
Management Development Management Management
Mining Pricing Management
Quality
Human Hospital Entrepreneurship Management
Services and Business Project and Electronic
Course 2 Corporate Resource Management Marketing in Tourism
Relationship Process Infrastructure Media
Name Restructuring Information Information and and
Management Reengineering Financing Communication
System System Analytics Hospitality
Business
Application of
Information Medical Audit Cost Benefit Facility and Public Relation
Course 3 International International Compensation Strategic
Security and and Quality Analysis of Event and Corporate
Name Marketing Finance Management Frameworks for
Cyber Law Management Projects Management Film Creation
SMEs
Development Health Cost and
International Environmental Cyber
Banking Communication: Professionalization Operations in
Course 4 Retail Human Information and Social Journalism:
Rural and Development of Tourism and
Name Management Resource Systems Audit Impact Convergence
Micro and Family Business Hospitality
Management Assessment and New Media
Finance Dissemination Business
Competitive Crises Media
Digital and Derivatives Modeling and Legal Aspects Theory of Strategy and Management in Management
Course 5 Industrial
Social Media and Risk Analysis with of Constraints Management of Tourism and and
Name Jurisprudence
Marketing Management Spreadsheets Health Care Family Business Hospitality Ad Campaign
Portfolio Business Strategies

Note:
1. Procedure for Selection of Streams / Area / Group and Courses
Step: 1 – Selection of Stream (Only One for the Programme)

A student must choose any one stream of specialization out of the offering. The stream so chosen by the student will remain same for Semester – III
and IV. This will be the area of specialization. Under no circumstances the stream / area of specialization can be changed.
Step: 2 – Choice of Courses in Semester - III
From the stream so chosen (as mentioned in Step: 1), the student has to choose any 03 (three) courses out of 05 (five) options available. The total credit
that can be obtained in Semester-III for specialization courses will 3 courses x 4 credits = 12 Credits. In addition students will undergo a Summer
Internship Programme with Four (04) credits.
Step: 3 – Choice of Courses in Semester – IV
A Student has to repeat Step: 2 in Semester – IV and will have to choose 03 (three) more courses out of 05 (five) in the same stream / area of
specialization that he / she has selected during the start of Semester – III. The total credit that can be obtained in Semester-IV for specialization
courses except Comprehensive Project will be 3 courses x 4 credits = 12 Credits.
Step: 4 – Comprehensive Project
During Semester – IV, a student must undertake his / her Comprehensive Project in the same stream / area that he / she had chosen during the start of
the Semester – III. However, research / project of interdisciplinary nature can be undertaken with the permission of the concerned guide and head of
the institute / principal. The total credit that can be obtained in Semester-IV for specialization through Comprehensive Project is Six (06) credits.
Step: 5 – Total Number of Credits for Specialisation
The total credits for specialization will be 24 i.e. (6*4) for courses and 06 credits for Comprehensive Project. Hence, the specialisation will be of 30
credits.
2. Rules for offering Elective Stream / Courses

 Minimum 25% of students must have opted for a particular course.
 Based on availability of faculty.

Annexure – A – MBA Teaching / Evaluation Scheme
MBA - Semester – I
Teaching Scheme/Contact Hours Evaluation Scheme
Theory Practical
Course Code Course Name Credits
Contact Total
Theory Practical Internal External Total Internal External Total
Hours Hours
Managerial
MB700.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Economics
Quantitative
MB701.3 Analysis for 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management-1
Critical
MB702.3 Thinking and 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Case Analysis
Managerial
MB703.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication
Financial
MB704.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Accounting
Management
Process and
MB705.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Organizational
Behaviour
Introduction to
Computers and
MB706.3 3 --- --- 3.00 3.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Information
Technology
Creative
MB650 2 --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Leadership
Communication
MB780.3 --- --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Skills-1
Non- Library --- 5.00 --- 5.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
---
Credit
Areas --- MANAS --- --- 2.00 --- 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Computer
--- --- 4.00 --- 4.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Tutorial
Total 23 18.00 11.00 7.00 36.00 180 420 600 60 140 200

MBA - Semester - II
Evaluation Scheme
Teaching Scheme/Contact Hours
Theory Practical
Course Code Course Name Credits
Contact Total
Hours Hours
Macro-Economics
MB740.3 and Business 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Environment
Research Methods
MB741.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
for Management
Quantitative
MB742.3 Analysis for 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management - 2
Human Resource
MB743.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Costing and
MB744.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Control Systems
Financial
MB745.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Marketing
MB746.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Operations
MB747.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Software Based
MB651 Statistical 2 --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Analysis
Communication
MB781.3 --- --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Skills-2
Non- Library --- 4.00 4.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
---
Credit
Areas MANAS --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
---
Computer
--- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Tutorial
Total 26 24.00 08.00 04.00 36.00 240 560 800 30 70 100

MBA - Semester – III
Evaluation Scheme
Course Theory Practical
Course Name Credits
Code Contact Total
Hours Hours
Summer
MB800.3 Internship 4 --- 8.00 --- 8.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Programme
Strategic
MB801.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Legal
MB802.3 Environment and 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Public Systems
Management
MB803.3 Information 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Systems
Entrepreneurship
MB804.3 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and MSMEs
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 1
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 2
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 3
Non- MANAS --- --- 2.00 --- 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Credit Placement
Areas --- --- 2.00 --- 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Assistance
24 + 4
Total 24.00 12.00 0.00 36.00 210 490 700 30 70 100
= 28
Note: For the specialization courses – Teaching and Evaluation Scheme may differ based on the selection of the course by the
students.
For example: MB864.3 – Learning Project Management through Software has practical evaluation components.

Details of Area of Specializations and Courses Offered under Each area during Semester – III for MBA Programme
Course
Course Name Credits Contact Total Theory Practical
Code Theory Practical
Hours Hours Internal External Total Internal External Total
Marketing Management (Any Three)
Consumer Behaviour and
MB810.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Technology
Integrated Marketing
MB811.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication
MB812.3 Sales and Distribution Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB813.3 Strategic Marketing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB814.3 Rural Marketing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Finance Management (Any Three)
MB 820.3 Financial Decision Analysis 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB821.3 Management of Financial Services 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Security Analysis and Investment
MB822.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Financial Reporting Analysis and
MB823.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Corporate Governance
Taxation Management
MB824.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
(Both - Direct and Indirect)
OR
Human Resources Management (Any Three)
Strategic Human Resource
MB830.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Organizational and Change
MB831.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development
MB832.3 Industrial Relations 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB833.3 Human Resource Auditing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB834.3 Occupational Testing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course
Information Technology Management (Any Three)
Information Technology in Business
MB840.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Management of Software Projects in
MB841.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
IT
MB842.3 System Analysis and Design 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
ERP Systems: Technology Planning
MB843.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Implementation
Relational Database Management
MB844.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Systems
OR
Health Care Management (Any Three)
MB850.3 Health Economics and Social Policy 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB851.3 Hospital Planning and Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Environmental Health Management
MB852.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Safety Planning
MB853.3 Health Care Marketing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Financial Management of Health
MB854.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Institutions
OR
Project and Infrastructure Management (Any Three)
MB860.3 Project Formulation and Execution 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB861.3 Social Projects and Infrastructure 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB862.3 Infrastructural Projects 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Introduction to Infrastructure
MB863.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Policy for Development
Learning Project Management
MB864.3 4 --- --- 4.00 4.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
through Software
OR

Course
Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management (Any Three)
MB870.3 Leadership Skills 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business Regulations and Start-up
MB871.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Financing
Creativity, Incubation and
MB872.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Innovation
Management of Technology and
MB873.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Innovation
Social Entrepreneurship and
MB874.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
OR
Tourism and Hospitality Management (Any Three)
Principles and Concepts of Tourism
MB880.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Hospitality Management
Tourism Policy, Destination
MB881.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Planning and Development
Indian Tourism and Hospitality
MB882.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Legal Aspects of Tourism and
MB883.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospitality Management
MB884.3 Front Office Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Journalism and Mass Communication (Any Three)
MB890.3 Development Communication 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Introduction to Mass
MB891.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication and Journalism
MB892.3 Media Law and Ethics 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB893.3 Media Economics and Analysis 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB894.3 Media Analytics 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---

MBA - Semester – IV
Evaluation Scheme
Course Theory Practical
Course Name Credits
Code Contact Total
Hours Hours
Comprehensive
MB805.3 6 --- 12.00 --- 12.00 --- --- --- 60 140 200
Project (Practical)
Logistics and
MB806.3 Supply Chain 3 3.00 --- --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Managerial
MB807.3 2 --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Effectiveness
Specialization
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 4
Specialization
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 5
Specialization
4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 6
MANAS --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Non-
Credit Library --- --- 1.00 1.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Areas Placement
--- --- 4.00 4.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Assistance
Total 23 15.00 19.00 02.00 36.00 120 280 400 90 210 300

Details of Area of Specializations and Courses Offered under Each area during Semester – IV for MBA Programme
Teaching Scheme/Contact
Evaluation Scheme
Course Hours
Course Name Credits
Code Contact Total Theory Practical
Theory Practical
Marketing Management (Any Three)
MB815.3 Product and Brand Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Services and Relationship
MB816.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB817.3 International Marketing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB818.3 Retail Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB819.3 Digital and Social Media Marketing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Finance Management (Any Tree)
MB825.3 Behavioural Finance 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB826.3 Corporate Restructuring 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB827.3 International Finance 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development Banking Rural and
MB828.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Micro Finance
MB829.3 Derivatives and Risk Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Human Resources Management (Any Three)
MB835.3 Human Resource Development 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Human Resource Information
MB836.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
System
MB837.3 Compensation Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
International Human Resource
MB838.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB839.3 Industrial Jurisprudence 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course Contact Theory Practical
Course Name Credits Total
Code Theory Practical Hours
Hours Internal External Total Internal External Total
Information Technology Management (Any Three)
MB845.3 Data Warehousing and Data Mining 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB846.3 Business Process Reengineering 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB847.3 Information Security and Cyber Law 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB848.3 Information Systems Audit 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Modeling and Analysis with
MB849.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Spreadsheets
OR
Health Care Management (Any Three)
MB855.3 Hospital Operations Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospital Management Information
MB856.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
System
Medical Audit and Quality
MB857.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Health Communication:
MB858.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development & Dissemination
MB859.3 Legal Aspects of Healthcare 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Project and Infrastructure Management (Any Three)
Project and Infrastructure
MB865.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Marketing and Pricing
MB866.3 Project and Infrastructure Financing 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB867.3 Cost Benefit Analysis of Projects 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Environmental and Social Impact
MB868.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Assessment
MB869.3 Theory of Constraints 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course
Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management (Any Three)
Succession Planning and
MB875.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Entrepreneurship Marketing and
MB876.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Analytics
Application of Strategic
MB877.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Frameworks for SMEs
Professionalization of Family
MB878.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business
Competitive Strategy and
MB879.3 Management of Family Business 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Portfolio
OR
Tourism and Hospitality Management (Any Three)
International Tourism and
MB885.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospitality Management
Quality Management in Tourism and
MB886.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospitality Business
MB887.3 Facility and Event Management 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Cost and Operations in Tourism and
MB888.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Crises Management in Tourism and
MB889.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Journalism and Mass Communication (Any Three)
MB895.3 Print Media Communications 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB896.3 Electronic Media Communication 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Public Relations and Corporate Film
MB897.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Creation
Cyber Journalism: Convergence and
MB898.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
New Media
Media Management and Ad
MB899.3 4 4.00 --- --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Campaigning Strategies

Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester – 1)
CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

MB 700.3: MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (ME)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
I. Number of Credits : 3
II. Course Objectives
The objectives of this course are as follows:
 To enable the students to understand the principles underlying the structure and
functioning of markets.
 To help them to apply economic theory for optimal decision-making at the firm
level in the context of market constraints, through real-life examples from across
the globe and real cases of firms.
 To provide them sufficient exposure to the world of industry, trade and commerce,
so as to make them feel comfortable reading and understanding daily economic and
financial news about firms, and engaging in critical discussion on economic issues
affecting firms.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom Contact

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 Ten Principles of Economics
 Thinking like an Economist
1 07
 Interdependence and the Gains from Trade
 Firms and its Objective
 Frontiers of Micro-Economics
Understanding Markets Forces
 The Market Forces of Supply and Demand
 Elasticity, Types and Applications
2 07
 Supply, Demand and Government Policies
 The Theory of Consumer Choice
 Demand Forecasting and Analysis
Markets and Welfare
 Consumers, Producer, and Market Efficiency
3 06
 The Costs of Taxation
 International Trade
The Economics of the Public Sector
 Externalities
4  Public Goods and Common Resources 06
 The Design of the Tax System (with Specific Reference to
India)
Firm Behaviour and the Organisation of Industry
 The Cost of Production
5  Market Structures 08
o Firms in Competitive Markets
o Monopoly

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Oligopoly
 Monopolistic Competition
The Economics of Labour Markets
 Factor Markets
6 08
 Earnings and Discrimination
 Income Inequality and Poverty
7 Contemporary Issues 03
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise participatory and individual learning through active
classroom interaction and students‟ prior preparation. The course instructor is expected
to prepare a detailed session-wise schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the
reading material and case material for every session. Wherever the material for any
session is drawn from sources beyond the prescribed text-book, reference books,
journals and magazines in the library, websites and other resources accessible to the
students, the course instructor should make the material available to the students well in
advance, so that the students can come prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix
will be as follows:
 Classroom Discussion of Concepts and Applications … About 30 Sessions

 Case Discussions … About 06 Sessions
 Management Exercise / Stimulations /Games … About 02 Sessions
 Student‟s Presentations … About 05 Sessions
 Feedback … About 02 Sessions
The exact division among the above components will be announced by the instructor at
the beginning of the semester as a part of detailed session-wise schedule.
V. Internal Evaluation
The students‟ performance in the course will be evaluated on a continuous basis through
the following components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
Component Number per
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
2 Case Analysis and / or Presentation 2 45 90 30
3 Assignment / Project Work 1 60 60 20
4 Internal Tests 2 45 90 30
5 Attendance and Class Participation 30 10
Total 300 100

The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute-level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
VI. External Evaluation
The University examination will be for 3 hours and will be based on a written paper
carrying 70 marks. The paper will centre on the application to managerial decision-
making at the firm level. There will be one major integrated case.
VII. Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student should have developed:
 An appreciation of the principles of micro-economics and their potential for firm

level decision-making.
 A desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on a
regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
VIII. Reference Material
Text-Book
1. Mankiw, (Latest Edition), Principles of Microeconomics, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Salvatore Dominick, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics - Principles and Worldwide

Applications (Adapted Version), Oxford University Press.
2. Ravindra H. Dholakia and Ajay N. Oza, (Latest Edition), Microeconomics for
Management Students, Oxford University Press.
3. Douglas Bernheim, Michael W., (Latest Edition), Microeconomics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Joseph N., David P., (Latest Edition), Principles of Business Economics, Pearson
Education.
5. D. Salvatore and Ravikesh Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics in a Global
Economy, Oxford University Press.
6. H. L. Ahuja, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics, S. Chand
7. Geetika, Piyali Ghosh, Purba Roy Choudhary, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics,
McGraw Hill.
Journals / Magazines / Newspapers
1. Margin - The Journal of Applied Economic Research

2. South Asia Economic Journal
3. Global Business Review
4. Asian Journal of Management Cases
5. Global Journal of Emerging Market Economics
6. Economist
7. Economical and Political Weekly
8. Economic Times
9. Business Standard

MB701.3: QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR MANAGEMENT - 1
(QAM-1)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 To impart the students the required skills in collecting and understanding the data
using basic statistical tools and techniques.
 To help the students discover the potential for application of the statistical tools to
management functional areas like accounting, finance, operations, marketing, HR,
etc. by using MS-Excel / SYSTAT software package for practical applications.
 To expose the students to basic statistical tools and techniques relevant to
managerial decision-making through examples and cases drawn from different
functional areas;
 To help the students develop proficiency in the use of MS-Excel for data analysis and
interpretation of outputs for managerial decision-making; and
 To provide the necessary foundation for data collection, analysis, interpretation and
presentation in other courses.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Collection, Presentation of Data, and Descriptive
Statistics
 Collection of Data
o Understanding Data
o Data Measurements – Categorical, Numerical
 Presentation of Data in Tables and Charts
1 o Categorical Data –Bar Chart, Pie Chart 06
o Numerical Data – Histogram, Line Graph,
Contingency Tables
 Numerical Descriptive Measures
o Central Tendency
o Dispersion / Variation
o Shape – Skewness
Probability and Standard Probability Distributions, with
Illustrations from Managerial Contexts
 Basic Probability Concepts
o Marginal Probability
2 o Joint Probability 08
o Conditional Probability
o Probability Trees and Bayes‟ Theorem
 Probability Distributions
o Discrete Probability Distributions - Binomial,

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Poisson
o Continuous Probability Distributions – Normal and
Exponential
Sampling Distribution and Confidence Interval
Estimation
 Sampling Distribution
o Sampling – Concept and Types of Sampling
o Sampling Distribution of Mean
3 o Sampling Distribution of Proportion 06
 Confidence Interval Estimation
o Confidence Interval Estimation for Mean (σ Known
and σ Un-known Cases)
o Confidence Interval Estimation for Proportion
o Sample Size Determination
Hypothesis Testing
 One Sample Tests
o Hypothesis Testing - Methodology
o Z-test of Hypothesis for Mean (σ known)
o t-test of Hypothesis for Mean (σ unknown)
o Z-test of Hypothesis for Proportion
4  Two Sample Tests 08
o Comparing the Means of Two Independent
Populations
o Comparing the Means of Two Related Populations
o Comparing Two Population Proportions
o F-test for the Difference between Two Variances
o ANOVA
Chi-Square Tests
 Chi-Square Test for the Difference between Two Proportions
(Independent Samples)
5 06
 Chi-Square Test for the Difference among more than Two
Proportions
 Chi-Square Test of Independence
Correlation, Regression and Forecasting
 Correlation
 Simple Linear Regression
o Determining the Simple Linear Regression Equation
o Measures of Variation
o Residual Analysis
6 09
o Inference about Slope and Correlation Coefficients
 Multiple Regression
o Developing Multiple Linear Regression Model
o Residua Analysis
 Forecasting Basics
o Time Series Analysis

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Using Multiple Regression Model
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


V. External Evaluation
VI. Learning Outcomes
 The potential of using the statistical tools and techniques.

 Knowledge base of using software packages for managerial decision-making under
conditions of risk and uncertainty.
VII. Reference Material
Text-Book
1. David .M. Levine, Krehbiel, Berenson, P.K. Viswanathan, (Latest Edition), Business
Statistics – A First Course, (Latest Edition), Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Anderson, Sewney, (Latest Edition), Statistics for Business and Economics, Thomson.
2. Aczel, Soundarapandian, (Latest Edition), Complete Business Statistics, Tata McGraw-
Hill.
3. T N Srivastava, Shailaja Rego, (Latest Edition), Statistics for Management, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
4. Christian Albright, Wayne Winston, et. al., (Latest Edition), Data Analysis and
Decision-making with MS-Excel, Thomson.
5. D. P. Apte, (Latest Edition), Statistical Tools for Managers – Using MS-Excel, Excel Books
6. Naval Bajpai, (Latest Edition), Business Statistics, Pearson.

MB702.3: CRITICAL THINKING AND CASE ANALYSIS (CTCA)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 To expose the students to the need for critical thinking practice as a necessary
ingredient in decision-making capabilities;
 To inculcate in them the habit of analysis as a routine and enable them to seek and
know the reasoning behind any situation, decision, data, information, news, etc.; and
to demonstrate how to apply an analysis framework to an in-depth case example
indicating necessary connections formed during analysis.
 To develop the students as managers who know how to think, i.e. how to become
independent, self-directed thinkers and learners, to introduce the key steps of case
analysis, output of recommendations and writing skills.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Fundamentals of Critical Thinking
 Introduction to Critical Thinking
 Barriers to Critical Thinking
1  Basic Logical Concepts 06
 Identifying Statements, Premises, Conclusions
 Recognising Arguments
 Language and Critical Thinking
Logical Fallacies
 Fallacies of Relevance
 Fallacies of Insufficient Evidence Arguments
 Analyzing Arguments
2  Evaluating Arguments 08
 Informal Logic
 Categorical Logic
 Propositional Logic
 Inductive Reasoning
Researching and Writing Arguments
 Finding, Evaluating and Using Sources
 Writing Argumentative Essays
3 06
 Practical Applications
 Thinking Critically about the Media
 Science and Pseudoscience

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Case Analysis
 Types of Cases
4 06
 Working with Cases
 Learning from Case Analysis
Case Analysis Overview
 Case Reading
 Taking Case Notes
 Identifying the Business / Management Problem
 Identifying and Prioritising the Issues
 Bringing in Outside Concepts
5 08
 Evaluating Relevant Information and Underlying
Assumptions
 Developing Possible Solutions
 Evaluation of Alternatives and Selection of Appropriate
Solution
 Action Planning
Writing Case Analysis
6  Writing the First Draft 06
 Second, Subsequent and Final Drafts
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An analytical and enquiring mindset that does not accept any information at face
value, but evaluates critically its source and implications.
 An ability to analyze the case (situation) with application of knowledge attained and
write the report.
Text-Book
1. Bassham Gregory, et. al., (Latest Edition), Critical Thinking – A Student‟s Introduction, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
2. James S. O‟ Rourke IV, Singh Anubha, (Latest Edition), Management Communication – A
Case-Analysis Approach, Pearson Education.
Reference-Book
1. TaherNasreen, Gopalan Swapna (ed.), (Latest Edition), Critical Thinking –
Concepts and Applications, ICFAI University Press.
1. Dialogue Journals and Critical Thinking.

MB703.3: MANAGERIAL COMMUNICATION (MC)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 To develop communication skills required in business organisation, namely:

listening, speaking reading and writing.
 Sensitize the students on the nuances of effective communication at work.
 Students should be able to demonstrate improved interpersonal and group
communication skills
 Students should be able to design and communicate effective formal and informal
messages
 Students should be able to make an effective presentation with an appropriate media
support.
 Student should demonstrate improved persuasion and influencing skills for better
negotiations.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
No. Contact Sessions
Introduction
 The Role of Communication in Contemporary Business
 Communicating within Organizations
 Types of Communication
1  Process of Communication 09
 The C‟s of Good Business Communication
 Causes of Interference to Effective Business Communication
 External Influences on Business Communication
 Using Technology to Improve Business Communication
Interpersonal Communication-I
 Introduction to Interpersonal Communication
2  Communication Styles or Modes 08
 Managerial Listening and Responding
 Nonverbal Communication
Interpersonal Communication-II
 Managing Conflicts in Organization
3  Communicating in Diverse Environment 08
 Managerial Negotiation
 Interviews
Managerial Writing
 Stages of Writing process
4 09
 Preparing Good-and-Neutral News Messages
 Preparing Bad-News Messages

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
 Preparing Persuasive Messages
 Notice, Agenda and Minutes of Various Official Meetings
 Organizing Business Reports and Proposal
 Communication for Employment
Communicating in Work Teams
5  Productive Meeting Management 07
 Making Formal Presentation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to communicate effectively in business situations.

 The ability to communicate message accurately, handle intercultural situation that
require thoughtful communication.
 The ability to use appropriate words and tones and so on.
Text-Books
1. Bovee, Courtla and L., Thill, John V., Chaturvedi, Mukesh, (Latest Edition), Business
Communication Today Pearson Education.
2. Lehman, Dufrene, Sinha, (Latest Edition), BCOM. Cengage Learning.
3. Raman, Singh, Praksh, (Latest Edition), Business Communication, Oxford.
Reference-Books
1. Lesikar, R.V. and M.E. Flatley, (Latest Edition), Basic Business Communication, Tata
McGraw-Hill
2. Koneru Arun, (Latest Edition), Professional Communication, McGraw Hill
3. O, Rourke James and Gupta Jaba Mukherjee, (Latest Edition), Management
Communication: A Case-Analysis Approach, Pearson Education.
4. Hynes Geraldine, (Latest Edition), Managerial Communication: Strategies and Applications,
Tata McGraw-Hill.

1. Business Communication Quarterly
2. Journal of Business Communication
3. Strategic Communication Management
4. Journal of Business and Technical communication
5. Harvard Business Review

MB704.3 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (FA)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 To expose the students to the framework of accounting concepts.

 To relook at the mechanics related to preparation of the balance sheet, income
statement, cash flow statements.
 To understand computation of ratios and basic analysis of the annual report.
 To help the students evaluate managerial choices of alternative accounting practices,
issues in accounting policy and accounting standards.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Accounting
 Beginning Assumptions
 The Income Statement
 The Balance Sheet
1 08
 The Statement of Retained Earnings
 The Statement of Cash Flows
 Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information
 Recording Accounting Transactions
Accrual Accounting and Adjusting Entries
 Accrual and Cash Bases of Accounting
2  Adjusting Journal Entries 08
 Closing Process
 The Accounting Cycle
Completion of Accounting Cycle: Final Accounts
 Financial Statements of Limited Liability Company
 Measurement of Business Income
3 09
 Revenue and Expense Recognition, Assets and Liabilities,
Divisible Profits, Managerial Remuneration.
 Consolidated Financial Statement
Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements
 Types of Analysis
4  Comparative Financial Statements
09
 Common Size Statements
 Trend Analysis
 Ratio Analysis
Creative Accounting
5
 Window Dressing 08
 Forensic Accounting and Forensic Auditing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
 Important Standards
 Differences and Similarities between Indian AS, IAS / IFRS
and US GAAP
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 Develop a thorough understanding of accounting records and how transactions are

recorded in them;
 Be able to understand and interpret financial statements for various forms of
businesses;
 Be able to analyse and interpret the data contained in these statements for improved
decision-making; and

Text-Books
1. Norman H. Godwin, C. Wayne Alderman, Debashish Sanyal, (Latest Edition),
Financial ACCT- A South Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning.
2. Dhanesh K Khatri, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Paresh Shah, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Management, Oxford University
Press.
4. Asish K. Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Business Managers-
PHI.
5. Dr. S.N. Maheshwari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting,
Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Ambrish Gupta, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting Management An Analytical

Perspective, Pearson Education.
2. Stice and Stice, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting Reporting amp; Analysis, Thomson.
3. Robert N. Anthony, David F. Hawkins and Kenneth A. Merchant, (Latest Edition),
Accounting –Text and Cases, TMH.
4. Samuel C. Weaver, J. Fred Weston, (Latest Edition), Finance and Accounting for Non-
financial Managers, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
5. Horngreen, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Pearson Education.
6. Ashok Banerjee, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Excel Books.
7. Weygandt, Kieso, Kimmel, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Wiley India Edition.
8. M.E. Thukaram Rao, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Managers, New Age International
Publishers.
9. S. K. Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management-Vikas Publication.
10. N. P. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management, S Chand Publications.

1. Asian Journal of Finance and Accounting
2. Finance India

MB705.3: MANAGEMENT PROCESS AND ORGANIZATIONAL
BEHAVIOUR (MP & OB)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 To expose the students to the different functions performed by managers, the roles
they have to play for those functions , and the knowledge and skills they have to
develop for the roles through real life examples and cases;
 To help the students develop an understanding of concepts and tools like MBO and
SWOT to develop proficiency in the planning of activities of an organization.
 To enable the students to appreciate the importance of entrepreneurship, innovation
and leadership and to help them realize the need for collaboration and networking in
the management of any functional area of management;
 To provide the necessary foundation for all other courses based on management
practices across the world
 To expose the students to the environmental and organisational context, cognitive
processes and dynamics of organisational behavior; and
 To enable them to manage and lead for high performance with the human being at
the centre of the organisation.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foundations of Management
 Managing
 The External Environment and Organisational Culture
 Managerial Decision Making
1 Planning and Strategizing 06
 Planning and Strategic Management
 Ethics and Corporate Responsibility
 International Management
 Entrepreneurship
Organising
 Organisation Structure
 Organisational Agility
 Human Resources Management, especially with Diverse
Workforce
2 07
 Types of Organizations and Basis for Choice of Different
Types
Leading
 Leadership
 Motivation for Performance

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Teamwork
 Communicating
Controlling
 Managerial Control
3 07
 Managing Technology and Innovation
 Creating and Managing Change
Organizational Culture
 Organizational Theory
4 07
 Creating and Maintaining Organizational Culture
 Rewards and Recognition in Organizational Settings
Cognitive Processes of Organizational Behaviour
 Meaning and Types of Personality
5  Nature and Dimensions of Attitude 07
 Organizational Commitment
 Motives, Motivation and Theories
Dynamics of Organizational Behaviour
 Cause and Effect of Stress
6  Concept and Types of Conflict 07
 Coping Strategies for Stress and Conflict
 Political Implications of Power
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

The students‟ performance in the course will be evaluated through the following
components:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding and exposure to the functional areas of management and the
roles managers assume for managerial performance.
Text-Book
1. Bateman Thomas, Snell Scott, (Latest Edition), Management – Leading and Collaborating
in the Competitive World, Tata McGraw-Hill.
2. Luthans Fred (2008), Organisational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill (11 e)
Reference-Books
1. Weihrich Heinz and Koontz Harold, (Latest Edition), Management: A Global and
Entrepreneurial Perspective, Tata McGraw-Hill.
2. Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert Jr., (Latest Edition), Management, Prentice Hall of India.
3. Weihrich Heinz and Koontz Harold (2008), Management: A Global and Entrepreneurial
Perspective, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Kaul, Asha, Effective Business Communication, PHI, New Delhi.
5. Chaturvedi, P.D., and Mukesh Chaturvedi, Business Communication, Pearson
Education
6. McGrath, E.H., Basic Managerial Skills for All, PHI, New Delhi
7. Slocum, Helrigel, Organisational Behaviour, Thomson/Cengage
8. Udai Pareek (2008), Understanding Organisational Behaviour, Oxford University
Press


2. Academy of Management Review
3. California Management Review
4. Vikalpa
5. IIMB Management Review
6. Decision
7. Indian Management
8. The Smart Manager

MB706.3: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY (ICIT)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
 This is an introductory course in basic computer use and to expose the students to
IT relevant to the immediate needs of managers;
 Microsoft Office is powerful and popular application software that is used in
businesses around the world. To enable them to develop proficiency in using certain
components of the package includes MS Word, MS Excel, MS Power Point, MS
Access and MS project for managerial applications and for pursuing the other
courses of the MBA programme successfully
III. Course Outline
Module
Title / Topic Classroom Contact / Lab Sessions
No.
Introduction to Computer
 Computer Hardware
01
 Computer Software
 Exercises
Basic of Operating System
 Folder and Files
 Widows Accessory 01
 Widows Utilities
1
 Exercises
Introduction to MS Office Applications
 Microsoft Office Word
 Microsoft Office Power Point
 Microsoft Office Excel 01
 Microsoft Office Access
 Microsoft Outlook
 Microsoft Office Project
Microsoft Office Word
 Creating and Editing document
 Formatting and Printing
2 06
 Table and Graphics
 Mail Merge and Labels
 Exercises

Module
Title / Topic Classroom Contact / Lab Sessions
No.
Microsoft Office Excel (Spreadsheet)
 Introduction to Excel
 Formula and Function
3 12
 Charts
 Exercises
Microsoft Office PowerPoint
 Introduction to PowerPoint
 Working with Slide
4  Exercises 03
Microsoft Office Outlook
 Introduction to Outlook
 Managing Daily e-mail and Appointments
 Exercise
Microsoft Office Access
 Basic Concepts of a Database -Table, Field,
Records, Key, Data Manipulation, Query, etc.
 Creating a Database
06
 Working with Forms
 Using Queries
 Generating Reports
5
 Exercises
Introduction to IT
 Introduction to World Wide Web
 E-mail Services and Searching
03
 Introduction to Designing Web-Pages
 Insert Text, Image, Hyperlink
 Exercises
Microsoft Office Project
 Introduction to MS Project 2007
 Creating and Defining Projects
 Calendars
 Organizing Tasks
6  Working with Task Duration, Estimates,
10
and Dependencies
 Working with Resources
 Customizing and Formatting
 Resource Management
 Tracking Progress
 Running Reports
Total 45

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:
 Classroom / Lab Discussion of Concepts and … About 75 Sessions

Applications
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The University examination will be for 70 marks and will be based on practical
computer-based tests and a viva-voce.
VII. Learning Outcome
 An ability to use computers and basic application software packages effectively for
different types of work like formal report preparation, making presentations

 The student should have started using excel effectively to have aid in financial and
statistical analysis
 Should be able to plan the activity and appointments using outlook and plan project
for effective implementation.
 Students will develop basic computer skills in above mentioned area which not only
aid them in college studies but also helpful in the industry.
Reference Material
Text-Books
1. R. P. Soni, Harshal Arolkar, Sonal Jain, (Latest Edition), Working with Personal Computer
Software, Books India Publications, Ahmedabad.
2. Stephen L. Nelson, (Latest Edition), The Complete Reference: Office XP, Tata
McGrawHill Publication.
3. Elaine Marmel, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Office Project Bible, Wiley Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Vishal Soni, (Latest Edition), Computer Applications for Management, Himalaya

Publishing House.
2. David Whigham, Business Data Analysis Using Excel, (Latest Edition), Oxford
University Publication.
3. Gary B. Shelly, Misty E. Vermaat, Thomas J. Cashman, (Latest Edition), Microsoft
Office : Introductory Concepts and Techniques, Premium Video Edition.
4. Greg Harvey, (Latest Edition), Excel For Dummies [Paperback]
5. Joe Habraken, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Office in Depth.
6. Rajesh Sheshadri, (Latest Edition), Excel with Excel An Executive‟s Handbook, Prakash
books Publication.

MA771: RELIABILITY AND RISK ANALYSIS-I
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1 (University Elective – CBCS)
Credits and Hours:

Teaching Scheme Theory Practical/Tutorial Total Credit
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the Course:

The course is designed for Engineers, Mathematician, and Industrial Managers. This course
covers basics of Probability and Statistics for prediction of failures in system and quantification
of risk
The objectives of the course are to:
1. Understand basics of Probability and Probability distributions

2. Define the system to be analyzed.
3. Identify the system performance measures (Measuring Reliability and Risk)
B. Outline of the course:

Sr Title of the unit Minimum number
No. of hours
1. Introduction to Probability and Statistics 06
2. Characteristics of Reliability 06
3. Reliability of Simple Systems 06
4. Concept of Safety and Risk Analysis 06
5. Reliability Modeling 06
C. Total Hours (Theory): 30

D. Detailed Syllabus:
1 Introduction to Probability and Statistics 06 Hours
1.1 Random Event.
1.2 Basic formula of Probability.
1.3 Random Variable and Probability Distribution Functions.
1.4 descriptive statistics
2 Characteristics of Reliability 06 Hours
2.1 Reliability of a Unit Functioning until First Failure
2.2 System Reliability
2.3 Testing for Reliability
2.4 Exponential Law and Evaluation of parameter
3. Reliability of Simple Systems 06 Hours
3.1 Series System
3.2 Parallel System
3.3 K out of N systems
4. Concept of Safety and Risk Analysis 06 Hours
4.1 Qualitative definition of Risk
4.2 Quantitative definition of Risk
4.3 Failure Model and Effect Analysis(FMEA)
4.4 Hazard and operability analysis(HAZOP)
4.5 Fault Tree Analysis
5. Reliability Modeling 06 Hours
5.1 Software Reliability Analysis
5.2 Human Reliability
5.3 Stress-Strength Analysis
Instructional Method and Pedagogy:
 At the start of course, the course delivery pattern, prerequisite of the subject will be
discussed.
 Lectures will be conducted with the aid of multi-media projector, black board, OHP etc.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures/laboratory which carries a 5% component of the overall
evaluation.
 Minimum two internal exams will be conducted and average of two will be considered as a
part of 15% overall evaluation.

 Assignments based on course content will be given to the students at the end of each
unit/topic and will be evaluated at regular interval. It carries a weighting of 5%.
 Two Quizzes (surprise test) will be conducted which carries 5% component of the overall
evaluation.
E. Student Learning Outcomes:
 At the end of the course the students will be able to understand the basic concepts of
Reliability and Risk Analysis.
 Student will be able to apply concepts of these course in their study of specialization
F. Recommended Study Material:
 Text Books:
1. Mathematical Methods of Reliability Theory. B. V. Gnedenko, Yu. K. Belyayev, and A. D.
Solovyev ,Academic Press 1969
2. An Introduction to Basics of Reliability and Risk Analysis. Enric Zio, World Scientific
Publishing Co.Pte. Ltd.2007
3. Reliability and Risk Analysis. Terje Aven, Elsevier Publicaion,1992
 Reference Books/Articles:
1. On The Quantitative Definition of Risk, Stanley Kaplan and B. John Garrick, Risk
Analysis, Vol. I, No. I , 1981
2. Probability concepts in engineering planning and design. Volume II – decision, risk and
reliability. Ang, A.H.-S. and Tang, W.H John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York (1984)
3. M. Modarres, Reliability and Risk Analysis, Marcel Dekker (1993).
4. N.J. McCormick, Reliability and Risk Analysis, Academic Press (1981).

EE781: OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
Credits and Hours:
Teaching scheme Theory Practical Total Credit
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the course:

Optimization techniques, having reached a degree of maturity in recent years, are being used in a
wide spectrum of industries, including aerospace, automotive, chemical, electrical, construction,
and manufacturing industries. Optimization methods, coupled with modern tools of computer-
aided design, are also being used to enhance the creative process of conceptual and detailed
design of systems.
The objectives of the course are:
1.To provide an overview of state-of-the-art optimization algorithms and the theoretical

principles that underpin them
2. To prepare the students with the modelling skills necessary to describe and formulate
optimization problems
3. To introduce methods of optimization to students, including linear programming,
network flow algorithms, integer programming, interior point methods, quadratic
programming, nonlinear programming, and heuristic methods.
4. To make the students familiar with the applications of various classical and AI methods
in solving various complex real-world optimization problems.
5. To introduce the students with software tool to solve optimization problem
B. Outline of the Course:
Sr. No. Title of Unit Min. no of hours
1 Fundamentals of Optimization 01
2 Linear Programming 05
3 Unconstrained Optimization 04
4 Nonlinear Programming 05

5 Fundamentals of Artificial Intelligence methods 01
6 Particle Swarm Optimization and Cuckoo Search Algorithm 08
7 MATLAB programming and Optimization Toolbox 06
Total Hours (Theory): 30
C. Detailed Syllabus
1 Fundamentals of Optimization 01 Hours
Introduction, Feasibility and optimality, Convexity, constraints, Rates of convergence
2 Linear programming 05 Hours
Introduction, Formulation of Linear programming problem, Graphical method, Simplex

method, Basic solution, Basic feasible solution, Simplex algorithm, Two phase method.
3 Unconstrained Optimization 04 Hours
Introduction, Optimality conditions, Newton‟s method for minimization, Line search methods,
Steepest-Descent method, Quasi-Newton method, Modified newton‟s method
4 Nonlinear Programming 05 Hours
Optimality conditions for constrained problems, Kuhn-Tucker conditions, Penalty function

method, Barrier method, The Lagrange multipliers and the Lagrangian function, Sensitivity
analysis, Computing the Lagrange multipliers, Sequential quadratic programming, Interior
point method
5 Fundamentals of Artificial Intelligence methods 01 Hours
To understand importance of AI methods and their comparison with various classical methods
using various criteria.
6 Particle Swarm Optimization and Cuckoo Search Algorithm 08 Hours
Introduction to PSO, Unconstrained and constrained optimization using PSO, Effects of

various coefficients on convergence, Cuckoo Search (CS) Algorithm, Comparison between PSO
and CS

7 MATLAB programming and Optimization Toolbox 06 Hours
MATLAB programming of various classical and AI methods. Use of MATLAB optimization

toolbox to solve various optimization problems.
D. Instructional Methods and Pedagogy

discussed.
 Lectures will be conducted with the aid of multi-media projector, black board, OHP
etc.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures which carries a component of the overall
evaluation.
 Minimum two internal exams will be conducted and will be considered as a part of
overall evaluation.
 Assignments based on course content will be given to the students for each unit/topic
and will be evaluated at regular interval and its weightage may be reflected in the
overall evaluation.
A. The students will be able to get awareness about the optimization problems. They can
differentiate the class of classical optimization methods and AI methods
B. The student will learn to handle, solve and analyzing problems using linear
programming and other mathematical programming algorithms
C. The students will also be able to learn different techniques to solve Non- Linear
Programming Problems. They can also use search techniques methods, which are based
on iterative methods, to find optimal solutions of Non-Linear Programming Problems.
D. Ability to develop codes for evolutionary optimization techniques and to solve wide
range of optimization problem.
E. The students will be able to solve optimization methods using software tools such as
MATLAB and be prepared for developing case studies and simulation examples
Books:
1. “Optimization Methods for Engineers”, N.V.S. Raju, PHI, 2014.

2. “Artificial intelligence and intelligent systems”, N.P. Padhy, Oxford University Press,
2005
3. “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice”, S. Rao, 4 th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2009

ME781: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY
Credits and Hours:
Teaching Scheme Theory Practical Total Credit
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

 To raise awareness of key health and safety issues in the workplace.
 To provide knowledge of occupational health and safety, emergency planning and
environmental management.
 To ingrain the consciousness in students related to occupational health,
occupational hygiene, ergonomics, safety and risk management, research
methods, and legal studies.
Sr. No. Title of the Unit Minimum Number
of Hours
1 Introduction to occupational health and safety 02
2 Occupational safety and management standards, and 04
regulations for health, safety and environment
3 Identifying safety and health hazards, and risk analysis 04
4 Occupational physiology and psychosocial factors, and 04
work organization
5 Ergonomic workplace design and musculoskeletal 04
diseases
6 Control of workplace hazards 04
7 E-waste management 04
8 Work practices in industries and global strategy on 04
occupational safety and health

C. Detailed Syllabus:
1 Introduction to occupational health and safety 02 Hours
Definition and history of occupational health & safety, workplace hazards.
2 Occupational safety & management standards and regulations 04 Hours

for health, safety and environment
2.1 Factories act and rules; Workmen compensation act. Indian explosive act -
Gas cylinder rules - SMPV Act - Indian petroleum act and rules.
2.2 Environmental pollution act. Manufacturing, storage and import of

Hazardous Chemical rules 1989, Indian Electricity act and rules. Overview
of OHSAS 18000 and ISO 14000 National legislation and public
organizations.
3 Identifying safety and health hazards, and risk analysis 04 Hours
3.1 Hazard, risk issues and hazard assessment, Introduction to hazard, hazard
monitoring-risk issue.
3.2 Hazard assessment, procedure, methodology; safety audit, checklist

analysis, what-if analysis, safety review, preliminary hazard analysis (PHA),
hazard operability studies (HAZOP).
3.3 Computer aided risk analysis, Fault tree analysis & Event tree analysis,
Logic symbols, methodology, minimal cut set ranking - fire explosion and
toxicity index (FETI), various indices – Hazard analysis (HAZAN).
3.4 Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA), Basic concepts of software on
risk analysis, CISCON, FETI, ALOHA.
4 Occupational physiology, Psychosocial factors and Work 04 Hours

organization
4.1 Man as system component – allocation of functions – efficiency.
4.2 Occupational work capacity aerobic and anaerobic work – evaluation of

physiological requirements of jobs – parameters of measurements –

categorization of job heaviness
4.3 Work organization – stress – strain – fatigue – rest pauses – shift work –
personal hygiene.
5 Ergonomic workplace design and Musculoskeletal diseases 04 Hours
5.1 Meaning of Ergonomic
5.2 Meaning of Workplace Design.
5.3 Musculoskeletal Diseases causes and prevention
6 Control of workplace hazards 04 Hours
6.1 Workplace hazards and risk control, Transport hazards and risk control,
Musculoskeletal hazards and risk control, Work equipment hazards and
risk control
6.2 Electrical safety, Fire safety, Chemical and biological health hazards and
risk control, Physical and psychological health hazards and risk control,
Health and safety practical application
7 E-waste management 04 Hours
7.1 Waste characteristics, generation, collection, transport and disposal
8 Work practices in industries and global strategy on 04 Hours

occupational safety and health
8.1 Work practices in industries in manufacturing industries
8.2 Work practices in industries in service industries
D. Instructional Method and Pedagogy:

 At the starting of the course, delivery pattern, prerequisite of the subject will be
discussed.
 Lectures will be conducted with the aid of Multi-Media projector, Black Board, OHP etc.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures.
 Internal exams/Unit tests/Surprise tests/Quizzes/Seminar/Assignments etc. will be
conducted as a part of continuous internal theory evaluation.

 Tutorials related to course content will be given to students.
 In the lectures discipline and behavior will be observed strictly.
 Industrial visits will be organized for students to explore industrial facilities. Students
are required to prepare a report on industrial visit and submit as a part of the
assignment.
E. Students Learning Outcomes:

 Students will be able to make models for safety at work.
 Students will be able to select safety methods.
 Students will be able to understand how hazardous the process is at work.
 Students will be able to understand proneness of accidents.
 Text Books:
1. Grimaldi and Simonds , Safety Management, AITBS Publishers , New Delhi (2001)
2. Industrial safety and health, David L. Goetsch, Macmillan Publishing Company, 1993.
3. R.K.Jain and Sunil S.Rao , Industrial Safety, Health and Environment Management
Systems, Khanna publishers , New Delhi (2006)
4. Salvendy, G. (2012). Handbook of human factors and ergonomics. John Wiley & Sons.
 Reference Books:
1. Arezes, P., Baptista, J. S., Barroso, M. P., Carneiro, P., Cordeiro, P., Costa, N., &
Perestrelo, G. (Eds.). (2013). Occupational Safety and Hygiene. CRC Press.
2. Chaturvedi, P. (2005). Managing Safety Challanges Ahead. Concept Publishing
Company.
3. Healey, B. J., & Walker, K. T. (2009). Introduction to occupational health in public
health practice (Vol. 13). John Wiley & Sons.
4. Hester, R. E., & Harrison, R. M. (2009). Electronic waste management (Vol. 27).
Royal Society of Chemistry.
5. Karwowski, W., Soares, M. M., & Stanton, N. A. (Eds.). (2011). Human Factors and
Ergonomics in Consumer Product Design: Uses and Applications. CRC Press.
6. Khan, B. H. (Ed.). (1997). Web-based instruction. Educational Technology.
7. Roughton, J., & Crutchfield, N. (2011). Job hazard analysis: A guide for voluntary
compliance and beyond. Butterworth-Heinemann.
8. Salvendy, G. (Ed.). (2001). Handbook of industrial engineering: technology and
operations management. John Wiley & Sons.
9. Smedley, J., Dick, F., & Sadhra, S. (Eds.). (2013). Oxford handbook of occupational
health. Oxford University Press.

10. Tillman, C. (2006). Principles of occupational health and hygiene: an introduction.
Allen & Unwin.
 Web Material:
1. International Labour Organization (ILO) http://www.ilo.org/public/english/
2. Occupational Safety & Health Administration United States Department of
Laborhttps://www.osha.gov/about.html
 Other Material:
1. International Journal of Labour Research
http://www.ilo.org/actrav/info/pubs/WCMS_158769/lang--en/index.htm
2. International journal of occupational safety And ergonomics (http://archiwum

.ciop.pl/757).
3. Journal of Safety and Health at Work (http://www.journals.elsevier.com/safety-
and-health-at-work/)

CE772: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

Quite frequently these days‟ people talk of research, both in academic institutions and outside.
Several research studies are undertaken and accomplished year after year. But in most cases very
little attention is paid to an important dimension that of research methodology. A great deal of
research tends to be futile. It may be noted, in the context of planning and development that the
significance of research lies in its quality and not in quantity.
 To introduce the basic methods of conducting research, explore ideas in formulating research
objectives and hypotheses and sample framework for taking up research studies in a
structured manner.
 To facilitate for the development of an insight into different statistical tools for data analysis,
interpretation and presentation of reports in different areas of research.
 To enable researchers, irrespective of their discipline, in developing the most appropriate
methodology for their research.
 To pay due attention to designing and adhering to the appropriate methodology throughout
for improving the quality of research
 To impact higher education in basic areas as well as interdisciplinary areas and to provide
researchers a platform to carry out quality research and relevant research.
 To prepare the literature in chronological pattern and logically analyze the concerns.
 To help researchers to use tools, techniques, concepts and world‟s best practices to present a
unique research.
 To frame the research problems to enhance the scale of understanding.
 To give guidance and support to initiate and carry out quality research with a focus on
awareness of areas of potential research, guidelines to carry out literature survey in the areas

of interest, selection of research area, selection of problem for research and formulation of
title, justification of title in current context of research, anticipated research outcome and its
relevance, research methodology to undertake the research, month wise plan for the research
work to be carried out, six monthly review of research work of Doctoral Committee with
eminent well experience Guides constituted by University etc.
Sr. Title of the unit Minimum number of
hours
No.
1 General introduction to Research 02
2 Research problem Formulation 03
3 Research Design 08
4 Research Publication & Presentation 08

5 Research Ethics and Morals 05
7 Quality indices of research publication 04

Total hours: 30
1 General introduction to Research 02 Hours
General Introduction:
Importance of Research, Role of Research, Aims & Objectives, Research

Process, Phases of Research. Introduction to Research Methodology:
Meaning of Research, Objectives of Research, Motivations in Research,
Types of Research, Research Approaches, Significance of Research, Research
Methods v/s Methodology, Research and Scientific Methods, Research
Process, Criteria of Good Research.
2. Research problem Formulation: 03 Hours
Review of Research Literature:
Defining the Research Problem: What is Research Problem, Selecting the Problem,
Necessity of and Techniques in defining the problem.
Purpose and use of literature review, locating relevant information, use of library &

electronic databases, preparation & presentation of literature review, research
article reviews, theoretical models and frame work. Identification of gaps in
research, formulation of research problem, definition of research objectives.
3. Research Design: 08 Hours
Research Design: Meaning, Need, Features of Good Design, Concepts, Types. Basic
Principles of Experimental Design, Developing a Research Plan.
Qualitative Methods: Types of hypothesis and characterization. Quantitative Methods:

Statistical methods for testing and evaluation.
Characterization of experiments: Accuracy, reliability, reproducibility, sensitivity,

Documentation of ongoing research.
Sample Design: Implication, Steps. Criteria for selecting a sample procedure,

Characteristics of Good sampling Procedure, Types of Sample Design, Selecting
Random Samples, Complex random sampling Design.
Measurement and Scaling Techniques: Measurement in Research, Measurement Scales,

Sources of Errors in measurement, Tests of Second measurement, Technique of
developing Measurement Tools, Meaning of Scaling, Scale Classification Bases,
Important Scaling Techniques, Scale Construction Techniques.
Methods of Data Collection: Collection of Primary Data, Observation Method, Interview

method, Collection of Data through questionnaire and Schedules, Other methods.
Collection of Secondary Data, Selection of appropriate method for data collection,
Case Study Method, Guidelines for developing questionnaire, successful
interviewing. Survey v/s Experiment.
Processing and Analysis of Data : Processing Operations (Meaning, Problems), Data

Analysis (Elements), Statistics in Research, Measures of Central Tendency,
Dispersion, Asymmetry, Relationship. Regression Analysis, Multiple correlation and
Regression, Partial Correlation, Association in case of Attributes.
Sampling Fundamentals: Definition, Need, Important sampling Distribution, Central
limit theorem Sampling Theory, Sandler‟s A-test, Concept of Standard Error,
Estimation, Estimating population mean, proportion. Sample size and its

determination, Determination of sample size.
Analysis of Variance and Covariance: Basic Principles, techniques, applications,

Assumptions, limitations.
Analysis of Non-parametric or distribution-free Tests : Sign Test, Fisher-Irwin Test,

McNemer Test, Wilcoxon Matched pair Test (Signed Rank Test).
Sum Tests : a) Wilcoxon-Mann-Whitney Test b)Kruskal-Wallis Test, One sample

Runs Test, Multivariate Analysis Techniques: Characteristics, Application,
Classification, Variables, Techniques, Factor Analysis (Methods, Rotation),
Path Analysis.
4. Research Publication & Presentation: 08 Hours
Thesis, Research paper, Organization of thesis and reports, formatting issues,

citation methods, references, effective oral presentation of research, Documentation
of ongoing research.
5. Research Ethics and Morals: 05 Hours
Issues related to plagiarism and ethics. Intellectual Property Rights: Copy rights,
Patents, Industrial Designs, Trademarks.
6. Quality indices of research publication: 04 Hours
Impact factor, Immediacy factor.

 At the starting of the course, delivery pattern, prerequisite of the subject will be discussed.
 Lectures will be conducted with the aid of Multi-Media projector, Black Board, OHP etc.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures.
 Internal exams/Unit tests/Surprise tests/Quizzes/Seminar/Assignments etc. will be
conducted as a part of continuous internal theory evaluation.
 Tutorials related to course content will be given to students.
 In the lectures discipline and behaviour will be observed strictly.
 Industrial visits will be organized for students to explore industrial facilities. Students are
required to prepare a report on industrial visit and submit as a part of the assignment.

 Research Methodology as a subject should help researchers to prepare the literature in
chronological pattern and should logically analyse the concerns.
 This subject should help in framing the research problems to enhance the scale of
understanding.
 In this world of global village, research papers are available in abundance; one thesis
submitted by a scholar, in no way should be a repetition of a work already done.
 This subject should help researchers to use tools, techniques, concepts and world‟s best
practices to present a unique research.

 Text Books:
1. Research Methodology, Methods & Techniques, C.R. Kothari, Viswa Prakashan,
2nd Edition, 2009.
2. Research Methods- A Process of Inquiry, Graziano, A.M., Raulin, M.L, Pearson
Publications, 7th Edition, 2009.
3. How to Write a Thesis:, Murray, R. Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2010.
4. Writing For Academic Journals, Murray, R., McGraw Hill International, 2009.
5. Writing for Publication, Henson, K.T., Allyn &Bacon, 2005.
1. What is this thing called Science, Chalmers, A.F., Queensland University Press, 1999.
2. Methods &Techniques of Social Research, Bhandarkar & Wilkinson, Himalaya
publications, 2009.
3. Doing your Research project, Bell J., Open University Press, Berkshire, 4thEdition,
2005
4. A Handbook of Academic Writing, Murray, R. and Moore, S., Tata McGraw Hill
International, 2006.

CA730: INTERNET AND WEB DESIGNING
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

 The objective of the course is to provide basic understanding of designing professional
web page templates with Markup language. This syllabus also provides the knowledge
about publishing website.
Methodology & Pedagogy: During the sessions, topics related to web designing technologies
will be covered with suitable examples and students will be required to design and develop
entire web sites using several web designing technologies and editors.
Learning Outcome: Upon successful completion of the course, students will understand basic
concepts of internet and web page architecture and will be able to develop and host web site by
using markup languages and advanced technologies, including HTML and CSS. On completion,
student will be able to design and create an advanced website and will be equipped to undertake
complex internet projects.

Sr. No. Content
1. Overview of Internet and WWW, Basic elements of the Internet, Internet services,
Internet Browsers and Servers, Hardware and Software requirements to connect to the
internet, Internet Service Provider (ISP), Introduction to Internet Protocols
2. Introduction to Web Page, Web Site, Web Browser, Overview of HTML, Structure of
HTML Documents
3. HTML Basics Tags and HTML elements
4. List, Marquee & Hyperlink in HTML
5. Images and Tables in HTML
6. Forms in HTML

7. Media Element in HTML5
8. Introduction to Cascading Style Sheet (CSS), Ways to embed CSS in HTML
9. CSS selectors & Layout
10. CSS Properties
11. Creation of Menu with CSS
12. Introduction to Web Publishing or Hosting : Domain Name, Web Server, Website
Parking, Publishing Website through FTP
E. Total Hours (Theory): 30

 Text Books:
1. Harley Hahn: The Internet Complete Reference, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-HILL Edition.
2. Matthew MacDonald: HTML5: The Missing Manual, O'Reilly Media, August 2011.
3. Peter Gasston: The Book of CSS3: A Developer's Guide to the Future of Web Design, No
Starch Press, April 2011.
4. Richard York: Beginning CSS: Cascading Style sheets for Web Design, Wrox Press (Wiley
Publishing), 2005.
1. Ivan Bayross: Web Enabled Commercial Application Development using HTML, JavaScript,
DHTML and PHP, 4th revised edition, BPB Publication.
2. Adrian Farrel: The Internet and its Protocol – A comparative approach, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers.
3. David Mc Farland: CSS: The Missing Manual, O‟Reilly, 2006.
 Reference Links:
1. http://www.w3schools.com [ lecture notes ]
2. http://www.whatwg.org/specs/web-apps/current-work/multipage/#auto-toc-4
[HTML Materials]
3. http://people.cs.pitt.edu/~mehmud/cs134-2084/lectures.html [CSS notes ]

PT795: HEALTH & PHYSICAL ACTIVITY
redits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objectives of the course:
This course will make the student to understand health and physical activity and the impact
inactivity have on his/her health. Health and physical activity constitute major components of a
healthy lifestyle and general health promotion and protection. The knowledge and experience
gained from health and physical activity course will enable students to make informed decisions
about their health as it relates to quality of life and longevity.
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
1. Understand the health-related benefits of physical activity and risks associated with physical
inactivity
2. Comprehend the principles specific to attaining and maintaining good health and fitness
throughout the lifespan
3. Realize the areas of nutrition, cardiovascular health, diseases related to physical activity,
stress management, substance use and abuse, and sexually transmitted diseases.
S. No. Title of the unit Minimum number

of hours
1. Introduction to health 10
2. Physical Activity 10
3. Introduction to Yoga 10

1 Introduction to Health 10 hours
1.1 What is health?
1.2 Healthcare delivery system: Developing Countries, Developed Countries
1.3 Human anatomy, physiology & physical fitness
1.4 Basics of Nutrition
1.5 Life style disorders – obesity & diabetes
2 Physical Activity 10 hours
2.1 What is Physical activity, exercise, physical fitness, epidemiology?
2.2 Measurement of Physical Activity in individuals
2.3 Physical Activity – Theoretical Perspective: Self-determination, trans theoretical
2.4 Physical Activity and mental health – Body image, depression, problem with exercise
2.5 Barriers & Facilitators of Physical Activity
3 Introduction to Yoga 10 hours
3.1 What is yoga?
3.2 Types of yoga
3.3 Benefits of yoga to various body systems
3.4 Asanas, Pranayam
3.5 Yoga therapy for various back pain, asthma, stress, hypertension, diabetes

 Interactive classroom sessions using black-board and audio-visual aids.
 Using the available technology and resources for e-learning.
 Students will be encouraged towards self-learning and under direct interaction with course faculty.
 Students will be enabled for continuous evaluation.
 Case study, didactic mode of group discussions
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:

 Appraise the importance of exercise in maintenance of health and fitness.

 Objectively define health and physical activity in realistic environment.
 Textbooks:
1. ACSM”s “Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual Lippincott Williams and
Walkins USA, 2005.
2. Nilima Patel (2008) Yoga and Rehabilitation, Jaypee Publication, India
 Reference books:
1. Biddle, S. J. H., & Mutrie, N. (2008). Psychology of physical activity. London: Routledge
2. B.C. Rai. Health Education and Hygiene Published by Prakashan Kendra
3. Puri. K. Chandra. S.S. (2005). Health and Physical Education. New Delhi: Surjeet
Publications

NR751: WOMEN’S HEALTH
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Course Objectives:
Upon completing the course, students will be able to
 Understand and describe the sociocultural, behavioral, and policy issues that contribute
to and affect women‟s health at National and International Level.
 Describe the seven domains of health and their impact on women.
 Understand the value and limitations of various tools that are used to measure and
monitor women‟s health.
 Identify major demographic, behavioral and environmental factors that are associated
with women‟s health and how such factors may be incorporated into public health
interventions, programs, and policies.
 Identify trends in major health conditions that affect women.
 Identify the interplay between health services delivery and policy issues as they impact
and are impacted by health issues.
Unit Title of Unit Prescribed

No. Hours
I. Overview of Women Health in India: 3
 Women‟s health nationally and locally.

 Women‟s health and the seven domains of health.
 Policy initiatives related to women‟s health issues, as related to
cost, monitoring, measures of success and impact on other policy
initiatives.
II. Female Anatomy & Physiology: 5
 Female anatomy and physiology from the perspective of their

effects on women‟s health, including differences from men‟s
health
 Menstrual and menopause

III. Women and relationships: Family, social networks and exposure to 5
intrapersonal violence:
 Social meaning for women‟s lives

 Social policies relating to women in the INDIA
 Health policies relating to women
 violence that affect women‟s lives & medical issues
IV. Non Communicable Diseases : 10
 Introduction of Non Communicable diseases in relation to

women health
 Cardiovascular Diseases:
 Women‟s risk factors for cardiovascular disease
 Gender differences in prognosis for and treatment of
cardiovascular disease in women.
 Interactions between knowledge, risk, and outcomes of
cardiovascular disease in women
 Cancer:
 Most common cancers in women (excluding minor skin
cancers) in terms of diagnoses as well as deaths.
 Levels of cancer prevention.
 Public health approach to screening for cancer
V. Mental Health/ Substance use 2
VI. Act & Laws : 5
Indian legislations and law regarding Women protection (Human

Rights)
Total 30 Hours
C. Instruction Method and Pedagogy

The course is based on practical learning. Teaching will be facilitated by reading
material, discussion, microteaching, task-based learning, assignments and various
interpersonal activities like case studies, critical reading, group work, independent and
collaborative research, presentations etc.
D. Evaluation: The students will be evaluated continuously in the form of internal as well as
external examinations. The evaluation (Theory) is schemed as 25 marks for internal
evaluation and 75 marks for external evaluation in the form of University examination.

Internal Evaluation
The students‟ performance in the course will be evaluated on a continuous basis through the
following components:
Marks
Sl. No. Component Number per Total Marks
incidence
1 Assignments 1 8 8
2 Internal Test/ Model Exam 1 12 12
Attendance and Class Minimum 80%

3 10
Participation attendance
Total 30
External Evaluation
The University Theory examination will be of 75 marks and will test the logic and critical
thinking skills of the students by asking them theoretical as well as application based questions.
The examination will avoid, as far as possible, grammatical errors and will focus on applications.
Marks per
Sl. No. Component Number Total Marks
incidence
1 Theory Paper 01 70 70
Total 70
E. Learning Outcomes: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
 Understand the sociocultural, behavioral, and policy issues that contribute to and affect
women‟s health at National and International Level.
 Understand the seven domains of health and their impact on women.
 Understand the value and limitations of various tools that are used to measure and
monitor women‟s health.
 Understand trends in major health conditions that affect women.
 Understand the health services delivery and policy issues which impact on women‟s
health.

RD701: INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the course.

 The objective of the course is to introduce students to different types of experimental
techniques available.
 This course will expose student to state of art equipments and their utility.
 The emphasis is given more on analyzing of the data and operating skills.
 To explore the basics of Chromatography
B. Outline of the Course

Sr. Title of Unit No. of hrs.
No.
1. HPLC 08
2. TGA-DSC 09
3. DLS 05
4. PCR 08
C. Syllabus Topics:
Sr. No. Title of Unit Topics
1. High Introduction to HPLC, Basic Principle of HPLC, Instrumentation

Performance for HPLC, Types of Detector used in HPLC, Column efficiency in
Liquid liquid chromatography
Chromatography
(HPLC)

2. TGA-DSC General Discussion, Thermogravemetry Analysis, Instruments
available for Thermogravimetric analysis, Detailed Discussion,
Principle and Applications in various fields of Science and
Engineering. Data Analysis
3. DLS Concept of Dynamic light scattering and basics of Particle size

analyzer, Data Analysis and applications of DLS
4. PCR Introduction and principle of Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR),

Principle of PCR, Primer designing, Detailed methodology of PCR,
Modifications of PCR, Applications of PCR
D. Instructional Methods and Pedagogy:
The topics will be discussed in interactive class room sessions using classical black-board
teaching to power-point presentations. Unit tests will be conducted regularly as a part of
continuous evaluation and suggestions will be given to student in order to improve their
performance.
E. Student Learning Outcomes / objectives:
 The Programme aims at providing students with the methodological concepts and tools
needed to acquire top-level skills in the field of some selected instrumentation
 At the end students would gain experience in using these tools and analyzing the data.
 Text books/Reference books

1. Instrumental methods of analysis by Williard Merritt Dean Settle, 7th Ed. CBS
publishers and distributors Pvt. Ltd.,
2. Instrumental methods of analysis by Williard Merritt Dean Settle, 7 th Ed. CBS
publishers and distributors Pvt. Ltd.,
3. Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics by Sandy B. Primrose, Richard Twyman
7 th Ed. Wiley-Blackwell
4. Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual by Joseph Sambrook, David William Russell 3
rd Ed.CSHL Press
5. Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology by Wilson and
Walker 7 th Ed. Cambridge University Press
6. Principles of Instrumental Analysis by Douglas A. Skoog, F.James Holler and Timothy
A.Nieman. Publisher: Saunders College Publishing.

RD702: INTRODUCTION TO NANOSCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the course:

The objective of the course is to introduce the students:
 To provide a general and broad introduction to the multi-disciplinary field of
nanoscience and nanotechnology
 During the course the students will acquire the basic knowledge of why and how the
physicochemical properties change at the nanoscale.
 The students will become familiar with the typical techniques that allow the
observation, characterization and manipulation of matter at the atomic, molecular
and supramolecular level.
 The recent scientific and technology work in the nano world will be presented to
demonstrate the potential of nanoscience and nanotechnology in diverse areas such as
medicine, biotechnology, chemical industry, information and communication technology,
production and storage of energy, synthesis and manufacture of new materials, etc.
 It is also attempted that the student becomes aware of the ethical, social and economic
implications that can lead this new discipline.
 To cultivate interest in the research and development of nanotechnology for future
advancement of the career.
Sr Title of Unit Minimum No. of Hrs

No.
1. Nanotechnology – development history & Implications of 6

nanotechnology
2. Overview on characterization and synthesis of nanostructure 10
materials
3. Overview of nanostructures & Nano devices 10
4. New fields of nanotechnology 4

C. Syllabus Topics:
1. Nanotechnology – development history & Implications of nanotechnology
Concept of nanoscience and nanotechnology, Nanotechnology in the history and in

nature. Impact of the nanotechnology in the society: Ethical, social, economic and
environmental implications. the nanoscale. Size dependent physical and chemical
properties. Surface effects. Importance of the surface at nanoscale. The surface/volume
ratio. Size dependent properties
2. Overview on synthesis and characterization of nanostructure materials.
Physical, chemical and biological methods of synthesis of nanostructures, Electron

microscopy, scanning probe microscopy, non-imaging techniques
3. Overview of nanostructures & Nano devices
Zero dimensional, one dimensional and two dimensional nanostructures , Electronic

devices, magnetic devices, photonic devices, mechanical devices, fluidics devices and
biomedical devices
4. New fields of nanotechnology
quantum computing, spintronics, nanomedicines, energy, etc.

The topics will be discussed in interactive class room sessions using classical black-board
teaching to power-point presentations. Students will be exposed to practical operations, and lab
visit and experimental demonstrations of some of the equipment facilities for Nano fabrication &
characterization available in UNI. Students will produce a technical report on the experiences.
E. Student Learning Outcomes / objectives:

Nanotechnology promises to be the technology of the future benefitting the humanity in a
number of ways. This course is aimed at preparing students for further industrial or academic
work in the field of nano-characterization techniques.
 Text Books / Reference Books:

1. Essentials of nanotechnology by Jeremy Ramsden [JR], 2009, Jeremy Ramsden & Ventus
Publishing ApS,
2. Introduction to Nanoscience, S.M.Lindsay, Oxford ISBN 978-019-954421-9 (2010).
3. Guozhong Cao (2004). Nanostructures and Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties & Applications,
448 pages, Imperial College Press, ISBN-10: 1860944159.
4. NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, T. Pradeep,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., 2007.
5. Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, B K Parthsarathy, ISHA Books, New Delhi, 2007.
6. Nanotechnology: Principles and practices, Sulabha K Kulkarni, Capital publishing
company, 2007.

MB650: CREATIVE LEADERSHIP
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Course Objectives
The objectives of this course are:
 To create awareness about traits, types, approaches /theories and contemporary issues of
leadership.
 To nurture qualities of creative leadership to meet the 21st century challenges in students.

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Leadership
 What are Leadership Skills?

 Ways of Conceptualizing Leadership
 Definition and Components
 A Born Leader
 Traits of Successful Leader
 Why Leadership?
1 05
o Managerial Roles
 Importance of Leadership
Leading Vs Managing
 Roles and Relationships

 Developing Personality for Effective Leading Roles
 Authority Vs. Responsibility
 Leading the Team
 Leadership–Styles, Models and Philosophy
2 Leadership Approach 05
 Trait Approach

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Skills Approach
 Style Approach
 Situational Approach
 Psychodynamic Approach
Leadership Theories
 Contingency Theory
 Path-Goal Theory
 Leader-Member Exchange Theory
Leadership Processes
 Transactional Leadership
3  Transformational Leadership 05
 Authentic Leadership
 Team Leadership
 Integrative Leadership
 Liquid Leadership
Women and Leadership
 Gender and Leadership Styles

4  Gender and Leadership Effectiveness 05
 Glass Ceiling Turned Labyrinth
 Strengths of Women Leadership
 Criticism and Application
Culture and Leadership
 Dimensions of Culture
 Clusters of World Cultures
 Leadership Behavior and Culture Clusters
5 05
 Universally Desirable and Undesirable Leadership
Attributes
 Criticism and Application
 Leadership for High Performing Organisations
 General Principles for Creative Culture
 Nurturing Personal Creativity
Contemporary Issues in Leadership
6  Power and Politics in Leadership 05
 Ethics in Leadership
 Cases in Leadership
Total 30

C. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise self-learning and active classroom interaction based on students‟
prior preparation. The course instructor is expected to prepare a detailed session-wise
schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the reading material and case material for every
session. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources beyond the prescribed
text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the library, or from websites and other
resources not accessible to the students, the course instructor should make the material
available to the students well in advance, so that the students can come prepared for the
classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
 Classroom Contact Sessions … About 20 Sessions

 Case Discussions … About 03 Sessions
 Presentation … About 03 Sessions
 Management Exercise/ Stimulations/Game … About 02 Sessions
 Feedback … About 02 Sessions
D. Internal Evaluation
Percentage
Sl. Marks per Total of total
Component Number
No. incidence Marks internal
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
2 Case Analysis and Presentation 2 45 90 30
3 Assignment / Project work 1 60 60 20
5 Attendance and Class 30 10

Participation
Total 300 100


E. External Evaluation
The University examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students‟ reports
and a viva-voce and will carry 70% marks for the course evaluation.
F. Learning Outcomes
 Appreciation for types, traits, approaches and leadership models/theories.

 Motivation for leadership roles and responsibilities.
 Qualities of creative leadership skills.
G. Reference Material
 Text-book:
1. Leadership – Theory and Practices , Peter G. Northouse, Sage Publications India Pvt.
Ltd., Latest Edition
1. Liquid Leadership by Brad Szollose, Prolibris Publishing Media, Latest Edition
2. Effective Leadership by Lussier/ Achua , Cengage Learning Publications, Latest
Edition
3. Integrative Leadership by Hatala & Hatala, Pearson Power Publication, Latest
Edition
4. Cases in Leadership by Rowe and Guerrero, Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd., Latest
Edition
 Journals / Magazines / Newspapers:

1. HBR Issues on Building Leadership Skills
2. International Journal of Innovation, Creativity and Change
3. Economic Times

PH825: COMMUNITY PHARMACY OWNERSHIP
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the Course

Community pharmacy is concerned with promoting the safe and appropriate use of drugs
and common medical devices.
Ownership concept in Community Pharmacy is required to create for the effective delivery of
pharmacy services in an regulated environment in which the nature of pharmacy is clearly
evolving from the supply of goods (pharmaceuticals under prescription, pharmacist and
pharmacy only medicines, and other goods) to the supply of services designed to support the
optimal use of medication as part of a wider health care strategy.
B. Outline of course:
Sr. No. Title of Unit No. of Contact Hours
1 Introduction to Community pharmacy 10
2 Community Pharmacy Management 10
3 Pharmacy Business Plan 10
Total 30

Sr no Title of Unit Topics
Roles & Responsibility, relationship with other

Introduction to Community health care providers, Prescribed medication order
1
pharmacy interpretation including OTC medicines, Safe use of
medical devices.
Role, process and scope of Community Pharmacy

Community Pharmacy Management, modern technologies, financial,
2
Management material, staff management and Drug store
management, Code of ethics for Pharmacy.
Creating a Successful Pharmacy Business Plan,

Business Owner Roles, Responsibilities, and
3 Pharmacy Business Plan Management Styles, Legal, Financial and Accounting
Advice for the Beginning Owner, Marketing of
Pharmacy Practice.

The content of the syllabus would be transmitted through different pedagogy tools like
interactive class room sessions using classical chalk - board teaching to Power point
presentations. Class room teaching would also be supplemented with group discussions,
seminars, assignments and case studies.
E. Student Learning Outcomes / Objectives

At the end of the course, the student will be able to understand
 The concept of Community Pharmacy Ownership and its scope

 Students understand the role of the pharmacist in community and development
 Able to learn skill require to set Pharmacy store & its management
F. Recommended Study Material

 Text / Reference Books:
1. Mohd. Aquil, Practice of Hospital, clinical & Community Pharmacy Elsevier
2. Paul Rutter, Community Pharmacy E-Book, Symptoms, Diagnosis and Treatment, 3rd
Edition
3. A Textbook of Clinical Pharmacy Practice: G. Parthasarathi, Karin Nyfort-Hansen and

Milap Nahata, Universities Press.
4. Research articles as per the assignment

MB780.3: COMMUNICATION SKILLS-1 (CS) (NCC)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
I. Number of Credits : Non Credit Course

 To train the students to become active listeners in every situation in life, and more
so, in their work situations;
 To develop the students‟ confidence to express their ideas comfortably at both inter-
personal and group levels;
 To train them to think in groups of words appropriate to situations and express their
thoughts spontaneously and comfortably in the English language.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Oral Communication Skills
1  Listening Skills 01
 Speaking Skills
Listening Skills
 Basics of Listening
 Giving and Getting Feedback
 Understanding Natural Speech
 Strategies of Effective Listening
2  Listening Exercises 10
 Comprehend Main Ideas and Details
 Take Notes: Outline Main Ideas and Supporting Details
 Distinguish between Facts, Opinion and Inferences
 Evaluate What You Hear
 Follow Oral Directions
Speaking Skills
 Developing Self Confidence
 Delivering Your Message
 Preparing Your Speech
3  Speaking to Inform, Persuade and for Special Purposes 10
 Participating in Group Communication
 Preparing Impromptu Speech
 Using Idioms and Proverbs
 Pronunciation
Business Communication Aids
 Elements of Effective English
4  Grammar and Syntax 09
 Effective Paragraph
 Word Usage
Total 30

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

V. Evaluation
At the end of the course the students will have to give a seminar. Certificate will be
awarded to the students who have successfully completed the course.
 The ability to listen patiently and actively to the spoken word and interpret the non-
verbal message from the body language, facial expression and gesture of the speaker.
 Self-confidence and capacity to express spontaneously in the English language.
Text-Books
1. Sweeney Simon, (Latest Edition), English for Business Communication, Cambridge

Publication
2. Jones Leo, Alexan Richard (Latest Edition), New International Business English,
Cambridge.
Reference-Book
1. Hornby A. S., (Latest Edition), Guide to Patterns and Usage in English, Oxford University
Press.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester – 2)

MB740.3: MACRO-ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
(MEBE)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
 To enable the students to gain and make them understand the measurement,
fluctuation / stability and growth of national economic aggregates like national
income, employment / unemployment and price level;
 To help them to relate the changes in the aggregates to national economic policies
and their effect on different types of organised activities;
 To develop a broad understanding about the environment in which the business
operates;
 To make them feel comfortable reading and understanding daily economic and
financial news on India and other countries, and engaging in critical discussion on
economic issues affecting firms.
III. Course Outline

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
The Scope of Macroeconomics
 Introduction to Macroeconomics
 Economic Environment
1  Economic System – Lassiez Fair, Capitalism, Socialism and 05
Mixed Economy
 National Income
 Macroeconomic Indicators
Behavioural and Technology Function
 Consumption Function
 Investment Function
2  Government, Foreign Trade and Foreign Exchange Function 10
 Money Demand and Supply
 Production Function, Factor Market and Aggregate Supply
Function
Economic Models
 Classical and Keynesian Views of Macroeconomics
3  IS – LM Model 06
 Open Economy Macroeconomics
 Unemployment and Inflation

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
Government and Economic Policies
 Business Cycle and Fluctuations
 Role of Government in Economic Environment
 Fiscal Policy
4  Monetary Policy 12
 Industrial Policy
 EXIM Policy
 Five Year Planning
 Public Finance
Business Environment
 Social and Political Environment
5  Technological Environment 07
 International Business Environment
 Natural and Ecological Environment
 Legal and Labour Market Environment
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the principles of macro-economics and the effect of changes in

macro-economic environment for firm level decision-making; and
 A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on
a regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
Text-Books
1. Goodwin, Nelson and Harris, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Rangarajan and Dholakia, (Latest Edition), Principles of Macroeconomics, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub.
3. Olivier Blanchard, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, Pearson Education.

Reference-Books
1. George Mankiw, (Latest Edition), Principles of Economics, Thomson Publication.

2. G. S. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, Tata McGraw Hill Pub.
3. K. K. Dewett, (Latest Edition), Modern Economic Theory, S. Chand and Co.
4. H. L. Ahuja, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, S. Chand and Co.
5. Mishra and Puri, (Latest Edition), Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House.
6. A. N. Agrawal, (Latest Edition), Indian Economy, New Age International.
7. Vivek Mittal, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Excel Books.
8. Francis Cherunilam, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Himalaya Publishing
House.
9. Raj Agrawal and Parag Diwan, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Excel Books.
10. Justin Paul, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Tata McGraw Hill Publisher.
11. V K Pailwar, (Latest Edition), Economic Environment of Business, PHI Learning.
1. Business Dailies
2. Business and Economic Journal
3. Business and Economics and Magazines

MB741.3: RESEARCH METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT (RMM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
 To provide the techniques and skills needed to conduct business research and the
required knowledge and understanding so that students can critically evaluate the
quality of research.
 To provide skills for identification, definition of research problems / hypotheses,
based on literature survey, secondary data and observations.
 To help students in preparation of a management research proposal, designing the
research instruments and collection, coding and tabulating of data for analysis.
 To enable the students to understand the common statistical procedures used to
analyse data from survey and experimental studies, and to use the statistical
software packages like SPSS, SYSTAT, to carry out these procedures and report the
results of such statistical analyses in a manner appropriate for managerial decision-
making.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Planning the Research Project
 Business Research Strategies
 Research Designs
1 06
 Planning a Research Project and Formulating Research Questions
 Literature Review
 Ethics in Business Research
Types of Research and Methods for Collecting Data
 Quantitative Research
o Nature of Quantitative Research
o Sampling
o Structured Interviewing
o Self-completion Questionnaires / Questionnaire Design,
Asking Questions
2 o Structured Observation 12
o Content Analysis
o Secondary Analysis and Official Data
 Qualitative Research
o Nature of Qualitative Research
o Organisational Ethnography and Participant Observation
o Interviewing
o Focus Group Discussion
Research Proposal and Field Wok
3 03
 Writing up a Research Proposal

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Undertaking the Field Work
o Actual Collection of Data
Data Analysis and Presentations
 Univariate and Bivariate Analysis
 Multiple Linear Regression Model
o Standard Multiple Regression Models with Emphasis on
Detection of Collinearity
o Outliers
o Non-Normality and Autocorrelation
4 06
o Validation of Model Assumptions
 Discriminant Analysis
o Statistical Background
o Linear Discriminant Function Analysis
o Estimating Linear Discriminant Functions and their
Properties
o Enterprise Information Portal
Factor Analysis
 Principal Components
 Algorithm for Conducting Principal Component Analysis
 Deciding on How Many Principal Components to Retain
 H-Plot
 Factor Analysis Model
 Extracting Common Factors
 Determining Number of Factors
5  Transformation of Factor Analysis Solutions 09
 Factor Scores
Cluster Analysis
 Introduction
 Types of Clustering
 Correlations and Distances
 Clustering by Partitioning Methods
 Hierarchical Clustering
 Overlapping Clustering
Communicating Research Results
6  Report Preparation 06
 Oral Presentation and Viva-Voce
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

 Students‟ Research Proposal / Report Presentations … About 09 Sessions
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of the process of reviewing literature, preparing a sound

research proposal and conducting a business research.
 An understanding of the principles and techniques of multivariate data analysis and
their application; and have hands- on experience on SPSS, SYSTAT.

Text-Books
1. Bryman Alan, Bell Emma, (Latest Edition), Business Research Methods, Oxford
University Press.
2. Hair, Joseph, et. al., (Latest Edition), Multivariate Data Analysis, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Kothari, (Latest Edition), Research Methodology, Methods and Techniques, New Age
International Publishers.
2. Zikmund, Babin, Carr, Adhikari , Griffin, (Latest Edition), Business Research Methods, A
South Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning
3. T.W. Anderson, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Multivariate Statistical Analysis, John
Wiley.
4. J.D. Jobson, (Latest Edition), Applied Multivariate Data Analysis, Vol. I and II, Springer-
Verlag, N.Y.
5. H. Kris, (Latest Edition), Statistical Tests for Multivariate Analysis, Springer-Verlag,
Heidelberg.
6. A.S. Mulaik, (Latest Edition), The Foundations of Factor Analysis, McGraw Hill, N.Y.
7. D.C. Montgomery and E.A. Peck, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Linear Regression
Analysis, John Wiley, N.Y.
8. M.R. Anderberg, (Latest Edition), Cluster analysis for Applications, Academic Press, N.Y.
9. B. Everitt, Halsted, (Latest Edition), Cluster Analysis, N.Y.
10. D.F. Morrison, (Latest Edition), Multivariate Statistical Analysis, McGraw Hill, N.Y.
11. G.H. Dunteman, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Multivariate Analysis, Sage, London.

MB742.3: QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR MANAGEMENT - 2
(QAM-2)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2

 To expose the students to basic concepts of optimisation and OR tools and
techniques relevant to managerial decision-making through examples and cases
drawn from different functional areas;
 To help the students develop proficiency in the use of MS-Excel for optimisation
problems and interpretation of outputs for managerial decision-making; and
 To provide the necessary foundation for data collection, analysis, interpretation and
presentation in other courses.
The course will focus more on the applications and use of software and interpretation of
computer outputs for decision-making, and not on solution procedures (like simplex
method).
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
An Introduction to Linear Programming
 A Simple Maximization and Minimization Problem
1  Problem Formulation 08
 Optimal Solution by use of Software (MS-Excel solver )
 Duality and Sensitivity Analysis
Linear Programming Problems variants
 Transportation Problem
2 06
 Assignment Problem
 Transhipment Problem
Network Models and Project Scheduling
 Shortest Route Problems
 Minimal Spanning Tree Problems
3 08
 Maximum Flow Problems
 Project Scheduling with Known Activity Times
 Time-Cost Trade Offs
Waiting Line Models
 Structure of Waiting Line Systems
 Single Channel Waiting Line Model with Poisson Arrivals and
4 Exponential Service times 06
 Multiple Channel Waiting Line Model with Poisson Arrivals and
Exponential Service times
 Economic Analysis of Waiting Lines
Decision Analysis
5 08
 Problem Formulation – Pay off Tables, Decision Trees

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Decision Making without Probabilities – Optimistic Approach,
Conservative Approach, Minimax Regret approach
 Decision Making with Probabilities – Expected Value of Perfect
Information
 Utility and Decision Making
Simulation for Management Applications
 Risk Analysis
6  Inventory Simulations 06
 Waiting Line Simulations
 Use of MS-Excel for Simulation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Classroom Discussion of Concepts and Applications … About 30 Sessions

Case Discussions … About 06 Sessions

Management Exercise / Stimulations /Games … About 03 Sessions

Student‟s Presentations … About 04 Sessions

Feedback … About 02 Sessions
Internal Evaluation
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 With the potential of or tools and software packages for managerial decision-
making.
Text-Book
1. Anderson, Sweeney, Williams, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Management Science:

Quantitative Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Hillier Frederick, Liberman, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Operations Research, Tata

McGraw-Hill.
2. M.V. Durga Prasad, (Latest Edition), Operations Research, Cengage Learning.
3. Hillier, Hillier, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Management Science, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. G. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Operations Research - Principles and Applications, PHI.
5. A. M. Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A. Tamilarasi, (Latest Edition), Operations Research,
Pearson.
1. OPSEARCH
2. Journal of Operational Research Society

MB743.3: HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (HRM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
 To acquaint students with the various practices and policies of Human Resources
Management in respect of acquisition, reward and development of HR;
 To impart basic knowledge of the Indian Industrial Relation Systems;
 To build awareness of certain important and critical issues in the Indian Industrial
Relation Systems; and
 To provide an exposure to the skills required for managing Industrial Relations.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to HRM and the Environment
 HRM – History, Strategic Importance, Objectives
1  Strategic Management Approach to HRM 06
 Human Resource Policies
 Global HRM
Acquiring Human Resources
 HR Planning and Alignment
2  Job Analysis and Design 08
 Recruitment
 Selection and Induction
Developing Human Resources
 Training and Development
o Need for Training and Development
o Individual vs. Organizational Needs
o Training Objectives and Strategies
3 08
o Training Methods and Techniques
o Design and Organization of Training
 Career Planning and Development
 Talent Management
 Succession Planning
Rewarding and Separating Human Resources
 Performance Evaluation and Management
 Wage and Salary Administration
4 10
 Fringe Benefits
 Other Forms of Rewarding (Bonus, Incentives etc.)
 Dismissal, Retrenchment, Removal, Suspension, Layoff etc.
5 Legal Aspects in HRM 07

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 Dispute Settlement Methods
 Minimum Wages Act
 Bonus Act
 Shops and Establishment Act
 Collective Bargaining
 Workmen‟s Compensation Act
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to apply the concepts of HR in organisations.

 Make decisions with respect to the various HR processes and procedures.
Text-Books
1. Ivancevich John, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.

2. K. Ashwathappa, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Dessler Gary, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, PHI.

2. C B Gupta, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons.
3. Muller Camen Croucher Leigh, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management – A Case
Study Approach, Jaico Publishing House.
4. Ajay Garg, (Latest Edition), Labour Laws – One Should Know, A Nabhi Publication.
1. Journals and magazines in HRM like Human Capital, HRM Review etc.
2. Management Review – IIM Bangalore
3. Vikalp – IIM Ahmedabad

MB744.3: COSTING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (CCS)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
III. Course Objectives

 To familiarize students with the basic concepts of management accounting system,
and how the information generated by such a system can be useful for decision
making and performance evaluation.
 To introduce the basic concepts; which form the discipline of costing and control
system.
 To provide the skills necessary to use management accounting information to make
business decisions.
 To illustrate how management accounting information can be used to formulate and
implement strategy in a variety of situation.
IV. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Changing Role of Management Accounting and Basic
Cost Terms and Concepts
 The Role of Managerial Accounting and Management Functions
1 06
 Comparing Managerial Accounting and Financial Accounting
 Introduction to Cost Terms, Cost Classification, and Integration
of Costs into Statements (Cost Sheet)
Product Costing
 Production Process
 Lean Production and Manufacturing in a JIT Environment
2 06
 Job Costing
 Process Costing
 Operations Cost
Cost Behavior, Cost Estimation and Techniques of Costing
 Fixed and Variable Costs
 Absorption Costing
3  Variable Costing 09
 Unit, Batch, Product and Facility –Level Costs
 Activity Based Costing
 Cost- Volume- Profit Analysis
Planning and Decision Making
 Budget Development Process
 Master Budget
4 09
 Sales Budget
 Production Budget
 Flexible Budget

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Cash Budget
Variance Analysis
 Standard Costing
 Material Variance
5 06
 Labor Variance
 Overhead Variance
 Interpreting and Using Variance Analysis
Management Control
 Decentralization
6 06
 Performance Evaluation
 Balanced Scorecard
Total 45
V. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

VI. Internal Evaluation
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

VII. External Evaluation

VIII. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course,
 The students should learn fundamentals and tools of management accounting,
including technical aspects of cost accounting
 The students should develop an understand the relationship between management
accounting and performance management; consider the relationship between
management accounting and strategy;
 Learn management accounting knowledge and techniques and how to assess these
through cost-benefit analysis.
IX. Reference Material

Text-Books
1. Sawyers, Jackson, Jenkins, Arora, (Latest Edition), Managerial ACCT, Cengage
Learning India Pvt. Ltd.
2. P. C., (Latest Edition), Tulsian, Tulsian‟s Practical Costing, S. Chand.
3. Dr. R.P. Rustagi, (Latest Edition), Taxmann‟s Management Accounting, Taxmann.
Reference-Books
1. Ronald W. Hilton, G Ramesh, and M Jayadev, (Latest Edition), Management

Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publication
2. Hilton, Maher, (Latest Edition), Management: Strategies for Business Decisions, TMH.
3. Hongren, Sundem, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Management Accounting, THM.
4. Paresh Shah, (Latest Edition), Management Accounting, Oxford University Press.
5. S. K. Bhattacharya and John Dearden, (Latest Edition), Costing for Management, Vikas.
6. Khan and Jain, Management Accounting, TMH.
7. Ravi Kishore, (Latest Edition), Cost and Management Accounting, Taxmann.
8. Hansen and M., (Latest Edition), Cost and Management Accounting and Control, Thomson.
1. The Journal of Cost Accounting and Research

2. The Journal of Accounting and Finance
3. The Journal of Management Accounting Research

MB745.3: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (FM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
 To familiarize the students with concepts and practical applications of finance. The
various financial analytical tools required for setting /running an organization like
raising funds, investments and allocation of profits, etc. considering risk and return
will be addressed
 To help students understand the financial function in totality.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Meaning, System, Mathematics and Basics of Valuation
 Introduction to Financial Management
 The Financial System
1 08
 The Time Value of money
 Valuation of Bonds and Stock
 Risk and Return
Investment Decisions
 Techniques of Capital Budgeting
2 08
 Cost of Capital
 Estimation of Project Cash Flows
Financing Decisions
 Financing and Operating Leverage
3  Capital Structure Theory and Policy 08
 Sources of Long Term Fund
 Raising Long Term Funds
Working Capital Management
 Cash Management
4  Credit Management 08
 Inventory Management
 Sources of Short Term Funds
Payout Policy
5  Dividend Policy 08
 Dividend Decision
Total 45

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

V. Internal evaluation
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

V. External evaluation

 An ability to appreciate the difference between accounting and financial functions.

 Proficiency in the theory and applications of basic financial techniques and tools, so
that they can understand and appreciate finance from long-term as well as short-
term perspective for any company/organisation.
Text-Book
1. Pandey I. M., (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Srivastava Rajiv, Misra Anil, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Oxford

University Press.
2. Van Horne, Wachowicz Jr., (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Financial Management,
Pearson Education.
3. Briham, Houston, (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson.
4. Chandra Prasanna, (Latest Edition), Financial Management –Theory and Practice, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
5. M.Y. Khan, P.K. Jain, (Latest Edition), Financial Management-Text, Problems and Cases,
McGraw Hill.
1. Finance India
2. Indian Economic Review
3. The Economist
6. Business Today
7. Economic and Political Weekly
8. The Economic Times
10. Financial Express

MB746.3: MARKETING MANAGEMENT (MM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
 To familiarize the students with marketing concepts and practices.

 To acquaint them with the challenges of marketing environment and competition;
 To expose them to the elements of marketing mix; and
 To develop their capacity to formulate appropriate marketing strategies and tactics.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding Marketing Management
 Nature and Scope of Marketing Management
o Company Orientations Toward the Market Place
o Fundamental Marketing Concepts
 Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans
1 05
o Marketing and Customer Value
o Corporate and Division Strategic Planning
o Evaluating Business Portfolios
o Growth Strategies
o Marketing Goals and Plans
Capturing Marketing Insights
 Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment
o Internal and External Sources of Information
2 o The Changing Consumption Pattern of Indian Consumers 05
 Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting Demand
o The Marketing Research System and Process
o Forecasting and Demand Measurement
Connecting with Customers
 Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction and Loyalty
o Customer Life Time Value
o Customer Databases and Databases Marketing
 Analyzing Consumer Markets
o Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour
3 o The Buying Decision Process 05
 Analyzing Business Markets
o Organisational Buying and Process
 Identifying Market Segments and Targets
o Levels of Market Segmentation
o Segmenting Consumer and Business Markets
o Market Targeting

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Building Strong Brands
 Dealing with Competition
o Identifying Competitors
o Competitive Strategies for Market Leaders and Others
 Creating Brand Equity
 Crafting Brand Positioning Strategy
o Choosing POP / POD
o Differentiation Strategies
o Product Life-Cycle and Strategies
Shaping the Market Offerings
4  Setting Product Strategy 10
o Product Characteristic and Classification
o Product and Brand Relationships
 Designing and Managing Services
o Nature of Services
o Marketing Strategies for Service Firms
o Managing Service Quality
 Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs
o Setting the Price
o Adapting the Price
o Initiating and Responding to Price Changes
Delivering and Communicating Value
 Designing and Managing Value Networks and Channels
o Channel Design and Management Decisions
o Conflict Cooperation and Competition
 Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics
 Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
o The Role of Marketing Communication
o Developing Effective Communication
5 10
o Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
 Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotion,
Events, and Public Relation
 Managing Personal Communication: Direct Marketing and
Personal Selling
o Direct Marketing
o Interactive Marketing
o Principles of Personal Selling
Creating Successful Long-Term Growth
 Introducing New Market Offerings
o New Product Development Process
 Tapping into Global Markets
6 05
o Modes of Entry
o Understanding Country of Origin Effects
 Managing a Holistic Marketing Organisation
o Internal Marketing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Socially Responsible Marketing
o Marketing Implementation, Evaluation and Control
 Emerging Marketing Needs and Opportunities
o Rural Marketing in India
o Social Marketing
o Network Marketing
o E-Marketing / Internet Marketing
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding and exposure to the concept of marketing and its roots in
customer-centric approach, and the elements of marketing mix.

Text-Book
1. Kotler, Keller, Koshy, Jha, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management: A South Asian
Reference-Books
1. Stanton, Etzel, Walker, (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw-Hill.

2. Ramaswami, Namakumari, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management: Indian context,
Macmillan India.
3. Kumar Arun, Meenakshi, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management, Vikas Publishing.
4. Saxena Rajan, (Latest Edition), Marketing Strategies, Tata-McGraw Hill.
5. Khurana, Ravichandran, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Management, Global
Business Press.
6. Mazumdar Ramanuj, (Latest Edition), Marketing Strategies, Allied Publishers.
1. Journal of Marketing (USA)

2. Indian Journal of Marketing
3. Marketing Master Mind, etc.

MB747.3: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (OM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
II. Course Objective
 To understand the manufacturing and service operating systems with respect to

design, planning, control and improvement techniques.
 Learn the interdependence of operations management with other functional areas.
 To develop the ability to manage people and resources effectively, to motivate,
organize, control, evaluate.
 To adapt to change which has become critical to competing in today‟s international
markets.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Strategic Importance of Operations
1  Introduction to Operations and Competitiveness 08
 Operations Strategy: Decision Analysis
Designing the Operating System
 Products and Services
2  Processes and Technologies 08
 Facilities: Site Selection and Location Analysis
 Project Management
Managing the Supply Chain
 Supply Chain Management
3  Forecasting 08
 Capacity and Aggregate Planning
 Inventory Management: Simulation
Operations Planning
 Just-in-Time and Lean Production
4 08
 Enterprise Resource Planning
 Scheduling
Ensuring Quality
5  Quality Management
 Statistical Process Control 08
 Waiting Line Models for Service Improvement
Total 45

VI. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The skills and gained ability to perform well in dimensions such as cost, quality,
delivery, dependability and speed, innovation and flexibility to adapt him/her to
variations in demand.
Text-Books
1. Russell and Taylor, (Latest Edition), Operations Management, Pearson Education.

2. Lee Krajewski, Larry Ritzman and Manoj Malhotra, (Latest Edition), Operations
Management, PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Norman Gaither and G Fraizier, (Latest Edition), Operation management, Thomson

south Weston.
2. Ashwathappa and Sridhar Bhatt, (Latest Edition), Production and Operation Management,
Himalaya Publishing House.
3. Adam and Eberts, (Latest Edition), Production and Operation management, PHI.
Journal / Magazines / Newspapers
1. Supply Chain Management Review

2. The IUP Journal of Supply Chain Management
3. The IUP Journal of Operations Management
5. Journal of Management Research
6. Advances in Management
8. Business India
9. Economic Times,

EE782: ENERGY AUDITING & MANAGEMENT
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objectives of the Course:
Energy auditing and management is a course where a student will deal with various types of
energy conservation schemes employed in industries, power stations, domestic and commercial
areas. Also they will familiar with energy auditing and management procedures. The objectives of
the course are:
 To learn practical and theoretical elements of energy auditing and management

 To be able to assess the benefits and drivers of an energy audit and have knowledge of
the Energy Audit Process
 To understand how to plan and carry out an energy audit and be confident with the
process of reviewing energy data in the energy audit process
 To Have knowledge of the equipment and key considerations required when carrying
out an energy audit
 To be aware about the energy efficient technology and energy storage system
Sr. No. Title of Unit Min. No. of Hrs
1 Electrical Energy Conservation 3
2 Electrical Energy Management 10
3 Financial Management 4
4 Energy Management & Audit 5
5 Energy Efficient Technologies In Electrical Systems 3
6 Energy Storage Systems 3
7 Case Studies. 2
Total hours (Theory): 30

1 Electrical Energy Conservation 3 Hours
1.1 Energy Scenario: Introduction to energy science and energy technology, various forms of
energy. Law of conservation of energy. Energy scenario of India, Introduction to global
energy scenario. Carbon credit, Energy Sector Reforms, Energy Strategy for the Future,
Energy Conservation Act 2001 and its features.
1.2 Measures for energy conservation:
Potential energy conservation opportunities in: HVAC System, Lighting systems, Motors
and Transformers.
2 Electrical Energy Management 10 Hours
2.1 Concept of energy management, Design of Energy management programmes, energy cost,
Energy planning, Energy staffing, Energy Organization, Energy Requirement, Energy
Costing, Energy Budgeting, Energy Monitoring, Energy consciousness, Energy
Management Professionals, Environment pollution due to energy use. Need of energy
planning, steps for energy planning, Energy management in industry, Energy management
cell function and objective, Energy management cell roles and responsibilities, Role of
energy manager, benchmarking, Social and economic cost benefits. Seven principals of
energy management.
2.2 Electrical System Optimization
Electricity rate tariff, key to reduction in electrical energy Consumption, Methods to

improve plant power factor, load management, conduction loss, switching loss, magnetic
loss, harmonic Compensation, Motor control, Lighting energy saving.
2.3 Cogeneration
Definition, Need, Application, Advantages, Classification, Saving potentials
3 Financial Management 4 Hours
Investment-need, Appraisal and criteria, Financial analysis techniques-Simple payback

period, Return on investment, Net present value, Internal rate of return, Cash flows, Risk
and sensitivity analysis; Role of ESCOs.
4. Energy Management & Audit 5 Hours
Introduction, Definition, Energy audit- needs, types and walkthrough energy audit.
Energy audit at unit level, Industrial Audit approaches. Procedure for energy audit and
equipments required. Comprehensive Energy audit Site testing Measurement & Analysis
of Electrical System like Induction Motors. Transformers, Illumination system, Problems

on Energy Management.
5. Energy Efficient Technologies In Electrical Systems 3 Hours
Load Management and Maximum demand control. Electrical distribution system.

Maximum demand controllers, Automatic power factor controllers, Energy efficient
motors, Soft starters with energy saver, Variable speed drives, Energy efficient
transformers, Electronic ballast, Occupancy sensors, Energy efficient lighting controls.
6. Energy Storage Systems 3 Hours
Introduction, Demand for energy storage, Energy storage systems: heat storage- hot water,
hot solids, phase change materials; Potential energy storage: spring, compressed gas.
Pumped hydro: Flywheels. Rolling mills, Electrical and magnetic energy storage systems.
7. Case Studies. 2 Hours
D. Instructional Methods and Pedagogy
discussed.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures which carries a component of the overall evaluation.
 Minimum two internal exams will be conducted and will be considered as a part of overall
evaluation.
 Assignments based on course content will be given to the students for each unit/topic and
will be evaluated at regular interval and its weightage may be reflected in the overall
evaluation.
After the completion of the course the students will be able to:
1. Analyze about energy scenario nationwide and worldwide

2. Decide about energy management in more effective way.
3. To propose the effective way for energy conservation
4. Carry out financial management.
5. Can design energy efficient technologies and provide alternative solutions for energy storage
 Text Book:
1. Amlan Chakrabarti, Energy engineering and management, PHI Learning Private Limited.
2. K. Nagabhusan Raju, Industrial Energy Conservation Techniques, Atlantic Publishers &
Distributors (P) Ltd.
 Reference Book:
1. Renewable energy sources and conservation technology By- N.K.Bansal, Kleemann
and Meliss

2. Non – conventional energy sources by G.D. Rai
3. Energy technology by S.Rao.
4. A guide to energy management by Barney L Capehart, William J Kennedy, Wayne C
Turner.
 Web Material:
1. www.energymanagertraining.com
2. www.bee-india.gov.in

CE771: PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

The course aims to provide and understanding management issues process during project
management.
 To develop an awareness of the need for project planning and management

 To apply professional attitudes and techniques to managing a project
 Provide students with a basic understanding of project management principles and
practices.
 Increase the student's ability to function effectively on a project team.
 Increase the student's ability to function effectively as a project manager.

Sr. Title of the unit Minimum number of
hours
No.
1 Overview of Project Management 03
2 Project Management Concepts and Techniques 03
3 Project Cost Estimation 04
4 Project Planning and Scheduling 05

5 Project Monitoring and Control 05
6 Material Management in Project 04

7 Management of Special Projects and Project Management 06
Software Tools Total hours (Theory): 30

1. Overview of Project Management 03 Hours
Introduction to Project Management
Overview of Project Planning, Project Estimation, Project Scheduling,
Organization and Team Structure, Risk Analysis and Management,
Resource Allocation
Project Management Process and Role of Project Manager
2. Project Management Concepts and Techniques 03 Hours
Project Screening and Selection Techniques
Structuring Concepts and Tools (WBS,ORS,LRC)
Project Planning Tools (Bar Chart, LOB, CPM and PERT)
Risk Analysis and Management
3. Project Cost Estimation 04 Hours
Types of Estimates and Estimating Methods
Project Budgeting
4. Project Planning and Scheduling 05 Hours
Dynamic Project Planning and Scheduling
Project Scheduling with Resource Constraints
5. Project Monitoring and Control 05 Hours
Monitoring Techniques and Time control system
Project Cost Control and Time cost tradeoff
6. Material Management in Project 04 Hours
Project Procurement and Material Management
7. Management of Special Projects and Project Management Software Tools 06 Hours
Management of SE/NPD/R&D/Hi-Tech and Mega Projects
Software tools for Project Management: MS Project, Primavera, Turbo
Project, Risky Project.

 Lectures will be taken in class room with the use of multi-media presentations and black
board – mix of both.
 Assignments based on above course content will be given to the students at the end of
each chapter. Each assignment contains minimum 5 questions.
 Quizzes and Surprise tests will be conducted for testing the knowledge of students for
particular topic.

Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to understand project
management process and different aspect of development process necessary for the
management of the project which includes various activities, resources, quality, cost and
system configuration etc.

 Text Books:
1. Project management: engineering, technology, and implementation by Shtub, Avraham,
Jonathan F. Bard, and Shlomo Globerson, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1994.
2. Project Management Handbook by Lock, Gower.
3. VNR Project Management Handbook by Cleland and King.
4. Management guide to PERT/CPM by Wiest and Levy, PHI.
5. Project Management: A Systemic Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling by
Horald Kerzner, CBS Publishers, 2002.
6. Project Scheduling and Monitoring in Practice by S. Choudhury,
7. Total Project Management: The Indian Context by P. K. Joy, Macmillan India Ltd.
1. Project Management for Business and Technology: Principles and Practice by John M
Nicholas, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
2. Project Management, by N. J. Smith (Ed), Blackwell Publishing, 2002.
3. Effective Project Management by Robert K. Wysocki, Robert Back Jr. and David B.
Crane, John Wiley, 2002.
4. Project Management: A Managerial Approach, by Jack R Meredith and Samuel J Mantel,
John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2000.

IT771: CYBER SECURITY & LAWS
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 02 00 02
02
Marks 100 - 100
The main objectives for offering the course Cyber Security are
 To under the concepts of Cybercrimes and cyber security

 To create the awareness of how to avoid becoming victims of cybercrimes.
 To provides the content which will help the students who wish to seek career in cyber
security or independent study and research in the field of cyber security.
Sr Title of the unit Minimum

number of hours
No.
1. Computer and Cyber Security Basics 06
2. Security Threats 09
3. Provisions in Indian Laws in dealing with Cyber Crimes 07
4. Case Studies 08

1. Computer and Cyber Security Basics 06

hours
Introduction to Computers, Computer History, Software, Hardware, Classification,
Computer Input-Output Devices, Windows, DOS Prompt Commands, Basic
Computer Terminology, Internet, Networking, Computer Storage, Computer Ethics
and Application Programs, Security : Security trends –Goal, Attacks, Services and
Mechanism
2. Security Threats 09 hours
Application security (Database, E-mail and Internet), Data Security Considerations-
Backups, Archival Storage and Disposal of Data, Security Technology-Firewall and
VPNs, Intrusion Detection, Access Control. Security Threats -Viruses, Worms,
Trojan Horse, Bombs, Trapdoors, Spoofs, E-mail viruses, Macro viruses, Malicious
Software, Network and Denial of Services Attack, Security Threats to E-Commerce-
Electronic Payment System, e-Cash, Credit/Debit Cards. Digital Signature, public
Key Cryptography.
3. Provisions in Indian Laws in dealing with Cyber Crimes 07 hours
Security Policies, Why Policies should be developed, WWW policies, Email Security
policies, Policy Review Process-Corporate policies-Sample Security Policies,
Publishing and Notification Requirement of the Policies. Information Security
Standards-ISO, IT Act, Copyright Act, Patent Law, Cyber Laws in India; IT Act 2000
Provisions, Intellectual Property Law.
4. Case Studies 08 hours
Identity Management, Cyber Security and Terrorism: Case Studies, The DigiNotar
case, Deutsche Telekom, The disruption at the IT service provider Tieto, Web Based
Attacks by Symantec, Password Security
discussed.
 Two internal exams will be conducted and average of the same will be converted to
equivalent of 15 Marks as a part of internal theory evaluation.

unit/topic and will be evaluated at regular interval. It carries a weightage of 5 Marks as a
part of internal theory evaluation.
 Surprise Tests/Quizzes/Seminar/Case Study will be conducted which carries 10 Marks
as a part of internal theory evaluation.
E. Student Learning Outcome:
Learning outcomes of the course are:
 Students will able to do classification of cybercrime, methods used to perform crime,

apply cyber security, and know the detailing of Information Technology Acts against
offences.
 Students will understand and appreciate the legal and ethical environment impacting
individuals as well as business organizations and have an understanding of the ethical
implications of IT legal decisions.
 Students will have a fundamental knowledge of Information Technologies which affect
organizational processes and decision-making.
1. Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawerance Pfleeger, “Analysing Computer Security”, Pearson
Education India.
2. V.K. Pachghare, “Cryptography and information Security”, PHI Learning Private Limited,
Delhi India.
3. Dr. Surya Prakash Tripathi, Ritendra Goyal, Praveen kumar Shukla,”Introduction to
Information Security and Cyber Law” Willey Dreamtech Press.
4. Schou, Shoemaker, “ Information Assurance for the Enterprise”, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. CHANDER, HARISH,” Cyber Laws And It Protection ” , PHI Learning Private Limited
,Delhi ,India

CA842: MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective: Develop skills to describe mobile technologies, mobile environment and to

develop Android application for mobile device using Android SDK, android application
resource, application component, and Android APIs.
Prerequisites: Object Oriented Programming.
Methodology & Pedagogy: This course focuses on providing hands-on experience in designing
and development of mobile application with emphasis on the real world application and
techniques that enable smart phone based application development. Student shall also develop
applications dealing with data storage, documents sharing among applications and application
based on Google maps and integration of web service with mobile application.
Learning Outcomes:
 Describe the different mobile technologies, mobile development platform and mobile
GUI.
 Comprehend how Android applications works, their life cycle, Intents, fragments and
resources.
 Design and develop useful Android applications with compelling user interfaces by using
View, View Group, menu, and dialog elements.
 Use Android's APIs for data storage, retrieval, user preferences, files, databases, and
content providers.
 Utilize the power of background services, notifications, and broadcast receiver.
 Use Android's communication APIs for SMS, telephony and location based application.

Week Practical Description

No
1 Brief about mobile Different mobile application development platform overview

technologies and challenges in and Android architecture overview and basic components of
mobile application Android application development overview.
development and architectural
overview of an Android
platform.
2 Development of first Android Working of Android Studio IDE, Android project directory
based mobile application and structure, Dalvik Virtual Machine Overview, Android
overview of necessary Software development kit explanation, Virtual device creation
components required for and execution of first application on virtual as well as actual
development. device
3 Fundamentals of User XML based user interface designing using different available
Interface designing. layouts like Relative Layout, Linear Layout, Table Layout etc.
4 User Interface Widgets-1 Hands-on demonstration of basic widgets like- Text View,
Edit Text, Button, Toggle Button, Radio Button, Radio Group,
Check Box, Rating Bar, Seek Bar etc.
5 User Interface Widgets-2 Hands-on demonstration of composite widgets like- List View,
Spinner and Auto Complete Text View and customization of
the composite controls.
6 Activity, Activity navigation Activity life cycle, Linking Activity using Intents: start
and Intents. Activity(), Start Activity For Result().
Calling built-in applications: ACTION_MAIN,

ACTION_VIEW, ACTION_DIAL,
ACTION_SEND
7 Android Resources, Styles and Usage and implementation of different resources like
Themes. drawable, string, color, dimes, raw and animation. Creating
and Applying simple Style, Inheriting built-in Style and User
defined style, Using Styles as themes.
8 Dialogs & Menus. Hands-on demonstration of different dialogs and menus

available in Android.
9 Data Persistence Techniques. User Preferences and Database management through SQLite

10 Broadcast Actions and Service: life cycle, create and destroy service, Alarm Manager
Services implementation. and SMS Manager. Standard Broadcast Actions.
11 PHP based web service Creation and consumption of PHP based web service.
implementation in Android
12 Simple Google Map Google Developer console usage, SHA-1 certificate creation
incorporation with Android and API-KEY creation and incorporation in Android
application. application.
 Text Books:
1. Wei-Meng Lee: Beginning Android 4 Application Development, Wiley India Pvt Ltd.
2. Mark L. Murphy: The Busy Coder‟s Guide to Android Development
Reference Books:
1. Jonathan Simon: Head First Android Development, O‟REILLY publication

2. Mark L Murphy: Beginning Android, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
Web References:
1. https://developer.android.com [Detail Android Development Guide]

2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SUOWNXGRc6g&list=PL2F07DBCDCC01493A
[200 android development tutorials]
3. www.androidhive.info/ [Advance application development with Android]

PT796: FITNESS AND NUTRITION
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

This course is intended to introduce the student with the basic concepts of health and fitness
and appraise the relative contribution of leading a physically active lifestyle. This shall
familiarize the student with different perspectives on maintaining general health and fitness
behavior and understand the nutritional information to suit individual needs and
preferences.
Upon completion of this course, the student should be able to:
1. To provide general concepts of physical education, nutrition and fitness.

2. To promote and understanding of the value of sports for life skill development.
3. Introduce nutritional principles and application to improve overall health.
S. No. Title of the unit Minimum number
of hours
1. Physical Education and Physical Fitness 10
2. Nutrition and Health 10
3. Sports and Life Skills Education 10

C. Detailed syllabus:
1 PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND PHYSICAL FITNESS 10 hours

1.1. Concept of Physical Education, Meaning, Definition, Aims and Objectives of Physical Education,
Need and Importance of Physical Education
1.2 Physical Education and its Relevance in Inter Disciplinary Context
1.3 Physical Fitness Components: Type of Fitness, Health Related Physical Fitness, Performance
Related Physical Fitness
2 NUTRITION AND HEALTH 10 hours
2.1 Concept of Food and Nutrition, Balanced Diet, Food Pyramid Index
2.2 Macro and Micronutrients: Types, functions and classification system
2.3 Carbohydrates : Types, RDA data, Glycemic index, Sources of Fats, saturated, unsaturated fats,
recommended intake, importance of fat in diet, fats in health and disease
Protein: Types EAA, function, assessing quality of proteins, selecting incomplete proteins, RDA
2.4 sources.
Vitamins And Minerals: Types, functions, sources, and minerals - calcium, Phosphorus, iron,
2.5 magnesium, sodium, potassium, and chloride. Trace elements - sources and functions.
Determining Caloric Intake and Expenditure, Obesity, Causes and Preventing Measures – Role of
Diet and Exercise, Importance of hydration in exercise
3 SPORTS AND LIFE SKILLS EDUCATION 10 hours
3.1 Sports and Socialization
3.2 Physical Activity and Sport – Emotional Adjustment and Wellbeing
3.3 Substance Abuse among Youth – Preventive Measures and Remediation
3.4 Yoga, Meditation and Relaxation
3.5 Sports and Character Building
3.6 Values in Sports
3.7 Sports for World Peace and International Understanding
D. Instructional Method And Pedagogy:

 Interactive classroom sessions using black-board and audio-visual aids.
 Using the available technology and resources for e-learning.
 Students will be encouraged towards self-learning and under direct interaction with
course faculty.
 Students will be enabled for continuous evaluation.
 Case study, didactic mode of group discussions

Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to :
 Appraise the importance of exercise in maintenance of health and fitness.
 Objectively define health and fitness in realistic environment and inculcate habits
of physical activity, nutrition and sports as a behavior change and overall health
promotion

 Textbooks:
1. ACSM”s “Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual Lippincott Williams and
Walkins USA, 2005.
2. Siedentop.D,(1994) Introduction to Physical Education and Sports (2nd ed.), California:
Mayfield Publishing Company.
3. Corbin.Charles Beetal. C.A., (2004) Concepts of Fitness and Welfare Boston McGraw
Hill.

NR752: EPIDEMIOLOGY & COMMUNITY HEALTH
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Course Objectives:
Upon completing the course, students will be able to
 Familiar with epidemiologic terminology, outcome measures, and study designs; to
appreciate application of epidemiology to subfields (e.g., infectious diseases, reproductive
health, genetics); and to apply epidemiologic methods to current public health issues.
Unit No. Title of Unit Prescribed

Hours
1 Introduction: 5
 Concept, scope, definition, trends, History and
development of modern Epidemiology
 Contribution of epidemiology
 Implications
2 Health Statistics: 2
 Morbidity & Mortality
3 Epidemiological approaches: 4
 Study of disease causatives (Cause & Risk)
 Health promotion
 Levels of prevention
4 Epidemiology of 10
 Communicable diseases
 Non-communicable diseases
5 Disaster: 3
 Disaster preparedness,
 Disaster management
6 Health Organizations: 6
 Voluntary health organizations
 International health agencies –WHO, World health
assembly, UNICEF, UNFPA, SIDA, US AID, DANIDA,
DFID. AusAID etc
Total 30 Hours

C. Instruction Method and Pedagogy
The course is based on practical learning. Teaching will be facilitated by reading material,
discussion, microteaching, task-based learning, assignments, field visit and various
interpersonal activities like group work, independent and collaborative research,
presentations etc.
D. Evaluation:
The students will be evaluated continuously in the form of internal as well as external
examinations. The evaluation (Theory) is schemed as 25 marks for internal evaluation and 75
marks for external evaluation in the form of University examination.
Internal Evaluation
Marks per
incidence
1 Assignments 1 8 8
2 Internal Test/ Model Exam 1 12 12
Attendance and Class Minimum 80%

3 10
Participation attendance
Total 30
External Evaluation
The University Theory examination will be of 75 marks and will test the logic and critical
thinking skills of the students by asking them theoretical as well as application based questions.
The examination will avoid, as far as possible, grammatical errors and will focus on applications.
Marks per
incidence
1 Theory Paper 01 70 70
Total 70

E. Learning Outcomes: At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
 Understand the epidemiologic terminology,
 Understand the health statistic
 Understand the various methods of epidemiology
 Understand the role and functions of various health agencies
 Understand the epidemiological trends in communicable and non-communicable
diseases.

OC733: INTRODUCTION TO POLYMER SCIENCE
Credits and Hours:

Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Objective of the course
Fundamentals of polymer chemistry will be introduced.
B. Outline of the course
Sr.No Title of Unit Approximate No of

Hours
1 Basic concepts of Polymer Chemistry 5
2 Chemistry of Polymerization 8
3 Kinetics of polymerization 8
4 Molecular weight and size 9
C. Detailed syllabus:
Sr. No Title of Unit Approximate
No of Hours
1. Basic concepts of Polymer Chemistry 5
Introduction to polymers, How are polymers made, Classification of

polymers.
2. Chemistry of Polymerization 8
Chain polymerization, Step polymerization, Miscellaneous

polymerization reactions, Polymerization techniques.
3. Kinetics of polymerization 8

i). Free – Radical chain polymerization.
ii). Cationic & anionic polymerization.
iii). Polycondensation
4. Molecular weight and size 9
Number – Average molecular weight. Viscosity – Average molecular

weight. Polydispersity and molecular weight. Significance of
polymer molecular weight. Size of polymer molecules
D. Instrumental Methods and Pedagogy:

Topics will be taught in interactive class room sessions using black-board and if required power-
point presentations will also be employed. Special interactive problem solving sessions will be
conducted. Course materials will be provided from various sources of information. Students will
be trained to measure molecular weight of polymers using appropriate instrument(s). Unit test
will be taken regularly as a part of continuous evaluation and suggestions will be given to the
students in order to do better in their performance.
E. Student Learning Outcomes/Objective:

 The programme aims at providing the basic concepts in polymer science.
 Ensuring that students acquire skills for further research in this area.
F. References:
1. A First Course in Polymer Chemistry by A. Strepikheyev , V.Derevitskaya and
G.Slonimsky ; MIR Publishers, Moscow
2. Polymer Science by V.R.Gowariker , N.V.Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, New Age
International Publishers.
3. Polymer Science and Technology of Plastics and Rubbers by Premamoy Ghosh, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd. New Delhi.

MB651: SOFTWARE BASED STATISTICAL ANALYSIS
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100
A. Course Objectives
 To enable the students to understand importance of research and statistical techniques.

 To provide hands on training of statistical software like SPSS, SYSTAT, MATLAB and other
open source software like R , WEKA, for research.
B. Course Outline
Classroom
Module
Title/Topic Contact
No.
Sessions
Introduction to Statistics
1  Research and Innovation 06
 Introduction to Statistics
 Quantitative Techniques in Research
Software # 1 - Use of Software in Research
 Introduction to the Software

 Creating Variables
 Data and its Types
 Importing Data from MS-Excel
 Transformation of Variables
2  Visual Benning 12
 Determining Validity and Reliability of Scale using CFA -
Cronbach's (alpha) : a coefficient of internal consistency
 Estimation & Hypothesis Testing:
 Parametric Tests
o Z Test
o t – Test
o Cross Tabulation and Chi – square
o One-Way & Two-Way Analysis of Variance

Classroom
Module
Title/Topic Contact
No.
Sessions
(ANOVA)
o Pearson‟s Correlation Analysis
o Regression Analysis
o Simple & Multiple Linear Regression Analysis
o Measures of Model Fit (R and R-square Statistics)
 Non-Parametric Tests
o Mann-Whitney U Test
o Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test
o Run test
o Krushal-Wallis Test
o Spearman Correlation Analysis
Statistical Analysis Using Open Source software
 Introduction to Software
 Programming Language Basics – including creating, sub-
setting and analyzing
3  Managing your files and workspace 10
 Controlling functions (procedures or commands)
 Data Acquisition – Reading files
 Data Transformations
 Selecting variables and observations
 Writing functions (macros)
 Graphics
4 Article / Research Papers Reviews 02
Total 30
C. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise self-learning and active classroom interaction based on
students‟ prior preparation. The course instructor is expected to prepare a detailed
session-wise schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the reading material and case
material for every session. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources
beyond the prescribed text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the library,
or from websites and other resources not accessible to the students, the course
instructor should make the material available to the students well in advance, so that the
students can come prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
 Classroom / Practical Contact Sessions … About 28 Sessions
 Research Paper Discussions / Feedback … About 02 Sessions

D. Internal Evaluation
Percentage
Sl. Marks per Total of total
Component Number
No. incidence Marks internal
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
2 Assignment / Project work 1 150 150 50
4 Attendance and Class 30 10

Participation
Total 300 100

marks f or the course.
E. External Evaluation
The University examination will be for 70 marks and will be based on practical computer-
based tests and a viva-voce.
F. Learning Outcomes
 Skills related to use of statistical techniques for analysis using software

 Rational decision making skills for typical business / other decisions
 Inputs for reviewing articles / research papers especially related to use of statistical
techniques and analysis based on software
G. Reference Material
 Text-book
1. Latest Manuals of Software

 Reference Books
1. David .M. Levine, Krehbiel, Berenson, P.K. Viswanathan, (Latest Edition), Business
Statistics – A First Course, (Latest Edition), Pearson Education

MA772: DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS
Credits and Hours:
Teaching Scheme Theory Practical/Tutorial Total Credit
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

The course is designed for Engineers, Physicists, Chemists, Mathematician. This course covers
basics of Statistics and Experimental Design.
The objectives of the course are to:
1. Understand basics of Statistical Techniques of Design of Experiment

2. Understand the applications of experimental design in practice

Sr Title of the unit Minimum number
No. of hours
1. Principles of Experimental Design 06
2. Statistical Concepts 06
3. Single Factor Experiments 08
4. Factorial Experiments 10

1 Principles of Experimental Design 06 Hours
1.1 Basic Terminologies: Types of Investigations and Experiments
1.2 Confirmatory and Exploratory Experiments
1.3 Modeling and selecting Response
1.4 Minimizing Bias and Variability
2 Statistical Concepts 06 Hours
2.1 Descriptive Statistics and Graphical Presentation
2.2 Probability Distributions, Hypothesis Tests and Confidence Intervals
2.3 Power and Sample size calculation
2.4 Experiments for Two Treatments
2.5 Linear Regression: Simple and Multiple
3. Single Factor Experiments 08 Hours
3.1 Completely Randomized Designs
3.1 Concepts of Multiple comparison
3.2 Pairwise Comparisons
3.3 Comparisons with a Control
3.4 General Contrast
4. Factorial Experiments 10Hours
4.1 Inference from Factorial Experiments
4.2 Two-Level Factorial Experiments
4.3 Definition and Estimation of Main Effects and Interactions
4.4 Statistical Analysis
4.5 Two-Level Fractional Factorial Experiments: Introduction
discussed.
 Attendance is compulsory in lectures/laboratory which carries a 5% component of the overall
evaluation.
 Minimum two internal exams will be conducted and average of two will be considered as a
part of 15% overall evaluation.
unit/topic and will be evaluated at regular interval. It carries a weighting of 5%.

 Two Quizzes (surprise test) will be conducted which carries 5% component of the overall
evaluation.
 At the end of the course the students will be able to understand the basic concepts of Design
of Experiment.
 Student will be able to apply concepts of these course in their study of specialization
 Text Books:
1. Tamhane, Ajit C. Statistical analysis of designed experiments: theory and applications. Vol.
609. John Wiley & Sons, 2009.
2. Hinkelmann, Klaus, and Oscar Kempthorne. Design and Analysis of Experiments,
Introduction to Experimental Design. Vol. 1. John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
3. Lorenzen, Thomas, and Virgil Anderson, eds. Design of experiments: a no-name approach. CRC
Press, 1993.
1. Cox, David Roxbee, and Nancy Reid. The theory of the design of experiments. CRC Press, 2000.
2. Goupy, Jacques L. Methods for experimental design: principles and applications for physicists and
chemists. Vol. 12. Elsevier, 1993.

PH826: INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
Credits and Hours:
Hours/week 2 - 2
2
Marks 100 - 100

 To acquaint the students with the basic concepts of Intellectual Property Rights;
 To develop expertise in IPR related issues,
 To sensitize the students with the emerging issues in IPR and the rationale for the
protection of IPR, and;
 To explore practical aspects repeated to patenting.

No. of Contact
Sr. No. Title of Unit
Hours.
1 Intellectual Property Concepts 5
2 IPR and Research 5
3 Practical aspect of patenting 10
4 IPR related treaties 5
5 Case Study 5

C. Syllabus Topics:
Sr.
Title of Unit Topics
No.
 Concept of property, conventional property vs. Intellectual

Intellectual Property Property
1  Basic aspect of the 8 different IPR mechanism Viz. Patents,
Concepts
Copyright, trademark, industrial design, layout design of
integrated circuits, geographical indicators, plant varieties &
trade secrets.
2 IPR and Research  Benefits of IPRs to improve the quality of research work
 Strategies for avoiding research duplications, infringements
 Indian patent act and its recent amendment with respect to
following aspect: Patentable and non-patentable inventions,
Essential criteria for filing a patent, Filling a patent in India and
abroad, Drafting of patent application
 Patent Filling and Commercialization: Procedure for patent
obtaining in India, National and International Patent Search,
Patent Analysis, Patent Drafting and Filling Procedure in India,
Patent Specification and Claims, How to right a Claim of Patent,
Practical aspect of Pre/Post Grant Issues in Patenting, Opposition of Patent
3 Granting, Infringement Analysis, Ground of Defense, Intellectual
patenting
Property Appellation Board (IPAB), International Filing: PCT
System
 Patent and Biodiversity Act
 Introduction to World Intellectual Property Organization.
(WIPO)
 Commercialization of patent: Need for Commercialization of
research and role of IPRs in research Commercialization.
 Benefit/Disadvantages of patenting to the society
 Latest Amendment/Emerging Issues in Patenting
4 IPR related treaties  Patent co-operative treaty
 Budapest treaty
5 Case Study

The course employs in interactive classroom session using chalk and talk teaching to
power point presentations. It also includes presentation by students on a specific topic
assigned to them by the faculty and case study discussion with various litigation,
infringement and patent rejection cases. Unit test will be conducted regularly as a part
of continuous evaluation and suggestion will be given to student in order to improve
their performance.

E. Students Learning Outcomes/Objectives:
 At the end of the course, the student will be able to understand the fundamental
concepts of Intellectual Property Rights which further will be helpful in
understanding other advanced aspects of Patent and Trademark applications in
various scientific research and innovation.
 At the end student would gain experience in filling and drafting procedure of
Patent.
F. Recommended Study material
1. Intellectual Property Right basic Concept, by M. M. S. Khatri, Atlantic Publisher
and Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Epstein on Intellectual Property: 5th Edition by Michael M. Epstein, Wolters
Kulwer India Pvt. Ltd. Gurgaon, India.
3. Intellectual Property Right and Human Development in India by Shabana Talwar,
First Edition, Serials Publications, New Delhi, India.
4. IPR Handbook for Pharma Students and Researchers, Parikshit Bansal, Pharma
Book Syndicate, Hyderabad, India.
5. Patents, N. R. Subbaram, Pharma Book Syndicate, Hyderabad.
6. Intellectual Property Right by Nikolaus Thumm, Springer-Verlag Publications,
Germany.
7. Intellectual Property - Patents, Copyright, TradeMarks and Allied Rights by
Cornish, Aplin and Llewelyn, Sweet and Maxwell – Thomson Publishers, New
Delhi, India
8. The Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights: A Case Book by Louis Tc. Harms,
WIPO Publishing House, Geneva.
9. Intellectual Property: From Creation to Commercialization - A Practical Guide for
Innovators & Researchers by John P., MC Manus, Oak Tree Press, Ireland.

MB 781.3: COMMUNICATION SKILLS-2 (CS-2)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
I. Number of Credits : Non Credit Course
 To train the students to become efficient readers of written material on different

aspects of life and business;
 To develop the students‟ ability to comprehend and retain the material so read
for easy recall as and when required;
 To help them improve their vocabulary of English;
 To train them to think in groups of words appropriate to situations and express
their thoughts spontaneously and comfortably in the written mode; and
 To impart skills for writing readable and effective communications.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Written Communication Skills
1  Reading Skills 01
 Writing Skills
Reading Skills
 Basics of Reading
2 10
 Reading Techniques
 Reading Comprehension
Writing Skills
 Gathering Ideas for Writing
 Elements of Good Writing
3 14
 Creating Effective Sentences
 Understanding Words
 Creating Effective Paragraphs
Business Communication Aids
4 05
 Grammar and Syntax
Total 30
IV. Pedagogy
The course is based on experiential learning. Instructor will act more as facilitators in
helping participants through the process of learning, using discussions, role plays,
individual and group exercises, and participant presentations. The pedagogical mix will
be as follows:

 Classroom Contact Sessions ...About 28 Sessions
 Feedback of student‟s performance ...About 02 Sessions
V. Evaluation
At the end of the course the students will have to submit a written report. Certificate
will be awarded to the students who have successfully completed the course.
 The ability to read and comprehend comfortably material drawn from varied sources
and express themselves equally comfortably in writing. The course should aim at
making reading and writing enjoyable activities for students.
Text Book
1. Guy Brook, Hart, (Latest Edition), Business Benchmark, Cambridge.

2. Jones Leo, Alexan Richard, (Latest Edition), New International Business English,
Cambridge.
Reference-Book
1. Hornby A. S., (Latest Edition), Guide to Patterns and Usage in English, Oxford University
Press.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester – 3)

MB800.3: SUMMER INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME (SIP)
(PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to comprehend all the learning of the past one year (two
semesters) so as to develop an in-depth understanding of all general and functional areas
of management / organizations.
 To investigate in a topic relating to one of their areas of interest / streams of

specialisation, and in the process, develop a comprehensive understanding of the same in
order to prepare a conceptual / research based paper.
III. Pedagogy
For this course, each student will be placed in an organization where a faculty guide
(internal) and an organizational guide (external), if any, will provide guidance and
supervision and work on various issues jointly. The students will work on their projects
individually and not in pairs or teams. As a rule, the number of students, organization
and faculty member / guides will be allotted based on certain criteria and as per the
situation. A faculty co-guide may also be appointed for every/any student.
The investigation will be in the nature of preparation of a project and research through:
i. Study of secondary data from books, journal and magazine articles, newspaper
articles, websites, electronic and physical databases, etc.;
ii. Primary data collection through interviews, discussions, and other research
instruments. Students are encouraged to pursue research in the organisation
where they have undergone their summer internship.
The outcome of the research will be a Summer Internship Programme – Project Report which
would contain, among others, the following:
Part-I – Organizational Profile
 Introduction
 The Company / Organisation
 Functional Areas
 Decision-making
 Financial Analysis
 My learning from the study of the organisation

Part-II – Project Study
 Area of research chosen, with reason

 Problem Definition
 Research Method
 Data Collection and Analysis
 Conclusions and Recommendations, if any.
 Limitations of the study and leads for further work
The detailed format of the report will be circulated to the students at the beginning of
the end of the second semester.
IV. Internal Evaluation
the faculty guide on the basis of the regularity and quality of work done by the student
under his/her guidance. The internal evaluation will be for 30% of the course.
The university examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students‟

reports and a viva-voce and will carry 70% marks for the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the students should have developed:
 A comprehensive understanding of the functioning of the organization, process of

undertaking / conducting systematic inquiry into a phenomenon, and the art of
writing a paper (conceptual / literature / research type) and integrating fundamental
and functional areas of management for effective strategic decision making.

MB801.3: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT (SM)
YEAR2, SEMESTER 3
 To introduce the student to competitive strategy and competitive advantage;

 To make students familiar with Michael Porter‟s concepts of value chain and the two
main sources of competitive advantage viz. Cost advantage and Differentiation;
 To expose the students to different types of strategic choices for various levels of the
business, viz. Corporate , Business , and Operational levels; and
 To develop the students‟ skills for putting strategies into actions, adopting the
appropriate strategy for competitive advantage
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Strategic Management
 The Strategic Management Process
1 06
 External Analysis: The Identification of Industry Opportunities
and Threats
The Nature of Competitive Advantage
 Internal Analysis: Distinctive Competencies, Competitive
2 Advantage and Profitability 10
 Building Competitive Advantage through Functional Level
Strategies
Building Competitive Advantage
 Building Competitive Advantage through Business Level Strategy
 Competitive Strategy and the Industry Environment
 Strategy in High Technology Industry
 Strategy in Global Environment
 Corporate Strategy
3 o Horizontal Integration 10
o Vertical Integration
o Strategic Outsourcing
 Corporate Strategy
o Diversification
o Acquisition
o Internal New Ventures
Implementing Strategy
 Corporate Performance, Governance, and Business Ethics
4  Implementing Strategy in Companies that Compete in A Single 10
Industry
 Implementing Strategy in Companies that Compete Across

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Industries and Countries
 Balanced Scorecard - Use and Limitations
Strategic Thinking
5 06
 How to Think Strategically? – Tools and Exercises
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An understanding of the meaning of strategy and strategic management.

 An ability to think strategically; and see organisations from a holistic perspective
through Balanced Scorecard Approach.
Text-Books
1. Chales W.L. Hill, Gareth R. Jones, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management –An integrated
Approach, Biztantra, Houghton Mifflin.
2. Michael E. Porter, (Latest Edition), Competitive Advantage, Free press.
Reference-Books
1. Arthur A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, John E Gamble, Arun K Jain, (Latest
Edition), Crafting and Executing Strategy, McGraw Hill.
2. Gerry Johnson, Kevan Scholes, (Latest Edition), Exploring Corporate Strategy, Pearson.
3. Adrian Haberberg, Alison Rieple, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management, Oxford.
4. Henry Mintzberg, Bruce Ahlstrand, Joseph Lampel, (Latest Edition), Strategy Safari,
Pearson.

2. Vikalpa

MB802.3: LEGAL ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC SYSTEMS (LE&PS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to understand a few important laws, acts and regulations
affecting organisations and management operations; and
 To help the students develop insights into the provisions of some important laws
affecting decision-makers‟ processes in their roles as employees, managers or owners.
 To understand the public system, its components, functioning and relationship
between public system and business and society.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Contract Act, 1872
 General Principles
 Offer and Acceptance
 Capacity to Contract
 Consent, Consideration, Performance and Discharge of Contract
1  Void, Contingent and Quasi Contracts, Special Types of Contract 07
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930
 Overview
 Conditions and Warranties
 Transfer of Ownership
 Performance of Sale
 Breach and Remedial Measures
The Companies Act, 1956
 Overview
 Formation
 Memorandum and Articles of Association
 Prospectus
2  Issue and Allotment of Capital 07
 Meeting and Proceedings
 Directors and BOD
 Account, Audit and Investigation
 Winding up
 Limited Liability Partnership, Producer Companies

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881
 Overview
 Parties to Negotiable Instruments
 Presentation
 Negotiation
3  Discharge of Parties 07
 Liability of Banker
 Dishonour of Instruments
 Protest and Noting
Law of Intellectual Property Rights
 Patent, Trademark and Copyright.
Others
 The Consumer Protection Act, 1986
4  Information Technology Act, 2000 07
 Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999
 The Competition Act, 2002
 Indian Partnership Act, 1932
Indian Public System – Part 1
5
 Constitution of India
 Administrative System of India 07
 Central and State Government
 Components of Public System
 Public Finance
Indian Public System – Part 2
 Public System and Society
 Public System and Business
6  Indian Political System 07
 Public Sector Undertaking
 Problems and Challenges of Public System
 Important Bodies/ Institution in Indian Public System
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of a few representative commercial laws, acts, rules and

regulations affecting management decision making.
 An ability to interpret the provisions of various laws and understand their
applications in practical contexts.
 A clear understanding of the public system within which the business and society
functions.

Text-Books
1. K. R. Bulchandani, (Latest Edition), Business Law for Management, Himalaya
Publication.
2. S. N. Maheshwari and S.K. Maheshwari, (Latest Edition), A Manual of Business,
Himalaya Publication.
3. S. S. Gulshan, (Latest Edition), Mercantile Law, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. P. P. S. Gogna, (Latest Edition), Mercantile Law, S. Chand Publication.

2. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Elements of Business Law, Sultan Chand and Co.
3. C. L. Bansal, (Latest Edition), Business and corporate laws, Excel Books.
4. Akhileshwar Pathak, (Latest Edition), Legal Aspect of Business, Tata McGraw Hill Pvt.
Ltd.
Students and faculty members are advised to read the Bare Acts and discuss in the
classroom. They may also refer to other standard law books and are advised to read
newspapers / magazines on law and public systems so as to keep themselves updated on
the major developments/changes taking across India and world.

MB803.3: MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS (MIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an understanding of Management Information System, its concepts and

business, the key learning objectives are:
 To understand the role of the information systems (IS) function in an organization.
 To develop an insight as to how information systems influence business strategy.
 To develop the ability to contribute meaningfully towards information system
selection.
 To help the students how to use MI Systems for gaining competitive advantage.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Organization Management and the
Networked Enterprise
 Information Systems in Global Business

 IS in the Enterprise (How Businesses use
Information Systems?)
1  Information Systems, Organizations and 08
Strategy
 Contemporary Approaches in Information
Systems
 Part I Project: Analyzing Business Processes
for an Enterprise System
Information Technology Infrastructure

(Obtain a Bird’s Eye View of Contemporary
Technologies and Infrastructure required to
Implement an IS.)
2  IT Infrastructure and Emerging Technologies 08

and its Platforms.
 Foundation of Database and Information
Management
 Telecommunications, the Internet and Wireless
Technology

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Part II Project: Creating a New Internet
Business
Enterprise Information Systems and Key

System Applications of Modern Age
 E-Commerce: Digital Markets, Digital Goods

3  Business Processes and Enterprise Applications 08
 Knowledge Management
 Part III Project: Designing an Enterprise
Information Portal
Information Security (Understand the

Importance and Issues related to the
Protection of an Organization’s Information
Assets)
4 08
 Security and Control
 Risk Assessment
 Ethical and Social Issues
 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems
Development of Information System
 Business Process Re-engineering and

5 Information Systems 06
 System Development
 The Open Source of Development
 International Information System
Building and Maintaining Information

System
6  Building Information System 04
 Project Management: Establishing the Business
Value of Systems and Managing Change
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

the beginning of the semester as a part of detailed session-wise schedule.Classroom
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level Evaluation

Marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total

 A sound understanding and the appreciation of the concepts of MIS including
learning how to design MIS for different departments of an organization.
 The ability gain knowledge about latest technologies in the field of
telecommunication, networks and Database.
VIII. Reference Materials
Text-Books
1. Loudon, Kenneth C. and Loudon, Jane P., (Latest Edition), “Management Information
Systems: Managing the Digital firm”, Pearson Publication.
2. O‟Brien, (Latest Edition), “Management Information Systems – Managing Information
Technology in the Business Enterprise”, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Stephen Haag, Maeve Cummings, Amy Philips, (Latest Edition), “Management
Information Systems – For the Information Age”, Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference-Books
1. W. S. Jawadekar, (Latest Edition), “Management Information Systems”, Tata McGraw

Hill.
2. Ephraim Turban, Dorothy Leidner, Ephraim McLean, James Wetherbe, (Latest
Edition), “Information Technology for Management – Transforming organizations in the Digital
Economy”, Wiley Publication.
3. S.A. Kelkar, (Latest Edition), “Management Information Systems – A Concise Study”, PHI
Publication.
4. McLeod, Raymond and Schell, George P., (Latest Edition), “Management Information
Systems”, Pearson Publication.
5. Miller, (Latest Edition), “MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software”, Pearson
Publication.
1. Computer Express, Digichip, PC World, Computer Shopper, Dataquest etc.

MB804.3: ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MSMEs (EMSMEs)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to understand the meaning of entrepreneurship,

intrapreneurship, and MSMEs.
 To provide insights into the challenges and joy of being an entrepreneur.
 To reinforce the importance of practicing entrepreneurial and leadership skills as
organisational managers.
 To bring out the role and importance of entrepreneurs and MSMEs in in developing
and developed economies as drivers of employment and growth.
 To familiarise the students with MSME Act; and to help them adapt corporate
management practices to MSMEs.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurship and Free Enterprise
 Entrepreneurship and New Venture Opportunities
 Entrepreneurship and Innovation
 Entrepreneurship for Small Business
 Corporate Entrepreneurship
 Social Entrepreneurship
1  Entrepreneurship, Management, Administration – Similarities and 06
Differences
 Personal Attributes for Entrepreneurial Success
 Role of Entrepreneurship Development Schemes and Programmes
 Entrepreneurial Stages and Cycles – Some Models
 Roles of Mentors and Incubators, Entrepreneurship Lab etc.
Sources of Ideas for New Ventures
 Importance of Learning Attitude
 Media, Secondary Data, Primary Research, etc.
 Creativity and Idea Generation Tools and Techniques
o Brain Storming
2 04
o NGT
o Delphi
o Synectics
o Morphological Analysis
o Bionics, etc.

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurial Challenges and Enablers
 Business Plan – Contents, Importance, Pre-Requisites for an
Effective Business Plan
 Markets and Market Development
 Finance and Resource Mobilisation – Different Sources, Including
3 Venture Capital and Private Equity 08
 HR Challenges – Availability of Talent, Retention, Compensation,
Etc.
 Legal and Government Challenge
 Supportive Measures and Policies of Governments
 Public Bodies for Entrepreneurial Support
Introduction to MSMEs
 MSME as Understood in India and Developed Countries
 Guidelines of RBI and NABARD
4  Nature and Contribution of MSMEs 06
 An Overview of MSME Structure and their Relationship to
Corporate and Large Business Houses
 MSME Classification on the Basis of Various Criteria
Legal Framework and Environment of MSMEs
MSME Management Challenges
 Markets
5  Finance 13
 Human Resources
 Regulations, Systems and Procedures
 Capacity – Physical, Intellectual and Technical or Technology
Case Studies of Successful Entrepreneurs and Unsuccessful
6 Entrepreneurs and Failed Ventures – Lessons for New 04
Entrepreneurs
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of the concept of entrepreneurship; and

 An appetite for being innovative, creative and entrepreneurial.
 An integrated understanding of the rationale for co-existence of MSMEs along with
large businesses;
 An appreciation of the importance of MSMEs in developing and developed countries;
and
 An ability to distil management principles relevant to MSMEs from corporate
management practices.

Text-Book
1. David Holt, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship – New Venture Creation, PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Zimmerer, et. al., (Latest Edition), Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business
Management, PHI.
2. Hisrich, et. al., (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship, TMH
Magazines / Journals / Newspapers
1. Business India
2. Business World
4. The International Journal of Entrepreneurship
9. Academy of Management Review

MARKETING
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB810.3: CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR AND TECHNOLOGY (CBT)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
I. Number of Credits: 4
 To expose the students to the different aspects of consumer behaviour and provide
an insight into the consumer decision making process and factors that influence it.
 To provide the students an overview of different consumer decision making models
by undertaking marketing research in hitherto known and unknown areas of
consumer behaviour.
 To make the students understand the basic concepts of consumer behaviour through
real-life examples and cases;
 To understand the internal forces, external influences and processes that go on to
affect consumer behaviour, the challenges generated for the marketers and the
strategies which could be implemented.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 The Impact of Digital Revolution on Consumer Behaviour
1 09
 Consumer Research
 Market Segmentation
Consumer as an Individual
 Consumer Motivations
 Personality and Consumer Behaviour
2  Consumer Perceptions 12
 Consumer Learning
 Consumer Attitude Formation and Change
 Communications and Consumer Behaviour
Consumer in their Socials and Cultural Settings
 Reference Groups and Family Influences
 Social Class, Culture and Sub-Culture and Consumer
3 09
Behaviour
 Cross-cultural Consumer Behaviour: International
Perspective
The Consumer Decision Process
4  Consumer Influence and Diffusion of Innovation 09
 Consumer Decision-Making and Beyond
Understanding Consumer Behaviour through and CPA,
RTI, etc.
5 06
 Consumer Protection Act / Councils: Rights of the Consumer
 Right to Information and Consumer Behaviour

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Use of Technology in Marketing
 Internet Marketing
 Web Based Marketing Strategies and Business Models
 Networking, Customer Support and Online Quality Services,
6 06
Etc.
 Consumer Behavior Insights on Layout and Design of the
Website
 Direct Marketing Strategies Under Customized Marketing
7 Project / Cases Presentations 06
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
advance, so that the students can come prepared for the classes. In addition to these,
every student is expected to undertake a marketing research project chosen by the
instructor and present a written and oral report. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of the factors that influence consumer decision making and
marketing strategies that stimulate such behaviour. They should be able to appreciate
this technology for marketing of goods/ services.
Text-Book
1. Leon Schiffman and Leslie Kanuk, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Pearson
Education, Low Price Edition / PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Satish Mishra and S. H. Kazmi, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Text and Cases
by Excel Books.
2. S. Ramesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Conceptual Issues in Consumer Behaviour by Pearson
Education.
3. Suja R. Nair, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour in Indian Perspective, HPH.
4. Solomon, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education.
5. Hawkins, Best Coney, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, TMH.
6. Loudon and Della Bitta, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Concepts and Application,
TMH.
7. Blackwell, Miniard and Engel, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Concepts and
Application, Thomson-Southwestern.

2. ICFAI Marketing Mastermind
3. Marketing Mastermind
5. Journal of Consumer Behaviour
6. Journal of Consumer Research
7. Economic Times- Brand equity

MB811.3: INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION (IMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To help students to understand various concepts of advertising and sales

promotion through real-life examples and cases.
 To help students to develop understanding of integrated marketing
communication systems and processes.
 To sensitize students to the various facets of advertising, public relation and
promotion management
 To help the students develop an understanding of concepts and tools like
Advertising Brief (Creative Brief), AIDA, DAGMAR, Reach, Frequency, and Impact
etc. to develop proficiency in the planning of activities of an organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
1 Introduction to Integrated Marketing Communication
 IMC: Evolution and Role in Branding
 The Promotional Mix 06
 The IMC Planning Process
 Role of IMC in the Marketing Process
2 Integrated Marketing Program and Situational
Analysis
 Organizing for Advertising and Promotion
04
o The Role of Ad Agencies and Other Marketing
Communication Organizations
 Perspectives on Consumer Behaviour
3 Analysing the Communication Process
 The Communication Process 04
 Source, Message, and Cultural Factors
Objectives and Budgeting for IMC Programs
4  Establishing Objectives and Budgeting for the Promotional 04
Program
Developing Integrated Marketing Communication
Program
 Creative Strategy: Planning and Development
 Creative Strategy: Implementation and Evaluation
5  Media Planning and Strategy 18
 Evaluation of Broadcast, Print and Support Media
o Direct Marketing
o The Internet and Interactive Media
o Sales Promotion

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Public Relations, Publicity and Corporate
Advertising
o Personal Selling
Monitoring, Evaluation, and Control
 Measuring the Effectiveness of the Promotional Program
 International Advertising and Promotion
6 10
 Regulation of Advertising and Promotion
 Evaluating the Social, Ethical, and Economic Aspects of
Advertising and Promotion
Project Presentations
 Usage and Impact on Children via Advertisements
 Ethics in Advertising
7  Sex in Advertising 10
 Laws Related to Deceptive Advertising
 Impact of Globalization on Advertising
 Relevance and usage of Puffery in Advertisements
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasize participatory and individual learning through active
students are expected to undertake a project chosen by the instructor and present the
same. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 A clear understanding of functioning of an advertising department / agency and the
roles managers assume for managerial performance.
Text-Book
1. Belch and Belch, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective, Tata McGraw Hill Publication
Reference-Book
1. Clow and Black, (Latest Edition), Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, PHI.
2. Kazmi and Batra, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Sales Promotion, Excel Books.
3. Batra, Myers and Aaker, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Management, Pearson
Education.
4. S. A. Chunawalla, (Latest Edition), Advertising, Sales and Promotion Management, HPH.

1. Pitch
2. Economic Times - Brand equity
3. Business Line - Catalyst

MB812.3: SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT (SDM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To acquaint students with concepts, tools & techniques of sales.

 To develop skills of personal selling.
 To develop the skills of managing and leading a sales force.
 To devise the suitable channels of distribution in the contemporary scenario
 To manage the performance of the channels in the changing environment
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Sales Management, Personal Selling and
Marketing Strategy
1  Sales Management and the Business Enterprise 04
 Sales Management, Personal Selling, and Salesmanship
 Setting Personal-Selling Objectives
Organising the Sales Effort
2  The Effective Sales Executive 02
 The Sales Organisation
Sales Force Management
 Personal Selling in the Selling Field
 Recruiting Sales Personnel
 Selecting Sales Personnel
 Planning Sales Training Programs
3  Executing and Evaluating Sales Training Programs 12
 Motivating Sales People
 Compensating Sales Personnel
 Managing Expenses of Sales Personnel
 Sales Meetings and Sales Contests
 Controlling Sales Personnel: Evaluating and Supervising
Controlling the Sales Effort
 The Sales Budget
4  Quotas 08
 Sales Territories
 Sales Control and Cost Analysis
Marketing Channel
5  Introduction to Marketing Channel 08
 Function and Channel Structures
 Channel Relationship

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Channel Design and Implementation
Channel Design: Demand, Supply and Competition
 Service Output and Supply Side Analysis
6  Membership Issues 08
 Gap Analysis
 Vertical Integration
Channel Implementation and Performance Measurement
 Channel Power
 Managing Channel Conflict
 Channel Implementation Issues
 Strategic Alliances and Legal Constraints on Channel Policies
7 in India 14
Institution for Channels
 Retailing
 Wholesaling
 Franchising
 Logistics and Supply Chain Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 Skills to know how to apply the concepts of Sales in organisations.

 The ability to plan, organise, manage and coordinate territories and intermediaries
for organisations.
Text-Books
1. Still, Condiff and Govoni, (Latest Edition), Sales Management-Decisions, Strategies and
Cases, PHI.
2. Stern, Ansary and Coughlan, (Latest Edition), Marketing Channel, PHI or Pearson.
Reference-Books
1. David Jobber, Geoff Lancaster, (Latest Edition), Selling and Sales Management, Pearson
Education.
2. Spiro. Stanchart and Rich, (Latest Edition), Salesforce Management, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Tanner, Honeycutt, Erffmeyer, (Latest Edition), Sales Management- Shaping Future Sales
Leaders, Pearson Education.
4. Tapan K Panda and Sunil Sahadev, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management,
Oxford.

5. B. S. Sahay, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Macmillan.
6. Havaldar and Cavale, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management, Tata
McGraw Hill.
7. Venugopal Pingali, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management in Indian
Perspective, Response Book.
8. Dent Julian, (Latest Edition), Distribution Channel, Kogan Page.
9. Rosenbloom Bent (Latest Edition), Marketing Channel, Thomson Publication.
1. Sales and Marketing Management

2. Economic Times
3. Business Standard – The Strategies

MB813.3: STRATEGIC MARKETING (S-MKTG)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop a clear understanding of a range of concepts of relevance to strategic

marketing management, marketing strategy and marketing planning such as market
segmentation together with the ability to apply such terminology in the context of
real world situations.
 To develop ability to undertake strategic marketing analyses, using a range of
appropriate techniques and to apply such techniques to actual company/market
based examples.
 To develop ability to consider a range of strategic marketing options and critically
choose between them.
 To develop ability to select from various marketing activities in an appropriate way
for a given marketing scenario.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 Understanding Strategic Marketing: Principles, Process and
1 Hierarchy 09
 Internal Competences or Organizational Capabilities
 The External Environment or Analysis
 Constructing Plans and Selecting Strategies
Market Strategies
 Product-Market Strategies for Consumer Goods, Business-to-
2 Business and Services 12
o Characteristics various Markets
o Segmenting, Target Market and Positioning
o Strategies for various Markets
Competition, Competitive Advantage, Growth Strategies
 Competitor Analysis
3  Sustainable Competitive Advantage 09
 Growth Strategies: Product Market Development and
Diversification
Specialized Strategy Applications
 Applications
4 o Innovation Strategy 06
o Recession Marketing Strategy
o Strategic Rural Marketing
o Relationship Marketing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Specialized Strategy Consolidation and Evaluation
 Consolidation
5 o Marketing Strategy and Profit 06
 Evaluation
o Critical Success Factors / Criteria
Strategic Marketing for Non-Profit Organizations
 Developing Customer Orientation
 Understanding Target Audience
6  Organizing Resources 06
o Attracting Human Resources: Staff and Volunteers
o Working with Private Sector
 Developing and Controlling Marketing Mix
7 Project / Cases Presentations 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
every student is expected to undertake a marketing research project chosen by the
instructor and present a written and oral report. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of and exposure to strategic marketing principles, plans;

products based strategies for consumer goods, B2B and service markets and learn
strategic aspects for non-profit organisation.
Text-Book
1. A Nag, Strategic Marketing, (Latest Edition), Macmillan Publishers India Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Douglas West, John Ford and Essam Ibrahim, (Latest Indian Edition), Strategic
Marketing, Oxford University Press.
2. Allan R Andreasen, Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing for Non-profit
Organizations, Pearson Education.
3. Colin Gilligan and Richard M.S. Wilson, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Planing,
Butterworth-Heinemann – an imprint of Elsevier.
4. David A Aaker, (Latest Edition), Strategic Market Management, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc.

5. Mark E. Parry, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd.
6. Musadiq A Sahaf, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
7. Ferrell and Hartline, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing, Cengage Learning India Pvt.
Ltd.

5. The Strategists
6. The Hindu – Business Line – Archives
7. Economic Times- Brand equity

MB814.3: RURAL MARKETING
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To provide an overview of rural markets and emerging perspectives of rural

marketing.
 To understand the buying behaviour, the consuming pattern, the need and wants of
the rural consumer.
 To provide some of the challenges and opportunities that the rural market holds for
the Companies
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introduction to Rural Marketing
 Definition and Scenario
1 06
 Nature and Scope
 Opportunities and Challenges
The Rural Marketing Environment
 The Evolution of Rural Marketing
 The Rural Environment
2 06
 The Rural Economic Environment
 The Rural Economic Structure
 The Rural Infrastructure
Rural Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Research
 Fundamentals of Consumer Behaviour
 Factors influencing Consumer Behaviour
3  The Buyer Decision Process 08
 The Rural Marketing Research Process
 Tools used in Rural Marketing Research
 Field Procedure and Rural Realities
Selecting and Attracting Markets
 Concepts and Process
4  Segmentation 06
 Target
 Positioning
Rural Marketing Mix
 Product Strategy
 Pricing Strategy
5 10
 Distribution Strategy
 Communication Strategy

Title/Topic
No sessions
Applications
 Marketing of Consumer Products
6  Marketing of Agri Inputs 10
 Marketing of Services
 Agricultural Marketing
The Future of Rural Markets
 Changes in Pattern
 Emerging Segments
7 08
 Technology and Innovation
 Rural Innovations
 Marketing of Rural products
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability of applying the concepts of Sales in organisations.
Text-Books
1. Badi, R V., and Badi, (Latest Edition), N.V., Rural Marketing, Himalaya Publishing
House.
2. Kashayp Pradeep, (Latest Edition), Rural marketing, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Singh. S., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishers.

2. Kashyap, P., and Rant, S., (Latest Edition), The Rural Marketing, Biztantra.
3. Rahman, H. U., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Himalaya Publishing House.
4. Gopalaswamy, T. P., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishing House.
5. Dogra and Ghuman, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing-Concepts and Practices, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
6. Krishnamacharyulu and Ramkrishnan, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing- Text and
Cases, Pearson Education.
7. Sanal Kumar, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Sage Publications.
8. S. S. Acharya and N. L. Agarwal, (Latest Edition), Agricultural Marketing in India -
Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt Ltd.

3. Indian Journal of Rural Marketing
4. The Strategists

FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB820.3: FINANCIAL DECISION ANALYSIS (FDA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To acquaint students with financial theories and practical problems arising in

organisations.
 To make students understand how organizations make value optimizing
financial decisions, and reflectively and critically assess the ethical issues arising
from these decisions.
 To equip students with financial analysis skills in the facilitation of strategic
decision making.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Aspects of Project Appraisal
 Present Values
 Values of Bonds and Common Stocks
1  NPV Leads to Better Investment Decisions 08
Project Analysis
 Sensitivity Analysis
 Real Options and Decision Trees
Risk and the Cost of Capital
 Projects Costs of Capital
 Measuring the Cost of Equity and Debt
2  Setting Discount Rates Without Beta 08
Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting
 Sources and Perspectives of Risk
 Various Techniques and Models for Analysis
 Risk Analysis in Practice
Capital Investment Strategy
 Market Values
 Economic Rents and Competitive Advantage
Financing and Valuation
3 08
 The After-Tax Weighted-Average Cost of Capital
 Valuing Businesses
 Using WACC in Practice
 Adjusted Present Value

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Working Capital Management
4  Cash Budget Simulation 08
 Discriminant Analysis and Customer Classification
 Advances in Inventory Management
Payout Policy
5  Choice of Payout Policy 08
 Dividend Payments and Stock Repurchases
 The Payout Controversy
Leasing and Hire Purchase
 Types of Leases
 Rationale for Leasing
6  Mechanics of Leasing 08
 Leasing as a Financing Decision
 Hire-Purchase Arrangement
 Choice between Lease and Hire-Purchase
Value Based Management
 Methods and Key Premises of VBM
7  Marakon Approach 08
 Alcar Approach
 McKinsey Approach
 BCG Approach
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An ability to explain how organisations make value optimising financial decisions,

and reflectively and critically assess the ethical issues arising from these decisions.
 Demonstrate a clear conceptual understanding of the fundamental financial theories
relevant to financial decision making.
 Critically analyse and evaluate various financial models and decision making
techniques and their impact on different constituencies of stakeholder.
 Apply financial analysis skills in the facilitation of strategic decision making.
 Assess the features of alternative and diverse sources of finance and critically
evaluate their appropriateness under different circumstances.
 Evaluate elements of risk, return and value in a range of strategic operational
financial decisions and understand the implications in regulatory and governance
terms of the consequences of doing so.
Text-Books
1. Brealy and Myers, (Latest Edition), Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata McGraw
Hill.

2. Prassana Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management Theory and Practice,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
Reference-Books
1. Alan C. Shapiro and Sheldon, (Latest Edition), Modern Corporate Finance, Pearson
Education
2. I. M. Pandey, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publication.
3. Rajiv Shrivastava and Anil Misra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Oxford
University Press
4. Brigham and Ehrhardt, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Theory and Practice,
Thomson South-Western
5. James C. Vanhorne, (Latest Edition), Financial Management and Policy, PHI.
6. Pandey and Bhat, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
(CFM).
7. Robert F. Bruner, (Latest Edition), Case Studies in Finance, Tata McGraw-Hill. (CSF)
1. Finance India
2. Indian Economy Review
3. The Economist
4. Economics and Political Weekly
6. Journal of Finance
7. Business Newspapers
 Business Standard
 The Economic Times
 Financial Express

MB821.3: MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL SERVICES (MFS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to understand the working of Indian Financial System as a

whole.
 To provide detailed insight into the range of various financial services available and
their role, importance and functioning.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Financial System and Components
 Financial System
1  Indian Instruments 08
 Financial Markets
 Financial Institutions
Banking Services
 Indian Banking System
 Banking Products and Services
2  Aspects of Bank Management 08
 Risk Management in Banking
 Asset – Liability in Banking
 Management of NPA
 Technology and CRM in Banking
NBFC
 Functions
 Prudential Norms for NBFCs
 Development Financial Institutes
Asset/Fund Based Financial Services
3  Hire Purchase Finance 08
 Lease Finance
 Bills Discounting
 Factoring and Forfeiting
 Housing Finance
 Infrastructure Finance
Fee Based Advisory Financial Services
 Issue Management
4  Stock Broking and PMS 08
 Credit Rating
 Custodial and Depository Services

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Insurance Services
 Introduction
 Principles of Insurance Services
 Economics of Insurance
5  Life Insurance 08
 General Insurance
 Reinsurance
 Insurance Sector Reforms
 Liberalization of Insurance Sector
Specialized Financial Services
 Mutual Funds
 Merchant Banking
6  Investment Banking 08
 Securitization
 Trade Finance
 Venture Capital
 Microfinance
Regulatory Aspect of Financial System
7  Institutional Framework 08
 Legal Framework
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 A clear understanding of the Indian financial system as a whole and its functioning.
He / she will also be able to understand various services offered in the financial system
and its role, usefulness and interrelation with other components of the system.
 A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on a
regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
 An ability to appear for different banking examinations includingJAIIB and CAIIB.
Text-Books
1. Dr. S. Gurusamy, (Latest Edition), Financial Services and System, Thomson Publication.
2. Bharti Pathak, (Latest Edition), Indian Financial System, Pearson Education.
3. H.R. Machhiraju, (Latest Edition), Indian Financial System, Vikas Publishing.
4. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, (Latest Edition), Management of Banking and
Financial Services, Pearson education.

Reference-Books
1. Nalini Purva Tripathy, (Latest Edition), Financial Service, Prentice-Hall of India.

2. M.Y. Khan, (Latest Edition), Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill publication.
3. K. Sasidharan and Alex Mathews, (Latest Edition), Financial Services and System, Tata
McGraw Hill
4. H.R. Machiraju, (Latest Edition), Merchant Banking, New Age International
Publishers.
5. Madhu Vij and Swati Dhawan, (Latest Edition), Merchant Banking and Financial Services,
Tata – McGraw Hill.
6. Thummuluri Siddaiah, (Latest Edition), Financial Services, Pearson education.
Apart from the above mentioned books, students are also requested to regularly read the
business daily, watch the business channels and refer to the important and useful web
sites.
1. Journal of Financial Services Research

2. Indian Journal of Finance

MB822.3: SECURITY ANALYSIS AND INVESTMENT
MANAGEMENT (SAIM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to understand various types of financial market in India as

well as abroad.
 To enable the students to understand various securities, their features and their
valuation and creation & monitoring the performance of the portfolio.
III. Course Outline

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Markets
 Money Market
 Debt Market
 Government Security Market
1 08
 Foreign Exchange Market
 Derivatives Market
 Commodities Market
 Primary and Secondary Market.
Securities and their Valuation-I
 Securities
2  Term Structure of Interest Rate 08
 Risk and Return
 Equity Share Valuation
Securities and their Valuation-II
 Preference Share Valuation
3 08
 Bond Valuation
Bond Portfolio
Security Analysis and Portfolio Design
 Fundamental Analysis
4 08
 Technical Analysis
 Financial Planning
 Taxation Aspect in Investment
Portfolio Management
 Optimal Portfolio
 Capital Asset Pricing Model and Arbitrage Pricing Model
5 08
 Efficient Market and Efficient Market Hypothesis
 Portfolio Performance Evaluation
 Investment Strategies
6 Derivatives 10

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
 Types of Derivatives (Forward, Future, Options and Swaps)
 Mechanism of Derivatives
 Trading and Valuation of Derivative
 Derivatives Investment Strategies and Risk Management
 Development of Derivatives in India
Advanced Topics
 International Securities Market
7  Effects of Global Factors on Indian Securities Markets 06
 ADR, GDR, FDI, FII, Etc.
 Regulations of Securities Market and Investor Protection
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of various financial markets in the country as well as across

the globe. They will be able to understand how the financial markets functions and
play a very important role in the growth and development of sound financial system.
 An ability to understand the features , pros and cons of various securities, their
valuation, selection of securities, construction of portfolio and its performance
measurement.
 The understanding related to capital markets, derivative instrument, mutual fund
etc… students are also expected to be able to appear and pass certificates exams
conducted by National Stock Exchange, Bombay Stock Exchange and National
Institute of Security Market (established by SEBI), to enhance the placement and
career opportunities.
Text-Books
1. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata-
McGraw Hill
2. Reilly and Brown, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Thomson publishing.
3. V. K. Bhalla, (Latest Edition), Investment Management, Sultan Chand and Co.
4. Dhanesh Khatri, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Macmillan
publication.
5. Fischer and Jordan, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Prentice-Hall of India.
Reference-Books
1. Sudhindra Bhat, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Excel
Books.
2. Ranganatham and Madhumathi, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio
Management, Pearson Education
3. Dr. S. Gurusamy, (Latest Edition), Financial Market and Institutions, Thomson
Education.
4. Clifford Gomez, (Latest Edition), Financial Markets, Institutions and Financial Services,
Prentice –Hall of India
5. NSE‟s Certification for Capital Market (Dealer) Modules (CMDM) workbook.

Apart from the above mentioned books, students can refer to any book on the subject
matter to have a better understanding. Students are required to read business dailies,
refer to important websites and watch the business new channels on regular basis.
Discussing the contemporary development on the subject matter in the classroom is the
integral part of the overall teaching pedagogy and will carry due weightage on the
evaluation components.
1. The Journal of Portfolio Management.

MB823.3: FINANCIAL REPORTING, ANALYSIS AND CORPORATE
GOVERNANCE (FRA&CG)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand the financial reports. Compute ratios and analysis of the annual
report.
 To analyse and interpret the financial reports to evaluate the financial position of the
company, and take proper decision.
 To enable the students to understand the meaning of corporate governance and its
core principles.
 To spell out in detail the structures and processes in corporate governance generally
envisaged for implementation as a concept.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Financial Reports
 Conceptual Framework of Financial Statements
 Income Statement
 Balance Sheet
1  Cash Flow Statements 08
 Reading and Understanding other Financial Reports,
Auditors‟ Report and Directors‟ Report
 Segment Reporting
 Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
Indian Accounting Standards for:
 Valuation of Assets Under Finance Lease and Intangible
Assets
2 08
 Asset Impairment
 Accounting for Liabilities
 Cost Accounting
Financial Statement Analysis
 Horizontal Analysis
 Common Size Analysis
3  Trend Analysis 08
 Earnings Per Share Analysis
 Ratio Analysis
 Analysis of Cash Flow Statement
Auditing
4  Roles of Auditors 08

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
 Auditing Process
 Understanding Audit Reports
 Guidelines of ICSI and ICAI
Global Financial Reporting Standards
5  GAAPs and IFRSs, IAS 08
 Indian GAAP and US GAAP
Introduction to Corporate Governance
 History of Corporate Governance
6  Introduction: Corporate Governance 08
 Corporate Governance and Compliance Requirements
 Best Boards
Corporate Governance and Other Sectors
 Corporate Governance and Banking Sector
7  Corporate Governance and Public Enterprises 08
 Emerging legal Framework
 Study of Indian vs. Global Scenario
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
 The ability to understand and interpret financial statements for various forms of
businesses.
 The ability to analyse and interpret the data contained in these statements for
improved decision-making.
 The understanding the Corporate Governance structures and systems and their
importance.
 The ability to analyse business environment in the context of Corporate Governance
Systems.
Text-Books
1. I. M. Pandey, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publications.

2. N. Gopalsamy, (Latest Edition), A Guide to Corporate Governance, New Age
International (P) Limited.

Reference-Books
1. Prassana Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management Theory and Practice, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
2. Ambrish Gupta, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Management: An Analytical
3. D. S. Rawat, (Latest Edition), Students‟ Guide to Accounting Standard, Taxmann.
4. S. K. Bhattacharya, John Dearden, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management, Vikas
Publishing House.
5. N Ramchandran, Ram Kumar Kakani, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for
Management, Tata McGraw- Hill.
6. Harrison, Horngren, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Pearson Education
7. Stice and Stice, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting- Reporting and Analysis, Cengage
Learning.
1. Business Line
2. Mint

MB824.3: TAXATION MANAGEMENT (TM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To acquaint the students with individual and corporate taxation and various tax
planning concepts leading to better grasp of the issues regarding corporate decision
making.
 To provide knowledge of tax planning with respect to direct tax and indirect tax laws
applicable in managerial decisions making.
III. Course Outline

Topics
No. Sessions
Income Tax
 Basic Concept
 Definitions
 Chargeability
1  Scope of Income Tax 08
o Residential
o Income
 Tax Evasion, Avoidance, Planning, Exemption, Deduction, Rebate
and Relief
Computation of Taxable Income of Individual- Concepts
 Heads of Income
o Salaries
o Profits and Gains from Business or Profession
o Capital Gains
2 o Income from Other sources 08
o Deductions and Exemptions
 Submission of Return and Procedure of Assessment
 PAN and TAN
 Preliminary Ideas of Deduction and Collection of Tax at Source
 Advance Payment of Tax
Tax Planning
 Concept and Application
3  For setting up New Business Units 08
 Tax Incentives and Export Promotion Schemes
 Other Applicable Tax Benefits and Exemptions
Tax Management
 Computation of Income and Return of Income Tax
4  Filing Procedure, e-filing 08
 Assessment, Reassessment, Appeals, Revisions, Review
Rectifications, Settlement of Cases

Topics
No. Sessions
 Special Procedure for Assessment of Search Cases
 E-commerce Transactions, Liability in Special Cases
 Penalties, Fines and Prosecution
Introduction to GST
 Basic Concepts
Service Tax
5 08
 Introduction, Nature of Service Tax, Service Provider and Service
Receiver, Registration and Related Issues
 Negative List of Services, Exemptions and Abatements
Customs Act and Valuation
 Basic Concepts
Central Excise Act, 1944
6 08
 Definitions
 Chargeability
 Valuation
VAT / Sales Tax Act
7 08
 Basic Concepts
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A conceptual understanding and knowledge of tax planning with respect to direct tax
and indirect tax laws applicable in managerial decisions making.
Text-Books
1. V K Singhania, (Latest Edition), Direct Tax planning and Management, Taxmann. Delhi.
2. V .S. Datay, (Latest Edition), Elements of Indirect Taxes, Taxmann Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Prasad Bhagwati, (Latest Edition), Income Tax Law and Practice, Vishwa Prakashan.
2. Santaram R., (Latest Edition), Tax Planning by Reports, Taxman.
3. Prasad, Bhagabati, (Latest Edition), Direct Tax Law and Practice, New Age Publication
Delhi.
4. Merhotra, H. C., (Latest Edition), Direct Taxes Planning, Sahitya Bhavan.
5. Srinivas E. A., (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning, TMG.
6. Lakhotia R. N., (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning, Vision Publications.

7. Ahuja, Girish and Gupta, Ravi, (Latest Edition), Systematic Approach to Income Tax;
Central Sales Tax, Bharat Law House.
8. Datey V. S., (Latest Edition), Indirect Taxes-Law and Practice, Taxmann Publications.
9. Lakhotia R. N., (Latest Edition), How to Save Wealth Tax, Vision Book.
10. Palkhiwala, (Latest Edition), Income Tax, Tripathi Publication.
11. Dr. Vinod K Singhania, (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning and Business Tax
Procedures with Case Studies, Taxmann.
1. Journal of Accounting and Taxation

2. Tax Management International Journal

HUMAN
RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB830.3: STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
(SHRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable students to differentiate between HR and strategic HR and the various

practices and processes associated with it.
 To help students to understand the strategic role of HR in building the competency
of the organization.
 To provide students with sufficient exposure to the contemporary concepts of the
industries and enable them to think strategically before taking decision related any
HR process.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Introduction to Strategic Role of HRM
 An Investment Perspective of HRM
 Factors Influencing How “Investment Oriented” The
1 Organization is 08
 Impact of Technology
 Workforce Demographic Change and Diversity
 Model of Strategy
 The Process of Strategic Management
The Evolving Strategic Role of HRM
 Strategic HR VS Traditional HR
 Barriers to Strategic HR
2  Models of SHRM 10
 Approaches to the Development of HR Strategies
 Approaches for Attaining Strategic Fit
 The Strategic Role of HR Function
Human Resource Planning
3  Nature, Objective, Process and Models of HRP 06
 Link to Business Planning
 Design and Redesign of Work Systems with respect to Change
Recruiting, Training and Developing
 Recruitment and Selection
4  Training Process – Planning and Strategizing Training 08
 Strategic Choice – Training, Development and Performance
Improvement
 Methods of Executive Development

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
 Evaluation of Training Programmes
Performance Management
 Strategy and Performance Appraisal Process
 Performance Management Cycle
5  Myths and Realities of HRD 10
 Concepts and Principles
 Balance Score Card Approach to Performance Management
 Performance Appraisal and its Methods
Managing Employee Relations
 Unions and Strategic Collective Bargaining
6  Change and Restructuring 08
 Strategic Approach to Compensation and Benefits
 Strategic Approach to Industrial Relation
 Strategic Development of Human Resources
Employee Separation
7  Reduction in Force 06
 Turnover
 Retirement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


VI. Internal Evaluation
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute – Level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute – level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
marks of the course.
 The abilities of strategic thinking and decision making while dealing with human
resources within and outside the organization.
 An understanding of different ways of dealing with workers as well as employees
within the organization.
 A critical insight of different issues related to management of human resources.
Text-Book
1. Mello A. Jeffrey, (Latest Edition), Strategic Human Resource Management by South –

Western Thomson, Learning Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Mabey, Christopher, Salaman, Graeman and Storey John, (Latest Edition), HRM: A
strategic Introduction, Oxford, Blackwel Business.
2. Armstrong Michael, (Latest Edition), Handbook of strategic Human Resource Management:
A Guide to Action, Crest Publishing House in arrangement with Kogan Page Ltd.
(India).

Journals / Magazines / News Papers
1. Journals and magazines in HRM like Human Capital


MB831.3: ORGANIZATIONAL AND CHANGE DEVELOPMENT
(OCD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
The objectives of the course are as follows:
 To enable the students to understand the significance of systems, process and

culture of the organization in organizational development.
 To make understand the students the way organizations and change work.
 To help to understand the issues and concerns involved in organizational
development while addressing the change management.
 To develop basic skills of the students as future of OD practitioners.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Organizational Development
 Field of OD
1  History and Definitions of OD 05
 Values, Assumptions and Beliefs of OD
 Characteristics of OD
Foundations of OD
 System Theory
2  Action Research Model 06
 Interventions
 Characteristics and Classification of OD Intervention
OD Consultant
 Choosing the OD Consultant
 Role of the OD Consultant
3 08
 Competencies of the OD Consultant
 Ethical Issues in OD Consulting
 Organizational Power and Politics and its Impact on OD

Leading and Managing Change
 Meaning of Change
 Overview of Changing Activities
 Motivating Change
 Creating a Vision
4 08
 Developing Political Support
 Managing Planned Change
 Assessing Change Forces
 Managing the Transition
 Sustaining Momentum
Human Interventions– Types
 Individual Interventions
5  Training Experiences 10
 Team Interventions
 Inter-Group Interventions
 Third Party Peace Making Intervention
Other Interventions
 Structural Interventions
 Socio Technical System as an Intervention
6  Work Redesign 10
 Quality of Work Life
 Total Quality Management
 Reengineering
 Comprehensive OD Interventions
Issues in Consultant-Client Relations
7 08
 OD Consultant, Role, Skills and Dilemmas
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to demonstrate group facilitation skills that foster a wide range of ideas
and perspectives; create an inclusive culture for diverse human beings; keep a group
focused on its purpose and tasks.
 The ability to demonstrate teamwork skills, including the abilities to coordinate
high performing teams; building trust with constituencies, plan team meetings and
processes; delegate responsibilities and tasks; follow-up and hold teammates
accountable; and coach teammates to be more effective.
Text-Books
1. French W. and Bell C., Adapted by Vohra, (Latest Edition), Organization Development,
Pearson Education.
2. Cummings T. and Worley C., (South Western, Latest Edition) Essential of OD and
Change, Pearson Education.

Reference-Books
1. S. Ramanarain, T. V. Rao, Kuldeep Singh, (Latest Edition), OD Interventions

and strategies, Response books, Sage Publications.
2. S.K. Batra, (Latest Edition), Managing Change and Organization Development, Deep
and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Journals / Magazines / Newspaper
1. Journal of Organization Development

2. International Journal of strategic human management
6. South Asia Economic Journal
8. Management Review-IIM Bangalore
9. Vikalp-IIM Ahmedabad
Websites
1. http://www.codhyd.org/
2. http://www.odsynergy.com/od-synergy-tools.html

MB832.3: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS (IR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enable the students to understand the legal dimensions of managing Human

Resources within the organization.
 To help students to understand the significance of managing the industrial relations
and the role played by intermediaries in the same.
 To help students to understand the various acts and laws governing industrial
relations.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Background to Industrial Relations
 Understanding / Appreciating Industrial Relations
 Approaches to Industrial Relations
 Forms of Industrial Relations
1  Evolution of Industrial Relations in India 05
 Trade Unionism in India
 Employers or Management Association
 Changing profile of Major Stakeholders of Industrial Relations
in India
Management of Conflict in Industry
 Conflict Resolution / Dispute Resolution
2  Collective Bargaining 08
 Management of Discipline
 Principle of Natural Justice and Negotiations
 Role of Lok-Adalat
Background of Labour Legislation
3  Introduction to Labour Legislations 05
 Indian Constitution and Labour Legislations
 ILO and its Influence on Labour Legislations in India
Protective and Regulative Legislations
 The Trade Unions Act, 1926
4  The Industrial Employment (Standing Order) Act, 1946 10
 The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947
 The Factories Act, 1948

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Wage Legislations
 The Payment of Wages Act,, 1936
5  The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 09
 The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976
 The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965
Social Security Legislations
 The Employee Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Act, 1952
6  The Employee State Insurance Act, 1948 10
 Workmen‟s Compensation Act, 1923
 The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
 The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
Miscellaneous Legislations
 Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act
7  Sexual Harassment – A Legal Perspective 07
 Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act,, 1986
 The Apprentices Act, 1961
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the different aspects of maintaining healthy industrial

relations within the defined legal framework.
 The ability to gain knowledge of all important laws and acts governing the
industrial relations.
Text-Book
1. B. D. Singh, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. C. B. Mamoria, (Latest Edition), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalayan Publishing

House.
2. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Industrial Laws, Sultan Chand and Co.
3. Taxman‟s Labour Law, (Latest Edition), Taxmann Allied Services (P) Ltd.
4. S. C. Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas
Publication.

5. Ajay Garg, (Latest Edition), Labour Laws-One should know, A Nabhi Publication.
3. Vikalp- IIM Ahmedabad
4. Human Capital
5. http://lljlibrary.com(Online Journal)

MB833.3: HUMAN RESOURCE AUDITING (HRA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an appreciation towards optimum utilization of human resource through

understanding and developing conceptual clarity on human resource auditing and
accounting.
 To identify the process and benefits associated with auditing human resource and its
activities.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
1 Introduction
 HR as Assets
 Definition of Human Resource Accounting 05
 HRA – Concepts, Methods and Applications
 Human Resource Accounting vs. Other Accounting
2 Human Resource Costs / Investments
 Human Resource Costs
 The Monetary Value Approach 08
 Non-Monetary Value Based Approaches
 Investment in Employees
 Human Resource Development through Investment
3 Return on Investments
 Development of HR ROI through High Performance
Employees 05
 Measurement of Group Value
o The Likert and Bowers Model
o Hermanson‟ Sun Purchased Goodwill Model
4 Human Resource Accounting System
 Developing Human Resource Accounting System 10
 Implementation of Human Resource Accounting System
 Integration with other Accounting System
5 Human Resource Score Card
 HR Score Card 09
 Constituents of HR Score Card
 HR Score Card as an Instrument in HR Audit
6 Human Resource Audit
 Role of Human Resource Audit in Business Environment 10
 HR Audit Objectives, Concepts, Components, Need,

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Benefits and Importance
 Methodology and Instruments of HR Audit
 The Audit Process
 Issues in HR Audit
Human Resource Audit Report
7  HR Audit Report – Purpose 07
 Report Design – Preparation of Report
 Use of HR Audit Report for Business Improvement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to audit the various HR processes and find out the discrepancies in the
record/s for improvement.
 The ability to demonstrate the ability of accounting the human resources with the
help of effective tools like balance score card.
 The ability to understand the ways in which the audit reports are generated and will
also develop an ability to read and comprehend the audit reports.
Text-Book
1. Eric G. Flamholtz Kluwer, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Accounting – Advances In

Concepts, Methods and Applications, Academic publishers.
Reference-Books
1. Udai Pareekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Designing and Managing Human Resource
Systems / 3e, Oxford/ IBH.
2. William B. Werther and Keith Davis, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and
Personnel Management, McGraw-hill.
3. K. Aswathappa, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and Personnel Management,
McGraw-Hill.
3. Vikalp-IIM Ahmedabad
4. Human Capital

MB834.3 : OCCUPATIONAL TESTING (OT)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To help students to develop an understanding of different types of psychological

tests involved in assessment of an individual which may eventually help during
different phases of recruitment, selection and manpower management.
 To provide theoretical background for supplementing the psychological tests used
for assessment.
 To help students to interpret the results obtained through the psychological tests.
 To develop a perspective about the intricacies and ethics of use of psychological
tests.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Occupational Testing
 Concept and Need of Occupational Testing
 Pros and Cons of Occupational Testing
 Psychological Testing and their Categories
1 05
 Theory and Issues in Psychological Testing
 Assessment Centers
 Integration of Profiles
 Use of Occupational Testing in Competency Mapping
Intelligence Testing
 Theoretical Background
 Significance of Intelligence Testing
2 08
 Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the
Intelligence
 Application of Intelligence Tests
Aptitude Testing
 Significance of Aptitude Testing
3 08
 Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the Aptitude
(D.A.T.)
 Application of Aptitude Tests
Personality Testing
 Significance of Personality Testing
4 10
 Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the
Personality (Multi-factor Personality Tests, 16.P.F.,
FIRO B)

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Application of Personality Tests
Self-Report Inventories
5  Significance of Self-Report Inventories 08
 Types of Self-Report Inventories (M.M.P.I)
 Application of Self-Report Inventories
Typological Tests
6  Significance of Typological Testing 08
 Types of Typological Tests (M.B.T.I.)
 Application of Typological Tests
Projective Techniques
7  Significance of Projective Techniques 08
 Types of Projective Techniques (T.A.T.)
 Application of Projective Techniques
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to demonstrate the knowledge gained through the course and apply the
same in carrying out any research in the area of HR or OB.
 The ability to understand the significance of different psychometric tests and will be
able to identify the relevant area of their application.
Text-Books
1. Anne Anastasi, (Latest Edition), Psychological Testing, Pearson Pubications.

2. Udai Pareekh, (Latest Edition), Training Instruments in HRD and OD.
3. Robert Kaplan, Ennis Saccuzzo, (Latest Edition), Psychological Testing: Principles,
Applications and Issues, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Mike Bryon, (Latest Edition), The Ultimate Psychometric Test Book, Kogan Page.
2. Liam Healy, (Latest Edition), Psychometric Tests for Dummies, John Wiley and Sons.

1. Psychological Assessment, ISSSN: 1040-3590

INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB840.3: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN BUSINESS
MANAGEMENT (ITBM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

 To introduce the concept of Information Technology applications affecting
business enterprises, governments, consumers and people in general.
 To understand how IT shapes future businesses and be prepared to contribute to
enterprise architecture.
 To recognize the risks and benefits of digitized processes and think strategically
about whether to perform those processes internally or externally.
 To realize the impact of globalization and be prepared to lead change.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 Understanding Business Organizations
1  Understanding Development Organizations 04
 Organizational Management and Control
 Commonality in Business and Development Organizations
Constituents of IT Applications in Business
 Tactical Applications in Business
2  Strategic IT Applications in Business 10
 Information Technology Applications in Management Functions
 Practical Approach for Managers in Identifying Right IT Applications
Systems Approach to Organizations
 Managing Data and Information
3  Information System Evolution and Modelling 10
 Information System (Identification, Design and Development)
 Information System Quality
Understanding Information Technologies
 Understanding and Planning Information Technologies
4  Hardware, Software and Databases 10
 Network and Communication
 Planning Information Technologies Infrastructure
Enterprise Data Management
 Accounting
 Commercial Management
5  Forecasting 08
 Warehousing
 DRP (Distribution Resource Planning)
 Human Resources Management

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 CMMS (Computerized Maintenance Management System)
 MRP (Material Requirement Planning)
 FCS (Finite Capacity Scheduling)
 WFMS (Workflow Management Systems)
 CRM (Customer Relationship Management)
 SCM (Supply Chain Management)
E-governance, Business Data Communications and Networking
 Case Study of Banking System
 Case Study of University System
6  Other Sector Based Case Studies 10
 Introduction to Computer Networks
 Sharing Resources
 Overview of Networking Models
Introduction to Search Engine Optimization for Business
7 02
Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level evaluation marks for
the course. The Institute-level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total marks for the
course.
 The ability to understand the opportunities to create business value from IT.
 A practical understanding of the way business value is created from IT, and the
potential barriers.
 The ability to expand a series of frameworks to help non-IT managers gain
confidence in managing IT and its business impacts.
Text-Book
1. Misra, Harekrishna, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Management in Business and
Development Organizations (Text and Cases), PHI Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Adikesavan, T. A., (Latest Edition), Information Technology: Best Practices and Applications
in Business, PHI Learning.
2. Nickerson Robert C., (Latest Edition), Business and Information Systems, PHI Learning.

1. International Journal of Information Technology and Management, Inder Science
Publishers

2. Journal of Information Technology Management (JITM)
3. The IUP Journal of Information Technology
4. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application
5. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems
6. International Journal of Mobile Communication & Networking

MB841.3: MANAGEMENT OF SOFTWARE PROJECTS IN IT (MSPIT)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

 To demonstrate an understanding of steps needed to build and maintain effective
development teams.
 To understand the procedures needed to monitor, control and report upon an IT
development project.
 To comprehend the ways in which appropriate quality attributes of the products
of an IT development project can be assessed and assured.
 To explore software project management activities from product concept
through development based upon best practices.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Software Project Management
 Project Definition
 Contract Management
1 04
 Activities Covered by Software Project Management
 Overview of Project Planning
 Stepwise Project Planning
Project Procurement Management
 Planning Purchase and Acquisitions
 Planning Contracting
 Requesting Seller Responses
2 10
 Selecting Sellers
 Administering and Closing the Contract
 Using Software to Assist in Project Management
 Outsourcing
Project Evaluation
 Strategic Assessment
 Technical Assessment
 Cost Benefit Analysis
3 10
 Cash Flow
 Forecasting
 Cost Benefit Evaluation Techniques
 Risk Evaluation
Activity Planning
 Project Schedule
 Sequencing and Scheduling Activities
4 10
 Network Planning Models
 Forward Pass
 Backward Pass

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Activity Float
 Shortening Project Duration
 Activity on Arrow Networks
 Risk Management
 Hazard Identification and Analysis
 Risk Planning and Control
Monitoring and Control
 Creating Framework
 Collecting the Data
 Visualizing Progress
5  Cost Monitoring 08
 Earned Value
 Prioritizing Monitoring
 Getting Project Back to Target
 Change Control
Advanced Methods and Tools of Project Management
 CPM/PERT
 Design Structure Matrix
6  System Dynamics 08
 Critical Chain
 Discrete Event Simulation
 Earned Value Management
Project Risk Management
 Risk Management Planning
 Common Sources of Risk in Information Technology Projects
 Risk Identification
7  Qualitative Risk Analysis 04
 Quantitative Risk Analysis
 Risk Response Planning
 Risk Monitoring and Control
 Using Software to Assist in Project Risk Management
Contemporary Issues
8 06
 Introduction of any One Tool for Software Project Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
 The ability to understand approaches for managing and optimizing the software
development process.
 The ability to understand the unique considerations of the software development
life cycle that impact project management.
 An awareness of the need for project planning and management.
 The ability to apply professional attitudes and techniques to managing a project
Reference Material

Text-Books
1. Hughes, Bob and Cotterell, Mike, (Latest Edition), Software Project Management,
McGraw-Hill.
2. Cadle J. and D. Yeates, (Latest Edition), Project Management for Information Systems,
Pearson Prentice Hall.
Reference-Books
1. Kathy Schwalbe, (Latest Edition), Information Technology Project Management, Thomson

Publication.
2. Jack Marchewka, (Latest Edition), Information Technology Project Management Providing
Measurable Organizational Value, Wiley India.
3. Stellman and Greene, (Latest Edition), Applied Software Project Management, Wiley
India.
4. Richard Thayer and Edward Yourdon, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering Project
Management, Wiley India.
1. International Journal of Project Management, International Project Management

Association, Elsevier.
2. Journal of Software Project Management and Quality, International Science Press.
3. Project Management Journal, Wiley.

MB842.3: SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN (SAD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand role of systems analysis and design within various systems

development lifecycles
 To develop an awareness of the different approaches that might be taken to
systems analysis and design
 To understand the activities of the systems analyst and systems designer, and
apply some current techniques
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Systems Analysis and Design Life Cycle
 Requirements Determination
 Requirements Specifications
 Feasibility Analysis
 Final Specifications
 Hardware and Software Study
1  System Design 04
 System Implementation
 System Evaluation
 System Modification
 Role of Systems Analyst
 Attributes of a Systems Analyst
 Tools used in System Analysis
Information Gathering
 Strategies
 Methods
 Documenting Study
2 10
 System Requirements
 Specification from Narratives of Requirements to
Classification of Requirements as Strategic, Tactical,
Operational and Statutory
Feasibility Analysis
 Deciding Project Goals
 Examining Alternative Solutions
3  Cost – Benefit Analysis 10
 Quantifications of Costs and Benefits
 Payback Period
 System Proposal Preparation for Managements

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
 Tools for Prototype Creation
Tools for Systems Analysts
 Data Flow Diagrams
 Case Study for use Of DFD
 Good Conventions
4 10
 Leveling of DFDS
 Leveling Rules
 Logical and Physical DFDS
 Software Tools to Create DFDS
Structured Systems Analysis and Design
 Procedure Specifications in Structured English
5  Decision Tables for Complex Logical Specifications 08
 Specification Oriented Design Vs. Procedure Oriented
Design
Data Oriented Systems Design
 Entity Relationship Model
 E-R Diagrams
6 08
 Relationships Cardinality and Participation
 Normalizing Relations
 Various Normal Forms and their Need
E-Commerce Transactions and security
 Introduction of Open Source E-Commerce Platforms
 Encryption Methods
7  Symmetric and Asymmetric Encryption 04
 Digital Signature
 Certifying Authorities for Signatures
 Legal Status of E-Commerce Transactions
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
VI. Learning Outcome
 The ability to learn to design methodology for databases and verifying their
structural correctness.
 The skills to implement databases and applications software primarily in the
relational model.
 The ability to learn how to use querying languages, primarily SQL, and other
database supporting software.
 The ability to apply the theory behind various database models and query languages.
 The ability to learn how to implement the security and integrity policies relating to
databases.
 The ability to work in group settings to design and implement database projects.
Text-Books
1. Whitten, Bentaly and Barlow, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design Methods,
Galgotia Publication.

2. Kenneth E Kendall and Julie E Kendall, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design,
PHI Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Hoffer, (Latest Edition), Modern Systems Analysis and Design, Pearson Education.
2. Kendall and Kendall, (Latest Edition), Systems Analysis and Design, Prentice-Hall.
3. Whitten, J. L., (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design Method, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Awad E. M., (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design, Galgotia books.
5. Jalota, Pankaj, (Latest Edition), An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Narosa
Publishing House.
6. Sommerville, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering, Pearson Education.
7. Pfleeger, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering: Theory and Practice, Pearson Education.
8. Pressman R. S., (Latest Edition), Software Engineering: A Practitioner's Approach,
McGraw-Hill.
9. Elias M. Awad, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design, Galgotia Publication.
10. Kenneth E Kendall and Julie E Kendall, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design,
PHI Publications.
11. Grienstein and Feinman, (Latest Edition), E-commerce –Security, Risk Management and
Control, TMH Publications.
12. Ankit Fadia, (Latest Edition), Encryption-Protecting your Data, Vikas Publication.
13. Singh B, (Latest Edition), Network Security, PHI Publication.

4. International Journal of Mobile Communication and Networking
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing

MB843.3: ERP SYSTEMS: TECHNOLOGY PLANNING AND
IMPLEMENTATION (ERP: TPI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To help students to understand the generic approach to enterprise resource

planning systems and their interrelationships, covering all functional areas of
management.
 To build skill and knowledge for better management of an enterprise systems.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to ERP
 Integrated Management Information Seamless
Integration – Supply
 Chain Management
 Integrated Data Model
1  Benefits of ERP 08
 Business Engineering and ERP
 Definition of Business Engineering
 Principle of Business Engineering
 Business Engineering with Information
Technology
Business Modeling for ERP
 Building the Business Model
 Role of Consultant
2 06
 Vendors and Users
 Customization
 Precautions
ERP Implementation
 ERP Implementation an Overview
3  ERP Post Implementation Options 04
 ERP Implementation Technology
 Guidelines for ERP Implementation
ERP and the Competitive Advantage
 ERP domain MPGPRO
 IFS/Avalon
4 10
 Industrial and Financial Systems
 Baan IV SAP
 Market Dynamics and Dynamic Strategy

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Commercial ERP Package Description
 Multi-Client Server Solution
5 10
 Open Technology
 User Interface Application Integration
Architecture
 Basic Architectural Concepts
6  The System Control Interfaces Services 10
 Presentation Interface
 Database Interface Cases
7 Case Studies and Project Presentations 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the concept and process of Enterprise Resource Planning
Systems and Re-engineering and Enterprise Resource Planning Systems.
 The ability to exhibit knowledge of Planning, Design, and Implementation of
Enterprise Resource Planning Systems along with ERP modules.
 The ability to successfully manage an ERP Project and will be effectively dealing with
the issues involved in Supply Chain Management and the e-Marketplace
Text-Books
1. Vinod Kumar Garg and N.K. Venkita Krishnan, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource
Planning, Concepts and Practice, PHI.
2. Sumner, Mary, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. S Sadagopan, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, PHI.

2. Alexis Leon, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, Tata McGrew Hill.
3. Jose Antonio Fernandz, (Latest Edition), The SAP R/3 Handbook, TMH.
4. Lau, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Management, McGraw Hill.
5. Daniel E O‟Leary, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource System: Systems, Lifecycle,
Electronic Commerce, and Risk.
1. Journal of Information Technology, IBIMA Publishing

2. Business Process Management Journal, Emerald Insight

MB844.3: RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
(RDMS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To provide basic understanding of the RDBMS and SQL and the skills to make
use of these in business organizations.
 To equip the students with the relevant quantitative tools and techniques for
application in solving managerial problems
 To study the physical and logical database designs, database modeling,
relational, hierarchical, and network models
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Databases and Transactions
 Database System
 Purpose of Database System
1 13
 View of Data
 Database Architecture
 Transaction Management
Data Models
 The Importance of Data Models
 Basic Building Blocks
2 08
 Business Rules
 The Evolution of Data Models
 Degrees of Data Abstraction
Relational Database Management Systems
 History
 Advantages and Limitations of RDBMA
3 04
 Users of RDBMS
 Software Modules in RDBMS
 Architecture of RDBMS
Modeling Techniques
4  Different Types of Models 10
 Introduction to ERD
Types of Databases
 Hierarchical Database
5 10
 Network Database
 Relational Database
6 Normalization 05

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Advantages and Disadvantages of Normalization
 1NF-2NF-3NF Rules With Examples
 Anomalies
 SQL Commands
 Basic Structure
 Set Operations
 Aggregate Functions
 Null Values
 Nested Sub Queries
 Views
 Complex Queries
 Modification of the Database
 Joined Relations
 Data-Definition Language
 Embedded SQL and Dynamic SQL
 Exercises
Introduction to Object Oriented Database
 Concept
 Object Binding in Oracle
 Class
 Attribute
7 05
 Methods
 Object Type
 Declaring and Initializing
 Methods
 Alter and Drop Type
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

VI. External Evaluation :
 The ability to design and develop a conceptual model of a database from user
requirements, with ER diagramming techniques and translate the ER model to a
Relational model.
 The ability to define and implement relations using tables using Oracle database.
 An understanding to apply the theory of normalization to reduce the
redundancies in the data tables.
 The ability to learn to define business rules and constraints using schema
definitions in RDBMS.
 The ability to apply the knowledge of transactions, concurrency and locking to
analyze transactions for serializability.
 The ability to analyze the given user requirements, design, implement,
demonstrate and present a database-intensive application, to class

Text-Book
1. Silberschatz, Korth, Sudarshan, (Latest Edition), DATABASE System Concepts, BPB

Publication.
Reference-Book
1. Coleman, Pat and Peter Dyson, (Latest Edition), Internets, BPB Publication.
2. Keen, Peter and Mark McDonald, (Latest Edition), The E-Process Edge, Tata
McGraw – Hill.
3. Oberoi, Sundeep O, (Latest Edition), Security and You, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Ricart, Alberto Manuel and Stephen Asbury, (Latest Edition), Active Server Pages,
IDG Books.
5. Rich, Jason R., (Latest Edition), Starting an E-Commerce Business, IDG Books.
6. Samantha Shurety, (Latest Edition), E-business with Net Commerce, Addison Wesley.
7. Schneider Robert D. and J. R. Garbus, (Latest Edition), Optimizing SQL Server 7, N.J.,
Prentice – Hall.
8. Desai, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Database System, Galgotia.
9. Ullman and Widom, (Latest Edition), First course in Database Systems Pearson
Education.
10. C. J. Data, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Database Systems, Narosa Publishers.
11. D. Kroenke, Database Processing, Galgotia.
12. Henry F.korth, Abraham, (Latest Edition), Database System Concepts, McGraw Hill.
1. The IUP Journal of Information Technology.

2. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application.
3. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems.
4. International Journal of Mobile Communication & Networking.
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing.

HEALTH CARE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB850.3: HEALTH ECONOMICS AND SOCIAL POLICY (HESP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an understanding of the relevance of economic concepts to the health care

sector.
 To describe the system of health care financing and delivery arrangements in the health
care sector.
 To impart an understanding the role of economic factors in the development of public
policy concerning health and health care.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
The Relevance of Economics in Health and Medical
Care
1  Using Economics to Study Health Issues 06
 Analysing Medical Care Markets
 Economic Evaluation in Health Care
Demand Side Considerations
 Demand for Health and Medical Care
 The Market for Health Insurance
Supply Side Consideration
2 06
 Managed Care
 The Physician‟s Service Market
 The Hospital Service Market
 The Market for Pharmaceuticals
Health Care Policy and Programmes
 Health Education and Environmental Sanitation
3  Health Development as A Determinant to Socio-Economic 10
Development
 National Health Programmes
Public Policy in Medical Care Delivery
 Policies that Enhances Access
4  Policies to Contain Costs 10
 Lessons for Public Policy
 Medical Care Systems Worldwide
Financing Health Care
 Uncertainty and Health Insurance
 Compulsory Insurance
5 08
 Patient Payment
Economic Evaluation and Priority Setting
 Non-Monetary Effects and Monetary Benefits

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
 Costs and Discounting
Social Welfare
 Social Policy
6 07
 Healthcare and Social Development
 Public and Social Policy
Health Policy Formulation
 Factors
 Determinants
7 07
 Other Sectoral Issues
 National Health Policy
 Review of Different Committees
Contemporary Issues
 International Perspective
8 04
 Alternative Approaches to Meet Basic Health Needs in
Developing Countries
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the relevance and principles of economics for effective health

care delivery.
 A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes / developments on
a regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments with respect to health care industry.
Text-Books
1. James W Henderson, (Latest Edition), Health Economics and Policy, South Western
Educational Publishing.
2. Chatterice, Meera, (Latest Edition), Implementing Health Policy, Manohar.
Reference-Books
1. Jan Abel Oslen, (Latest Edition), Principles in Health Economics and Policy, Oxford
University Press.
2. S.L.Goel, (Latest Edition), Health Care Policies and Programmes, Deep and Deep
Publications Pvt Ltd.

3. Latest reports of Ministry of Health and Welfare, Government of India

1. Journal of Health Economics
2. Health Economics Review
3. International Journal of Health Planning and Management

MB851.3: HOSPITAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT (HPM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an understanding of the general health care planning and administration

sector.
 To describe the system of health care administration and delivery arrangements in the
hospitals.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Hospital Planning
 Concept of Planning
 Guiding Principles in Planning Hospital Facilities and
Services
1  Regional Planning and Factors to be Emphasised 06
 Steps in Hospital Planning
 Planning Team and Stages of Project Estimation
 Architect Brief and Master Plan
 Selection of Site and Decision on Land, Space, and Utilities
Outpatient Services
 Objectives, Functions, Location
 Design and Layout
 Policy and Procedures
 Organisation, Staffing, Equipment and Facilities
 Key Result Areas and Performance or Quality Indicators
 Daily Planning and Scheduling of Work
 Managing Time
 Waiting Time and Total Time Spent by a Patient
 Specialty, Sub-specialty and Super Specialty Clinics
2  Diagnosis, Physiotherapy and Occupational Therapy 08
 Emerging Concepts
o Day Care
o Reservation
o Appointment by Phone
o Medico-Social Works
o Patient Counselling
 Other Facilities
o Pharmacy
o Gifts Shop
o Prayer or Meditation Room

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Trauma Care: Emergency and Casualty Services
 Objective, Function, Location
3 10
 Key Result Areas and Performance or Quality Indicator
Disaster Management
 Principles and Classification
 Life Saving Drugs
4  Ambulance and Paramedic Services 10
 Medico Legal Procedures
 Forms and Registers to be Maintained
 Communication System
Inpatient Service
 Objective, Function, Location
5 08
 Admission, Transfer, Billing and Discharge Procedures
 Managing Death
Intensive Care Units
 Objectives
 Functions, Location, Design and Layout-Policy and
6 Procedures 08
 Types of ICUs
Operation Theatre
 Objectives, Functions, Location
 Daily Planning and Scheduling
7 04
 Determinants of number of Operating Rooms
 Zoning and Aseptic or Sterile Techniques
 Clinical Protocols
 Sub-Stores
 CSSD
 Immediate Postoperative Recovery Rooms
 Safety Issues
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 An appreciation of the relevance and principles of healthcare planning and

administration.
Text-Book
1. G.D. Kunders, (Latest Edition), Designing for Total Quality in Health Care, Prism Books
Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore.
Reference-Books
1. B.M. Sakharkar, (Latest Edition), Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning,

Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
2. C.M. Francis and et al., (Latest Edition), Hospital Administration, Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

2. Health Policy and Planning Journal

MB852.3: ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT AND
SAFETY PLANNING (EHMSP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand and identify significant gaps in the current knowledge base concerning
the health effects of environmental agents and identify areas of uncertainty in the risk-
assessment process.
 To examine health issues, scientific understanding of causes, and possible future

approaches to control of the major environmental health problems in industrialized and
developing countries.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Human Impact on the Environment
 Environment-Human Interaction
1 06
 Environmental Impact on Humans
 Safety, Health and Environment
Exposure, Dose, Response
2  Environmental Toxicology 08
 Environmental Carcinogenesis
Environmental Health Economics and Policy
3  Risk Assessment and Management 10
 Indoor and Outdoor Air Pollution
Monitoring for Safety, Health and Environment
 Occupational Safety
 Principles and Practices
4  Occupational Health 10
 Bureau of Indian Standards on Safety and Health : 14489 –
1998 and 15001-2000
 ILO and EPA Standards
Hazardous Waste Management
 Solid Waste Handling and Disposal
 Liquid Waste Handling
5  Collection and Disposal 08
 Water Treatment and Distribution
 Planning and Organising for Safety and Waste Management
 Legal and Social Aspects of Waste Management
Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) Education and
6 Training 08
 SHE : Element of Training Cycle

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Assessment of Needs
 Techniques of Training, Design and Development of
Training Programs
 Competence Building Technique (CBT)
 Relevance of WTO regarding Safety, Health and
Environment
Accident and Incident Investigation: Reporting and
Analysis
 Philosophy, Purpose, Process and Types of Investigation
 Identifying the Key Factors and the Immediate and Basic
Causes
 Corrective Action
7  Agencies Investigating Accident 04
Accident Reporting
 Report Forms, Writing Reports, Essential Elements
 Accident and Incident Analysis
 Standard Classification of Factors Associated with
Accident
 Methods of Collating and Tabulating Data, Record Keeping
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An integrated understanding of strategic operations and its applicability to health

care and environmental policies.
 A keen interest in observing health issues, scientific understanding of causes, and
possible future approaches to control of the major environmental health problems.
Text-Book
1. Yassi, A., Kjellstrom, T., de Kok, T., Guidotti, T. L. (Latest Edition), Basic
Environmental Health, New York: Oxford University Press.
Reference-Books
1. Blumenthal, D. S., and Ruttenber, A. J., (Latest Edition), Introduction to Environmental

Health, New York: Springer.
2. Nadakavukaren, A., (Latest Edition), Our Global Environment: A Health Perspective,
Prospect Heights: Waveland Press, Inc.

2. Healthcare Management Science

MB853.3: HEALTH CARE MARKETING (HM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To provide foundational knowledge of the principles of marketing and their particular

application in health.
 To develop an understanding of the marketing activities in a healthcare sector.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Elements of Successful Marketing
 Strategic Marketing Process
1 06
 Organising for Marketing
 Requirements for Organisational Marketing Success
The Environment of Marketing Strategy
 Economic Factor
 Technological Factors
2 08
 Social Factors
 Competitive Factors
 Regulatory Factors
Understanding the Consumer
 Buying Behaviour
3  Marketing Research 10
 Marketing Segmentation
 Developing Customer Loyalty
Marketing Mix
 Product Strategy
4 10
 Price
 Distribution
Promotion
 The communication Model
 Promotional Mix
5 08
Advertising
 Developing Advertising Campaign
 Working with Advertising Agencies
Sales and Sales Management
 New Business Selling
 Missionary Selling
6 08
 Personal Sales Process
 Sales Approaches
 Managing the Sales Functions

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Controlling and Monitoring
 Sales Force Control
 Advertisement Control
7 04
 Consumer Satisfaction Control
 Components of a Measuring System
 Marketing Audit
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the relevance and principles of marketing concepts to healthcare

system.
Text-Book
1. Eric N. Berkowitz, (Latest Edition), Essentials of Healthcare Marketing, Jones & Bartlett
Learning.
Reference-Books
1. John L. Fortenberry, Jr., (Latest Edition), Health Care Marketing: Tools and Techniques,
Jones and Bartlett Learning.
2. John L. Fortenberry, Jr., (Latest Edition), Cases in Health Care Marketing: Tools and
Techniques, Jones and Bartlett Learning.

1. International Journal of Health Planning and Management.
2. International Journal of Pharmaceutical and Healthcare Marketing.

MB854.3: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT OF HEALTH INSTITUTIONS
(FMHI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To provide students with the ability to application of quantitative financial

analysis to investment, financing, and operating decisions in the health care
sector.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Evolution of Healthcare Financial Management
 Healthcare Financial Management
1  Profitability and Productivity Study 06
 Comparison of Management Accounting and General
Accounting
Fundamentals of Sound Healthcare Financial
Management
2 08
 Organisation Development of Hospitals
 Organisation Structure Add it to Chart of Accounts
Cost Characteristics of Health Institutions
 Major Cost Classification
 Primary Cost Classification
 Secondary Cost Classification
3 10
 Break Even Analysis
 Contribution and Contribution Margin
 Margin of Safety
 Zero Based Budgeting
Production Units and Performance Evaluation
 Macro Production Units
 Micro Production Units
4  Cost Allocation 10
Volume Forecasting
 Least Square
 Multiple Regression Analysis
Budgetary Control Process
 Functional Budgeting
5 08
 Budget Control Programme
 Preliminary Budget and Cost Finding Connection
Capital Expenditure Planning
6  Fixed Asset 08
 Working Capital Management

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Evaluation of Capital Expenditure
Cash Forecasting and Management
 Cash Management Process
7  Revenue Budgeting 04
 Wage and Salary Budgeting
 Non-Wage and Salary Budgeting
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the relevance and principles of financial management concepts to

healthcare system.
Text-Book
1. Allen G. Herkimer, (Latest Edition), Understanding Hospital financial Management, An

Aspen Publication.
Reference-Books
1. David Edward Marcinko, Hope Rachel Hertico, (Latest Edition), Financial

Management Strategies for Hospitals and Healthcare Organizations: Tools, Techniques, Checklists
and Case Studies, CRC Press.
2. Michael Nowicki, (Latest Edition), The Financial Management of Hospitals and Healthcare
Organizations.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Financial Management

PROJECT AND
INFRASTRUCTURE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB860.3: PROJECT FORMULATION AND EXECUTION (PF&E)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course Objectives:
 To expose the students to the basics of project preparation;

 To acquaint the students with different tools & techniques available to formulate,
initiate, monitor and control the project; the same should be effectively used in execution
of the project.
III. Course Outline:

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Project Management
 Definition of the Project and Programme
1  Characteristic of the Projects and Programme 03
 Classification of the Projects and Programme
 Project Life Cycle
Project Conceptualization
 Project Ideas and Sources
2 09
 Techniques for Project Idea Generation
 Firs-Cut or Broad-Brush Screening of Ideas
Project Formulation
3  Project Goals and Objectives 09
 Various Dimension of the Project
Project Initiation
 Project Management Maturity
 Project Selection Criteria and Methods
4  Types of Project Selection Models 09
 Risk Consideration in Project Selection
 The Project Portfolio Process
 Projects Bids and RFPS (Request For Proposals)
Project Monitoring
 The Planning Monitoring and Control Cycle
5  Information Needs and Reporting 09
 Earned Value Analysis
 Computerized PMIS
Project Control
 The Fundamental Purpose of Control
6 09
 Typed of Control
 Design of the Control System

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 Control of Change and Scope Creep
 Control: Primary Function of the Management
Project Auditing
 Purpose of Evaluation
 The Project Audit
7 09
 The Project Audit Life Cycle
 Essentials of Audit or Evaluation
 Measurement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the importance of Project monitoring are evaluation students
are expected to monitor & evaluate the project through various tools and methods.
 The ability to learn the project control techniques and effectively implement the same
 The ability to understand the importance of the project audit, preparing project audit
reports and presents the same.
Text-Books
1. Jack Meredith and Samuel Mantel, (Latest Edition), Project Management, Wiley India
Edition.
2. Project Management Institute, (Latest Edition), Project Management Body of Knowledge
(PMBOK Guide), Project Management Institute.
Reference-Books
1. Rory Burke, (Latest Edition), Project Management, Wiley India Edition.

2. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Project Facts, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
3. Rajendra Mishra, (Latest Edition), Project Facts, Excel Books Publishers.
Journal / Magazine / News Paper
1. The International Journal for Project Management

MB861.3: SOCIAL PROJECTS AND INFRASTRUCTURE (SPI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand government policies and problems of Social Infrastructure in

India.
 To help students to get acquainted with the knowledge of labour forces and the
legislative framework related to them.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Understanding Social Infrastructure
 Nature and Scope of Social Infrastructure
Poverty and Poverty Alleviation Programme
1  Poverty Line 06
 Incidence of Poverty
 Causes of Poverty
 Major Poverty Alleviation Programme
Labour Force and Employment Policy
 Work Force Participation Rates
 Occupational Structure
2  Nature and Extent of Unemployment in India 10
 Causes of Unemployment
 Government Policies to Tackle Unemployment
 Employment Policy in Eleventh and Twelfth Five Year Plan
Labour Welfare: Legal Framework and Initiatives
 Need for Social Security
3 10
 Legislations Pertaining to Labour
 Labour Related Organisations or Activities or Schemes
Human Development Index
 Human Development Indicators
4 10
 Social Security: Conceptual Framework
 Social Security in India‟s Constitution and Present Status
Education and Training
 Education as Critical Input
5 09
 An Inclusive Development Model for Health, Education, and
Housing Sectors
Public Private Partnership and Social Infrastructure
 Foundation of E-Government
6 06
 A PPP Model for Medical Education and Tertiary Healthcare
 PPP Model for Village Primary Health Care Centres

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 PPP Model in Vocational training
Models for Solid Waste Management in India
 Models in Vogue under PPP
7  SWM through External Funding Support 05
 Capital Investment by Service Provider and Cost Sharing by
Community for SWM
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total
of total
No. Marks
internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The basic understanding of Social Infrastructure projects, and government policy

and regulations about Social Infrastructure projects.
Text-Book
1. Jetli K. Narindar and Sethi Vishal, (Latest Edition), Infrastructure Development in India-
Post-Liberlisation Initiatives and Challenges, New Century Publications.
Reference-Book
1. Brett m. Frischmann, (Latest Edition), Infrastructure: the social value of shared resources,
Oxford University Press.
1. Journal of Infrastructure Development

2. Journal of Economic Policy Reform
3. Journal of Social and Economic Development

MB862.3: INFRASTRUCTURAL PROJECTS (IP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To provide an overview of the importance of infrastructure management as

necessitated by the economic development – Indian and International context.
 To discuss policy perspectives relating to infrastructure development
 To familiarize with the issues relating to development of physical infrastructure
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
An overview of Basic Concepts Related to Infrastructure
1 03
 Introduction to Infrastructure
Economic Reforms and Infrastructure Development
2 09
 Infrastructure Development in India's Reforms
Sectoral Infrastructure Development i.e. Transport, Power,
Water Supply and Sanitation1
 An Overview of the Power Sector in India
 An Overview of the Water Supply and Sanitation Sector in India
 An Overview of the Road, Rail, Air and Port Transportation Sectors
3 09
in India
 An Overview of the Telecommunications Sector in India
 An Introduction to Special Economic Zones.
 Sectoral issues in Ports
 Sectoral Issues in Rural and Urban Infrastructure2
Formulation of Infrastructure Projects
4  An Integrated Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning 09
 Infrastructure Management Systems and Future Directions
Financing Issues in Infrastructure, Projects Management and
Development
5 09
 Mapping and Facing the Landscape of Risks in Infrastructure
Projects
6 Private Involvement in Infrastructure 09
1
Above mentioned sectors can be discussed in line with the aspects/ issues such as: Environmental
Aspect, Political Aspect, Social or Cultural Aspect, Technological Aspect, Administrative or Bureaucratic Issues,
Financial Issues, Legal or Regulatory Aspects, Global or Cross Country Aspect, Issues Relating to Basic or
Supportive Inputs, Economic Aspect, Ecological Issues, Management or HR Issues, Supply Chain Management,
Public-Private Partnership, Other Relevant Aspects or Issues
2
Faculty will draw the study material from various sources on the given topics. Various government
reports, developmental studies and sectoral reports can be a part of the study material.

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 A Historical Overview of Infrastructure Privatization
 The Benefits of Infrastructure Privatization
 Problems with Infrastructure Privatization
Infrastructure Related Issues
 Tendering Systems and Procedures
 Infrastructural Contracts
 Land Acquisition
7 09
 Issues of Foreign Direct Investment and Infrastructure
 Infrastructure Regulators and Compliances
 Environmental Regulations and Impact Assessment, Infrastructure
and Competition Issues
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

VII.Learning Outcomes
 An understanding of the basic concepts related to Infrastructure and Financial

Management of Projects.
Text-Book
There is no single text/ reference book suggested by the faculty. However, faculty will
draw the study material from various sources on the given topics. Various government
Field visits and export talk by guest faculty will provide necessary inputs to the students
giving them the opportunity to explore the topics further in depth.
1. Journal of Infrastructure Development

2. Journal of Economic Policy Reform
3. Journal of Social and Economic Development

MB863.3: INTRODUCTION TO INFRASTRUCTURE POLICY FOR
DEVELOPMENT (IIPD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course Objectives:
 To understand the various policies designed related to infrastructure and

development and measure the impact of the policy design.
 To understand the economic aspects of infrastructure using the tools of economic
analysis in deciding the optimal level of infrastructure provision.
III. Course Outline

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Introduction: Infrastructure Policy and Development
 Economic Importance of Infrastructures
1  Economic Impact of Public Infrastructures 06
 Demand and Supply Effects
 Spill Over Effects
Infrastructures and Economic Growth
2  Models used to Investigate the Relationship between 10
Infrastructure and Productivity
 Data Problems and Key Findings
Decision-Making on Infrastructure Provision
3  Cost Benefit Analysis 10
 Beyond Financial Appraisal
Models of Public-Private Infrastructure Management
 The Problem of Monopoly in Infrastructure Provision and
4 the Range of Possible Solutions 10
 Public Provision of Infrastructures and Reasons for
Privatization
Infrastructure Regulation And Competition
5  Infrastructure Regulation: Rate of Return and Price Cap 10
Vertical Unbundling and the Introduction of Competition
Policy Framework
6  National Level Infrastructure Policy 10
 State Level Infrastructure Policy
 Addressing Policy Issues
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
 An understanding of economic aspects of infrastructure

 An understanding of various government infrastructural policies
Text-Book
Journal / Magazine / Newspapers

MB864.3: LEARNING PROJECT MANAGEMENT THROUGH
SOFTWARE (LPMS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course objectives:
 To learn Windows-based project management software package

 To learn preparing project plan and tracking it to its completion.
 To learn Microsoft project calendar controls, allocation of resources, production of
PERT, GANTT charts. Resource charts, calendar charts and other reports
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to MS Project
 Overview of User Interface
 Creating New Project
 Working with Tasks
1 o Creating Manual Scheduled Task 05
o Creating Automatic Scheduled Task
o Linking Tasks
o Creating a Summary Task
o Updating Task Process
Project Planning
 Setting Up a Project File
 Identifying the Work to Be Done
 Building a Schedule
2 05
 Building a Team for Project
 Assigning Resources to Tasks
 Setting Up a Project Budget
 Reviewing and Fine-Tuning Your Plan
Tracking Status
 Methods for Tracking Status.
 Preparing to Update Your Project
 Obtaining Status Data
 Updating Schedule Status in Project
3  Updating Project Costs
05
Evaluating and Correcting Project Performance
 Scheduled, Baseline, and Actual Values.
 Is the Project on Time?
 Is the Project Within Budget?
 Earned Value Analysis
 Getting Back on Track

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Managing Changes in Project
Reporting on Projects
 An Overview of Project‟s Reports
 Working with Graphical Reports
 Working with Visual Reports
 Printing Views to Report Project Information
Closing a Project
 Obtaining Project Acceptance
 Tying Up Loose Ends
 Producing Project Closeout Reports
 What to Do with Project Information
Project Power Tools
Working on More Than One Project
 Managing Multiple Projects
 Sharing Resources Among Projects
 Exchanging Data Between Programs
 Copying Information
 Importing and Exporting Data
4 05
 Integrating Project and Outlook
Linking and Embedding
 Understanding Linking and Embedding
 Linking and Embedding Project Data
 Linking and Embedding Data into Project
 Working with Linked and Embedded Objects
 Hyperlinking to Information
Customizing Project
 Filtering Through Information
 Grouping Project Elements
 Defining Own Fields
Customizing the Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar
 Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
 Customizing the Ribbon
 Sharing a Custom Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar
Reusing Project Information
5 10
 Understanding the Types of Templates
 Storing Project Settings and Elements
 Sharing Custom Elements
 Building Templates for Projects
Saving Time with Macros
 Recording Macros
 Running Macros
 Viewing and Editing Macro Code
 Learning More About Programming Project
6  SAP Based Project Management Module
08
 Open ERP- Project Management Module

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
7 Introduction to Open Softwares
 Tuleap Open ALM
 OrangeScrum
 MyCollab-Project
 ProjectLibre 11
 LibrePlan
 OpenProject
 ]project-open[
 Redmine
8 Open Source Project Management Software for Small
Business
 Bitrix24
 Trello
 Plan Project Management Software
11
 Asana
 MeisterTask
 GanttProject
 Producteev
 Freedcamp
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level evaluation marks
for the course. The Institute-level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total marks
for the course.
The University examination will be for 70 marks and will be based on practical
computer-based tests and a viva-voce.
 Proficiency in software based projects.
Text-Book
draw the study material from various sources on the given topics. Various hand-outs can
be a part of the study material. Field visits and export talk by guest faculty will provide
necessary inputs to the students giving them the opportunity to explore the topics
further in depth.
Journals / Magazines/ Newspapers

FAMILY BUSINESS &
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB870.3: LEADERSHIP SKILLS (LS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To define what leadership is and how it is applied at all levels of organizational

management.
 To understand the basics of leadership and management.
 To determine what is necessary to lead teams and organizations, and how to
integrate this with business management.
 To become adept at assessing leadership traits and qualities in ourselves and
others
 To learn how to develop leadership in ourselves and others.
 To appreciate the importance of organization culture and the leader‟s role in
establishing it.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 What are Leadership Skills?
 A Born Leader
1  Traits of Successful Leader 08
 Why Leadership?
o Managerial Roles
 Importance of Leadership
Leading Vs Managing
 Roles and Relationships
2 08
 Developing Personality for Effective Leading Roles
 Authority Vs. Responsibility
Leading the Team
3  Delegation and Acceptance 08
 Mentoring
Leadership–Styles, Models and Philosophy
4  Leadership Styles
08
 Leadership Models
 Leadership Philosophy
The Essence of Supportive Leadership
5  The 21st Century Demand
08
 Leadership Competency Model
 Integrating, Cultivating and Rewarding Employees
The Essence of Empowering Leadership
6 08
 Understanding the Needs, Motivation and Behaviour of

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Your Employees
 Developing, Strengthening and Practicing the Empowerment
Skills.
Multiple Intelligence of Leadership
 Cognitive Intelligence
 Emotional Intelligence
 Social Intelligence
7 08
 Cultural Intelligence
 Moral Intelligence
 Spiritual Intelligence
 Practical Interplay and Expression of Multiple Intelligence
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Sl. Component Number per
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An understanding of leadership and its nuances

 The ability to asses self and others for leadership traits
 The ability to grow to a 360o leader.
 An understanding of what leaders do to be successful.
Text-Books
1. MTD Training, (Latest Edition), Leadership, Bookboon.

2. Douglas L. Jones, Empowering Leadership, (Latest Edition), Bookboon.
3. Walter Baets, Erna Oldenboom, (Latest Edition), Value Based Leadership in Business
Innovation, Bookboon.
Reference-Book
1. Roger Gill, (Latest Edition), Theory and Practice of Leadership, Sage Publications India Pvt.
Ltd.

1. HBR Issues on Building Leadership Skills

MB.871.3: BUSINESS REGULATIONS AND START-UP FINANCING
(BRSF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand the business regulations in India.

 To provide an understanding of the main areas needed to know about in order to
run a successful business.
 To provide students information that will help them develop the knowledge,
understanding and skills associated with starting a small business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Industrial Acts and Legislations
 Companies Act
 Industrial Disputes Act
1 08
 Industries Development and Regulation Act
 Trade Unions Act
 Contract Law
Laws relating to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)
2  IPR and WTO 08
 India and IPR
Key Regulations
 Environment
 Exports and Imports
3 08
 Occupational Health and Safety
 Man Power
 Competition Protection
Finance and Economics Concepts
4
 Financial Planning and Management 08
 Financial Statements and Analysis
Creating a Budget, Breakeven, What You Need to
5 Show an Investor?
08
 Estimating Funding Needs
 Creating A Basic Financial Model and Budget
Angle and Venture Funding
6  Definition 08
 Methods
Alternative Sources of Funding
7  Crowd sourcing 08
 Foundations

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Corp Venture
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The understanding of the economic importance of entrepreneurs, enterprise and

small business start-ups.
 The ability to understand the importance of a well-researched and well-constructed
business plan.
 The ability to construct a business plan to attract potential lenders and
investors.
Text-Books
1. Philip J. Adelman, Alan M. Marks, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurial Finance, Pearson

Education.
2. William J. Stolze, (Latest Edition), Start Up Financing: An Entrepreneur's Guide to
Financing a New or Growing Business, Career Pr Inc.
3. Sara Williams, (Latest Edition), The Financial Times Guide to Business Start Up: The most
Comprehensive Annually Updated Guide for Entrepreneurs, Pearson Education.
4. Burns, P. (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship and Small Business, Palgrave Macmillan
Publishers Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. Naeem Zafar, (Latest Edition), Finance Essentials for Entrepreneurs A Simple Guide to
Understanding and Creating Financial Statements for Your Business

1. SME World
Websites
 http://business.gov.in/starting_business/pricing.php

MB.872.3: CREATIVITY, INCUBATION AND INNOVATION (CII)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

 To understand the purpose, processes and tools of creativity and innovation.
 To discern appropriate strategies for implementing ideas.
 To appreciate the challenges that members of society and specifically
entrepreneurs in today‟s ever changing, diverse, and global environment.
II. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
What are Creativity, Incubation and Innovation
 Creativity
1  How Business Incubators Work 08
 Innovation
 Innovation = Creativity + Commercialization
The Business Incubator Players
 The Property Developers
 Government and Local Government
 The Academics
 The Corporate Venturers
2  The Entrepreneurs 08
 The Venture Capitalists
 The Business Angels
 The Consultants
 Variations on a Theme
 Incubator Associations
Creativity Tools and Techniques
 Lateral Thinking
 Enablers and Barriers to Creativity
3 08
 Creative Personality
 Brainstorming
 Entrepreneurial Creativity
Creativity and Creative Groups
 Three Components of Individual Creativity
4
 Characteristics of Creative Groups 08
 Time Pressure and Creativity
 Steps for Increasing Your Own Creativity
Types of Innovation
5
 Incremental and Radical Innovation 08
 Factors that Favor Incremental Innovation

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Innovations in Processes
 Service Innovations
Idea Generation
 New Knowledge
 Tapping the Ideas of Customers
6 08
 Learning from Lead Users
 The Role of Mental Preparation
 How Management can Encourage Idea Generation
Moving Innovation to Market
 The Idea Funnel
7 08
 Stage-Gate Systems
 Extending Innovation through Platforms
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the concepts of building blocks of innovation.

 The ability to understand processes and methods of creative problem solving:
observation, definition, representation, ideation, evaluation and decision making.
 Their creative and innovative thinking skills.
 The ability to learn to practice and value teaming, communication, and diversity.
 The ability to understand risk taking, paradigm shift, and paradigm paralysis.
Text-Books
1. William and Sons, (Latest Edition), Managing Creativity and Innovation: Practical
Strategies to Encourage Creativity, Harvard Business School Press.
2. Bettina von Stamm, (Latest Edition), Managing Innovation, Design and Creativity, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Edited by Meredith Erlewine and Ellen Gerl, (Latest Edition), A Comprehensive Guide
to Business Incubation National Business Incubation Association NBIA Publications.
4. Colin Barrow, (Latest Edition), Incubators: A Realist's Guide to the World's New Business
Accelerators, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Reference-Books
1. Shlomo Miatal and D.V.R. Seshadri, (Latest Edition), Innovation Management-

Strategies, Concepts and Tools for Growth and Profit, Sage Publications.

1. International Journal of Innovation, Creativity and Change

MB.873.3: MANAGEMENT OF TECHNOLOGY AND INNOVATION
(MTI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand the dynamics of technological innovation

 To be familiar with how to formulate technology strategies
 To know how to implement technology strategies.
 To understand how to manage ideas in a technological based organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 Technology for Survival and Growth
1 08
 Innovate or Abdicate
 Change or Perish
Science and Technology
 Scientific Discovery
 Technology
 Differences between Science and Technology
2 08
 Types of Technologies
 Technology Portfolio
 Technology Life Cycle
 Globalization of Technology
Management of Technology
 Strategic Management of Technology
3  Strategic Technology Management System 08
 Technology Forecasting
 Technology Generation
Asset Protection and Timing of Innovation and
Technology
4  Methods to Protect Technological Knowledge 08
 Patents, Secrets, Etc.
 Models and Strategies of Market Timing for Innovations
Technology Maturity, Obsolesce and Discontinuities
5  Technology Maturity
08
 Technology Obsolescence
 Technological Discontinuities
International Technology Transfer and Know-How
6 08
 Internationalization and Management of Innovation
7 Introduction to New Product Development (Internal 08

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Technology Transfer) and Open Innovation New
Product Development (NDP)
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to understand the management of technology and innovation and work
for instance in the area of business development, strategic projects or innovation
management in his/her organization.
Text-Books
1. Vijay Kumar Khurana, (Latest Edition), Management of Technology and Innovation, Ane
Books Pvt. Ltd.
2. Schilling, M, (Latest Edition), Strategic management of technological innovation. McGraw-
Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Robert Burgelman, (Latest Edition),Strategic Management of Technology and Innovation,

McGraw-Hill/Irwin
2. Khalil, Tarek, (Latest Edition), Management of Technology: The Key to Competitiveness and
Wealth Creation, Boston, MA: McGraw Hill Irwin.
1. Journal of Business Venturing

2. Technological Forecasting and Social Change

MB874.3: SOCIAL ENTREPRENEUSHIP AND MANAGEMENT (SEM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand the field of social entrepreneurship and many of the opportunities,

challenges, and issues faced by social entrepreneurs
 To understand and appreciate the role of (and need for) social entrepreneurship in
building a sustainable society.
 To acquire the knowledge, skills, tools and techniques needed to become an
entrepreneur in the social sector.
 To understand how to develop sustainable “business” model for building a social
enterprise that can make a difference
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Defining Social Entrepreneurship
 What is Social Entrepreneurship
1  Who are the Pioneers 08
 What does A Social Entrepreneur Do?
 Social and Business Entrepreneurship
Understanding the SE Terrain
2 08
 Sector Studies
Social Entrepreneurs’ DNA
3  Social Enterprise Cases 08
 Global v/s Local
Managing a Social Venture
 The Challenge of Managing Business Professional‟s V/S
Social Activists.
4
 Managing Operations 08
 Accounting in A Non Profit Context
 Marketing Social Entrepreneurship
 Hybrids, Partnerships and Alliances
5 Measuring Social Impact
08
 Delivering The Promises
Understanding Risk: The Social Entrepreneur, and
6 08
Risk Management
Envisioning an Innovative Society
7  How is Social Entrepreneurship Changing Minds? 08
 Governments Role
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The knowledge of the famous cases and stories of social entrepreneurs.

 The ability to analyze the goods and bad‟s of SEs, and potentially able to provide
consultancy.
 The students will also learn to participate in social entrepreneurship, e.g.
volunteering, entering competition, internship etc.
Text-Books
1. David Bornstein, (Latest Edition), How to Change the World. New York: Oxford
University Press.
2. David Bornstein, (Latest Edition), Social Entrepreneurship: What Everyone Needs to Know.
Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.
3. Justine C. Law and James J. Baderman, (Latest Edition), Everyday Legends: The Ordinary
People Changing Our World, the Stories of 20 Great UK Social Entrepreneurs. WW
Publishing.
4. Willie Cheng, (Latest Edition), The world that changes the world: how philanthropy,
innovation, and entrepreneurship are transforming the social ecosystem. John Wiley & Sons.
Reference-Books
1. Rob John, Skoll Centre Working Paper: Beyond the Cheque: How Venture Philanthropists
Add Value. UK: Said Business School, University of Oxford.
2. J. Gregory Dees, Jed Emerson, Peter Economy, (Latest Edition), Enterprising
Nonprofits. A Toolkit for Social Entrepreneurs, John Wiley and Sons.
3. Alex Nicholls, (Latest Edition), Social Entrepreneurship: New Models of Sustainable Social
Change, Oxford University Press.
1. Journal of Social Entrepreneurship

2. International Journal of Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation
3. Social Enterprise Journal

TOURISM
AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB880.3: PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS OF TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT (PCTHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an understanding of basic concepts of tourism and hospitality

management.
 To make the students aware of the significant contribution of tourism and
hospitality industry.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Conceptual Framework of Tourism and Hospitality
Industry
 Tourism and Hospitality
o Concept, Meaning, Nature and Scope
 Definition and Differentiation
o Tourist
1 o Travellers 05
o Visitor
o Transit Visitor
o Excursionist
 Leisure, Recreation and Tourism and their
Interrelationship
 Greening of the Hospitality Industry
The Tourism System
 Tourism Resource
 Attraction
 Product
 Market
 Industry
 Destination in the Context of Tourism
 Components of Tourism
2 10
 Intermediaries and Suppliers
 Types and Typologies of Tourism
 Medical, Adventure and Educational Tourism
 Approaches to Study Tourism
 Elements of Tourism
 Attraction
 Accessibility
 Accommodation

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
 Concept and Types of Tourism Products
 Characteristics of Tourism Products
Historical Dimensions of Tourism
 Travel and Tourism through the Ages
o Early Travels
o „Renaissance‟ and
3 o „Age of Grand Tours‟ 08
o Emergence of Modern Tourism
o Concept of „Paid holiday‟
 Understanding Tourism Motivations
 Concept of Heritage Management
Commercialization of Tourism and Hospitality
Business
 Factors Affecting Growth and Development of
International and National Tourism
4 08
 Concept of Push and Pull Factors in Tourism
 Impacts of Industrialization and Technological
Advancements on Tourism and Hospitality Industry
 Destination Creation
Infrastructure in Tourism and Hospitality Business
 Tourism Infrastructure
o Types, Forms and Significance
5 08
 Transport Sectors
o Modes and Relative Significance
 Other Support Infrastructures required for Tourism
Tourism Demand and Supply
 Concept of Demand and Supply in Tourism
6 08
 Unique Features of Tourist Demand
 Constraints in Creating Ideal Destination
Significance of Tourism and Hospitality Industry
 Economic Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality Business
o Income and Employment
o Multipliers of Tourism
o Balance of Payments
o Foreign Exchange Etc.
7  Socio-Cultural Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality 08
Business
o Cultural Exchange Among Nations and
International Understanding
 Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality Business on Ecology
and Environment.
 Emerging Forms of Tourism
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 Clear exposure and understanding of the basic concepts of tourism and hospitality
management.
 Insights into the historical dimensions, role of infrastructure and significance of
tourism and hospitality industry.
Text-Books
1. Cooper, C. Fletcher, J. Gilbert, D. and Wanhill, S., (Latest Edition), Tourism: Principles
and Practice, Addison Wesley Longman Publishing, New York.
2. Mishra, S. N. Sadual S. K., (Latest Edition), Basics of Tourism Management, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. Prasad, V. and Sundari V. B. T., (Latest Edition), Travel and Tourism Management, Excel
Books.
2. Raj. K., (Latest Edition), Modern Dictionary of Tourism, Ivy Publishing House.
3. Seth, P. N. Bhat, S., (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Travel and Tourism, Starling
Publishers.
4. Krishnan, K. K., (Latest Edition), Managing Tourist Destination: Development, Planning,
Marketing, Policies, Kanishka Publishers Distributors.
5. Bhatia, A. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism Development: Principles and Practices, Starling
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
1. The Management of Hospital and Tourism Enterprise.

2. Asia on Tour: Exploring the Rise of Asian Tourism, Tim Winter

MB881.3: TOURISM POLICY, DESTINATION PLANNING AND
DEVELOPMENT (TPDPD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To develop an understanding of basic concepts of Tourism Policy, Planning and

Development.
 To make the students aware about the different types of tourism planning.
 To increase understanding of the steps taken by Indian Government for Tourism
development in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Tourism Policy
 Concept of Policy
1  Role of Government, Public and Private Sectors in 05
Formulating Tourism Policy
 National Tourism Policy 1982 and 2002
Tourism Planning
 Planning
o Concept
o Definition
o Nature
o Process
 Tourism Planning
o Concept
2 10
o Need
o Objective
o Goals
 Levels and Types of Planning
 Tourism Planning Principles
 Importance of Planning in Tourism
 Steps in Tourism Planning
 Planning, Staffing and Evaluation
Approaches of Planning in Tourism
 Planning Approaches for Different Form of Tourism
3  Eco Tourism 08
 Urban Tourism
 Rural Tourism
Destination Planning
4 08
 Ways and Benefits of Destination Planning

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Planning for the Development of a Tourist Destination
 Impacts of Unplanned Tourism Development on a Tourist
Destination
Process of Destination Planning
 Significance of Defining Objectives, Background Analysis and
5 08
Detailed Research in the Destination Planning Process
 Destination Planning Process
Development of Tourism in India
 Plans and Policies of the Government of India for the
6 Development of Tourism Sector 08
 National Action Plan for Tourism (NAPT) 1992: Objectives
and Strategies.
Constraints of Developing the Tourism Sites
 Challenges Faced during the Implementation of Tourism
Development Plans.
7 08
 Role of State and Central Government in Allocating Funds
for Tourism Development
 Benefits of Developing the Tourism Sites
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand of tourism policies, short term and long term tourism
planning and the constraints and challenges associated with it.
 The ability to understand the development aspects involved in tourism
management.
Text-Books
1. Inskeep, E., (Latest Edition), Tourism Planning: An Integrated and Sustainable Development
Approach, Van Nostr and Reinhold, New York.
2. Sharma, J. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism Planning and Development, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Mukhopadhyay S., (Latest Edition), Tourism Economics, ANE Books, New Delhi.
2. Sharma. K. K., (Latest Edition), Planning For Tourism, New Delhi.
3. Sinha, R. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism: Strategies, Planning and Development, New Delhi.
4. UNWTO, (Latest Edition), National and Regional Tourism Planning: Methodology and Case
Studies, Thomson Learning, UK.

1. Journal of Tourism and Hospitality Management, ISSN 2328-2169.

2. South Asian Journal of Tourism and Heritage, ISSN 0974-5432.

MB882.3: INDIAN TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT
(ITHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To familiarize students with the important tourism destinations in India.

 To help students to understand the relevance and importance of famous tourism
destinations in India.
 To help students to understand the significance of developing Indian tourism
destinations.
 To help students to understand emerging trends in tourism industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Tourism Diversity
 India as Tourism Destination
1  Man Made Tourism Resources 05
 Architectural Heritage
o Forts, Palaces, Monument
Indian Culture and Traditions
 Culture and Tradition
o Folklore, Cuisine, Costume
 Religions
2 o Jainism, Islam, Hinduism, Christianity, Sikhism 08
 Dance and Music
 Handicrafts
 Fairs and Fests
 Important Destinations in India
Natural Tourism Resources
 National Parks
 Wild Life Sanctuaries
 Biosphere
 Reserves
 Mountains
3 08
 Beaches
 Islands
 Back Water
 Inland Water Ways
 Adventure Tourism
 Aero Based Tourism

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Perspectives of Tourism and Hospitality Management in
Selected States of India with respect to the following
details:
 Profile of the State
o Brief History
o Major Destinations
o Archaeological
o Historical
o Heritage
o Religious
o Natural Resources
4  Other Major Cities 14
 Arts, Crafts and Shopping
 Folk Music and Dances
 Fairs and Festivals
 Adventure Sports and Special Interest Tours
 National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries
 Cuisine
 Major Circuits and Packages
 Popular Tourist Festivals Organized for the Promotion of
Tourism
 Other Places of Interest Like Major Museums, Adventure
Sports, Forts, Palaces etc.
Heritage Management
 Assessing the Economic Evaluation of Heritage Sites
 Need and Significance of Developing the Heritage Sites
5  Constraints Faced during the Heritage Management 06
 Role of Government and Local Authorities in Heritage
Management
 Educating Local People in regards to Heritage Management
6 Role of National Organizations Engaged in Heritage 06
Management
Dynamism of Indian Tourism and Hospitality Industry
 Emerging Form of Tourism in India
o Responsible
o Alternative
o Rural
7 08
o Agro Tourism
 Sustainable Tourism
o Eco Tourism
o Medical Tourism
o Village Tourism
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 Clear understanding and exposure to the details of Indian Tourism industry and
its significance.
 The ability to think strategically in expanding the tourism business in India by
capitalizing the natural and cultural diversity of India.
Text-Books
1. Basam A.L., (Latest Edition), Wonder – That Is India, Pan Macmillan.

2. Bryn Thomas, (Latest Edition), Lonely Planet, Lonely Planet Publications.
3. Asif Iqbal Fazili, (Latest Edition), Tourism in India Planning and Development, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Bhagawati, A. K., Bora, A. K., Kar, B. K., (Latest Edition), Geography of Assam, Rajesh
Publishers, Latest Edition, New Delhi.
2. Bora, Sheila and M. C., (Latest Edition), The story of Tourism: An Enchanting Journey
through Indias‟ North- East, USB Publishers Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Romila Chowla, (Latest Edition), Cultural Tourism and Heritage, Arise Publishers, New
Delhi.
4. I. C. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Tourism Products of India, Gian Publishing House, New
Delhi.
5. Acharya Ram, (Latest Edition), Tourism and Cultural Heritage of India, RBSA Publishers,
Jaipur.
1. Journal of Tourism and Hospitality Management, ISSN 2328-2169.

MB883.3: LEGAL ASPECTS OF TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT (LATHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To enables students to know the government rules and regulations to set up a

business in tourism and hospitality industry.
 To create awareness among students about service industry related laws like
contract act, industrial legislation and tourism related laws.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Role of Indian Government
 Regulatory Framework of Tourism and Hospitality Industry
1 in India. 05
 Role of Ministry of Tourism in India.
 State Level Tourism Development Corporation
Introduction to Indian Acts Applicable to Tourism and
Hospitality Industry
 Minimum Wages Act
2  Workmen‟s Compensation Act 10
 Payment of Gratuity Act 1972
 Payment of Bonus Act 1966
 Employee State Insurance Act
Consumer Protection Laws
 Entertainment Laws
 No Smoking Laws
3  Behavioural Rules and Restrictions in Public Areas 08
 Foreign Exchange Regulation Act
 Procedure for Customer Grievance Redressal
 Role of State and National Commission
Tourism Laws in India
 The Wildlife Protection Act 1980
4  Antiquities and Art Treasures Act 1972 08
 Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act 1958
 Sustainable and Preservation Act
Laws related to Tourists in India
 Citizenship Act
5  Passport Act 08
 Foreigners Registration Act
 Import Export Control Act

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Tourism related Procedures and Guidelines
 Customs
 FERA Act
6 08
 Reserve Bank of India – Guidelines
 Government Procedures
 Tourism Regulations of Government
Laws and Regulations in Tourism and Hospitality Sector
 Laws and Regulations related to Transport Sector
7 08
 Laws and Regulations related to Hospitality Sector
 Laws and Regulations relating to Travel Agency
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The understanding and insights to the tourism and hospitality business related
legislative framework with more emphasis on the role played by Ministry of Indian
Tourism and State governments to promote the tourism activities in India.
Text-Books
1. M. C. Metti, (Latest Edition), Hotel, Restaurant and Travel Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Gary and Chawla, (Latest Edition), Mercantile law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
3. Gary and Chawla, (Latest Edition), Business Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
4. Tulsian, (Latest Edition), Business Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. Bare Acts for the Acts covered in Course Syllabus.

MB884.3: FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT (FOM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To help students to know the basic functions of front office management.

 To help students to understand the emergencies and critical issues to be handled in
Tourism and Hospitality business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Front Office Basics
 Front Office – House Keeping
 Front Office Organization Charts
 Front Office Personnel
1 05
 Job Descriptions of Front Office Staffs
 Inter Departmental Relationship between Front Office and
Other Departments
 Qualities of Front Office Staff
Reservations
 Types of Reservation
o Guaranteed Reservation
o Non-Guaranteed Reservation
o Travel Agents Reservation
o Corporate Reservation
o Group Reservation
 Source of Reservation
2 10
 Importance of Reservation
 Methods of Reservation
 On-Line and Off-Line Bookings
 Basic Reservation Activities
 Reservation Records and Documents
 Reservation Charts
 Computerized Reservation System
 Reservation Cancellation Terms and Conditions
Registration
 Registration Activities
 Pre-Arrival Registration
3  Maintenance of Registration Records 08
 Flow of Guest Information between Front Office and Other
Departments
 Walk-In Guests

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Guest with Non-Guaranteed Reservation
 Guest with Guaranteed Reservation
Functions of Front Office Accounting System
 Types of Accounts
 The Front Office Accounting Cycle
 Creation and Maintenance of Accounts
4 08
 Settlement of Accounts
 Types of Settlement , Cash Settlement, Credit Settlement
 Methods of Handling Guest Accounts
 Manually and Computerized Accounting
Tariff Structure and Payment Handling
 Basis of Charging
 Hubbart Formula
 Different Types of Tariffs
 Rack Rates
5  Discounted Rates for Corporates, Airlines, Groups and 08
Travel Agents
 Alliance Maintenance
 Maintaining Executive Longue
 Foreign Currency Handling
 Forms of Payments
Complaint Handling
 Emergency Procedures
 Medical Emergency, Theft, Death, Fire
 Dealing with Drunken Guest
 Dealing with Guest Problems
 Telephone
6 o Services 08
o Equipment
o Procedure
o Manners
 Telex and Fax Messages
o Equipment and Procedures
 Safety Locker Management
Sector Specific Front Office Management
7  Hotel 08
 Aviation
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 A clear understanding of the basic functions of front office management like

reservation, registration and account keeping.
 The ability to learn the strategies to deal with the customers in critical situations.
Text-Books
1. Peter Abbott, (Latest Edition), Front Office Procedures and Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann.
2. S. K. Bhatnagar, (Latest Edition), Front Office Management, Frank Bros. and Co.
Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Dennis Foster, Lake Forest, (Latest Edition), Front Office Operation and Administration,
McGraw-Hill.
2. Micheal L., Kasavama, (Latest Edition), Front Office Procedures, EIAHMA, US.
1. The Management of Hospital and Tourism Enterprise.

JOURNALISM
AND MASS
COMMUNICATION
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB890.3: DEVELOPMENT COMMUNICATION (DC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To sensitize students with the need and issues of development

 To understand paradigms of development, and their adoption
 To have an understanding of approaches to development communication
 To understand development issues, particularly in Indian perspective
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Development
 Development: Definition
1 06
 Measuring Development
 Characteristics of Developing Countries
Development Organizations and Plans
 Union or State Governments Ministries and Departments
2  Planning Commission: Five Year Plans 06
 International Organizations: UNICEF, UNDP, UNESCO,
WTO, WHO
Theories of Development
 Dominant Paradigms
o Modernization Approach
o Rostow‟s Theory of Stages of Growth
o Big Push Theory
o Theory of Unbalanced Growth
 Structuralist Paradigms
3 o Dependency Theory 12
o Theory of Raul Prebisch
o Theory of Andre Gunder Frank
o Paulo Freire Approach
 Non-Unilinear Approach
o Approaches of Gandhi and Schumacher
o Neo Marxist Paradigm
o Basic Needs Model
Development Communication
 Development Communication: Definition, Concept, Need
 Role of Mass Communication in Development
4 10
o Empathy
o Diffusion of Innovation
o Magic Multiplier

Title/Topic
No Sessions
o Development Support Communication
 Definition, Concept, Extension
o Application of DSC in Agriculture, Health, Literacy
 Localized Approach
o Participatory Rural Appraisal
o Application of DSC in Agriculture, Health, Literacy
o Role of NGOs and Panchayati Raj Institution in
Development
Indian Perspective and Development Issues
 Rural Development
o Poverty Alleviation
o Land Reforms
o Women and Child Development
o Health and Family Welfare
 Urban Development
5 08
o Slum, Housing
o Public Transport, Traffic
o Water and Power Supply
 Forest and Tribal Development
o Ecology Vs. Economy
o Tribal Rights on Forest
o Wild Life and Forest Conservation
Sustainable Development
6 06
 Sustainable Development: Concept and Practice
Role of Media
 Role of Media in Development
 Use of Traditional Media for Development
7  Role of Print Media in Development 08
 Contribution of Broadcast Media to Development
 New Media and Development
 Cinema and Development
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to apply the concepts of development communication and understand its
role in society.
Text-Books
1. Tiwari, IP., (Latest Edition),Communication Technology and Development, Publication

Division, Govt. of India, New Delhi.
2. Thirwall A. P., (Latest Edition), Growth and Development –With Special Reference to
Development Economics, ELBS/Macmillan, New York.

Reference-Books
1. Singhal, Arvind, Rogers, (Latest Edition), India‟s Information Revolution, Sage, New
Delhi.
2. Melkote, Srinivas R., (Latest Edition), Communication for Development in the Third World:
Theory and Practice, Sage, New Delhi.
3. Ostman, Ronals E., (Latest Edition), Communication and Indian Agriculture, Sage, New
Delhi.
4. Dreze Jean and Sen Amartya., (Latest Edition), Indian Development: Selected Regional
Perspective, Oxford, Delhi.
5. Gupta V. S., (Latest Edition), Third Revolution in Indian Perspective- Contemporary Issues
and Themes in Communication, Concept Pub Co. New Delhi.
6. Jonson Kirk., (Latest Edition), Television and Social Change in India, Sage, New Delhi.
7. Mody, Bella., (Latest Edition),Designing Message for Development Communication, Sage,
New Delhi.
1. The Journal of Development Communication.

MB891.3: INTROUDCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION AND
JOURNALISM (IMCJ)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To understand the relationship between communication and society.

 To study different modes, structures and forms of communication.
 To apprise students of theories of mass communication in socio cultural perspective
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introducing the Mass Communication
 Introduction
1 06
 Tools of Mass Communication
 Mass Communication and Society
Principles of Communication
 Communication
2 06
 Principles of Effective Communication
 Business Communication Techniques
Mass Communication: Various Approaches
 Theoretical Approach
3 10
 Approach to Culture
 Pertinent Issues
Journalism
 Journalism
 News Reporting
4  Editing 06
 Newspaper Printing and Management
 Photography
 Photojournalism
Advertising and Public Relations
 Advertising Objective
5 10
 DAGMAR Models
 Public Relations
Mass Communication Channels
 Print Media
6 10
 Electronic Media
 Cinema
Recent Trends in Mass Communication
7  Green Revolution 06
 Cyber Journalism

Title/Topic
No sessions
 Event Management
 Designing Creative Brief
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 An ability to apply the concepts of Mass Communication, Journalism and latest trend
in it.
Text-Books
1. B.K. Chaturvedi, S.K. Mittal, (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Principles and
Practices, Global Vision Publishing House.
2. McQuail, Dennis, (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Theory, Sage Publication, New
Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Baran, Stanley J and Davis, Dennis K., (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Theory,
Thomson Wadsworth, New Delhi.
2. Ghosh, S., (Latest Edition), Mass Media Today in the Indian Context, Profile Publishers,
Kolkata.
3. De Fleur, (Latest Edition), Melvin and Sandra, Ball Rokiach Theories of Mass
Communication, Longman, New York.
4. Susmita Bala., (Latest Edition), Samkeleen Sanchar Sidhant, DPS Publishing House,
New Delhi.
5. Narula, Uma, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Communication Models, Perspective, Strategies,
Atlantic Publishers, New Delhi.
6. Kumar, Kewal J., (Latest Edition), Mass Communication in India, Jaico Books, New
Delhi.
7. J.S. Yadava and Pradeep Mathur, (Latest Edition), Issues in Mass Communication: The
Basic Concepts, Kanishka Publishers, Delhi.
8. Shymali Bhattacharjee, (Latest Edition), Media and Mass Communication: An Introduction,
Kanishka Publishers, Delhi.
1. Mass Communicator: International Journal of Communication Studies.

2. Journal of Advanced Research in Journalism and Mass Communication.
3. Journal of Creative Communication.
4. Journalism and Mass Communication.

MB892.3: MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To look into the relevance of media laws and analyze ethical issue.
 To assess need for regulation and control on contents in media.
 To apprise the students of cyber laws and the ethical issues involved.
 To understand the intricacies of promotional media and their responsibility.
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Laws and Ethics
 The Roots of Constitutions
 Society, Laws, Media and Democracy
 Laws - Bills and Act, Ordinance, Regulations, Statute, Code,
1 Norms, Conventions 06
 Legal Terminology - Plaintiff, Defendant, Affidavit, Evidence,
Prosecution, Conviction, Accused, Acquittal, Bail, Prima Facie,
Subjudice etc.
 Ethical Issues
Freedom of the Press
 Pre-Independence Press Laws, Curbs on Press Freedom
 Freedom of Speech and Expression, Freedom of the Press- Art
19(1)(A)
 Freedom of Speech and Expression as Applied to Cinema, Film
Censorship
 Reasonable Restrictions on the Freedom of the Press- Art 19(2)
2 08
 Contempt of Court, Defamation
 Parliamentary Privileges Vs Freedom of the Press
 Official Secrets Act 1923
 Transparency Laws in India and Elsewhere, RTI Act 2005
 Whistleblower Laws in India and Other Countries, Public Interest
Disclosure and Protection to Persons Making the Disclosure Bill,
2010
Media Laws and Ethical Issues
 Press and Registration of Books (PRB) Act 1867, Need of
Amendment
3  Working Journalist Act 1955 and 1958: Wage Boards and 08
Fixation of Wages
 Press Council Act 1978, PCI and its Code of Conduct
 International Norms, Code of Ethics in Different Countries

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 Intellectual Property Right, Copyright in India
 Right to Privacy, Invasion in Privacy By Media
 Laws Related to Vulgarity, Obscenity in Media
 Social Responsibility of the Press, Self Regulation
 Social Audit, Ombudsman
 Self Regulations among others
Broadcast Media: Laws and Ethics
 Broadcast Laws in India and Abroad
 AIR and DD Broadcast Code, Commercial Code, Election Code
 Prasar Bharti Act: Relevance of Corporation, Standard of
Contents
 Broadcasting Services Regulation Bill 2007, Issue of Content
Code
 Fight For TRP and Its Fallout on Ethical Standard of TV
Channels
4 08
 Self Regulation By the Industry: News Broadcasters Association
(NBA)
 Regulation By the Government: Indian Broadcasting Foundation
(IBF)
 Broadcasting Content Complaints Council (BCCC)
 Issue of Protection of Viewers and Competition Among Channel
Operators, Cable Television Networks (Regulation) Act 1995, Act
 Role of Telecom Regulatory Authority (TRAI) in Broadcast
Media
Cyberspace: Laws and Ethics
 Cyber Crimes, Cyber Attacks, Cyber Bullying, Cyber Security
 Hacking and Anti-Hacking Concepts
 Information Technology Act 2000, Report of Expert Committee
on Amendments
 Blogging and Social Networking Sites, and Ethical Issues
 Efforts for Control of Web Contents in India, China and
5 Elsewhere 08
 Debate on Making Cyber Laws A Part of International Law
 Issue of Copyright and IPR on Web: Stop Online Piracy Act
(SOPA)
 Protect IP Act (PIPA)
 Online Protection and Enforcement of Digital Trade Act (OPEN)
 Ethical Rules By Professional Bodies At National – International
Level
Promotional Media: Laws and Ethics
 Integrated Marketing Communication, Laws and Ethics
6  Advertising, Media and Freedom of Speech 08
 Marketing and Advertising Regulations in India and Abroad
 Advertising and Consumers: Drug and Magic Remedies

Title/Topic
No Sessions
(Objectionable Advertisement) Act 1954
 Consumer Protection Act 1986
 Internet Advertising, Piracy Policies and Related Issues
 Advertising-Ethical Rules Framed By Advertising Standard
Council of India (ASCI)
 Advertising Agencies Association of India, Indian Newspaper
Society (INS)
 Ethical Rules Framed By International Bodies- American
Association of Ad Agency (4 A)
 Federal Trade Commission (FTC)
7 Cyber Journalism : Laws and Ethics 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to apply the concepts of Media Laws and Ethics.
Text-Books
1. Ravindranath, P. K., (Latest Edition), Press Laws and Ethics of Journalism, Authors Press,
New Delhi.
2. Barua, Vidisha, (Latest Edition), Press and Media Law Manual, Universal Law
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Ravindran, R. K., (Latest Edition), Handbook of Radio, Television and Broadcast

Journalism, Anmol Publication, Delhi.
2. John Vernon Pavlik, (Latest Edition), New Media Technology, Allyn and Bacon.
3. Ambrish Saxena, (Latest Edition), Freedom of Press and Right to Information in India,
Kanishka Publication, New Delhi.
4. Guha Thakurta, Paranjoy, (Latest Edition), Media Ethics, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.
5. Jethwaney J. and Jain Shrut, (Latest Edition), Advertising Management, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.
6. Angela Wadia, (Latest Edition), Global Resource Book on Right to Information, Kanishka
Publication, New Delhi.
7. Jean Claude Bertrand, (Latest Edition), Media Ethics and Accountability System,
Transaction Publishers.
8. Valerie Alia, Brian Brennan, (Latest Edition), Deadlines and Diversit, Fernwood
Publishing.
9. Barry Hoffmaster, (Latest Edition), Journalism Ethics in a Changing World, Black Point.
10. Clow E Kenneth, (Latest Edition), Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communication, Printice Hall.
11. Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition),Marketing Management, Pearson Prentice Hall.

1. Journal of Applied Journalism and Media Studies

2. Journalism Studies, Taylor and Francis Journals

MB893.3: MEDIA ECONOMICS AND ANALYSIS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To explains the fundamental concepts relevant to the study of media economics.

 To Study economic theory to business practice.
 To study the impact of economics on public policy.
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Economics
 Macroeconomics and Microeconomics
 The Firm in Economic Theory
 Competitive Market Structures
1  Market Structure and Behaviour 06
 What is So Special about Economics of the Media?
 Key Economic Characteristics of the Media
 Economies of Scale
 Economies of Scope
Strategies
 The Vertical Supply Chain
 Changing Market Structures and Boundaries
 Corporate Growth and Concentration Strategies
 Strategic Responses to Digitization 08
2
 Managerial Theories
 Horizontal Expansion
 Diagonal and Conglomerate Growth
 Vertical Expansion
 Transnational Growth
Media and Public Policy
 Free Market Versus Intervention
 Support Measures for Media Content
 Protectionism
08
3  Concentrated Media Ownership
 Promoting Competition
 Monopolies and Technological Change
 Maximising Efficiency
 PSBs and State Aid Rules
Media and Market
4  Demand: Push to Pull 08
 Mass to Niche

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 User Empowerment
 Segmentation and Branding
 Audience Flow Management
 Market Failure in Broadcasting
 Public Service Content Provision
 Economics of Content Supply
 Novelty and Risk Spreading
 Portfolios
 Repetition and Formats
 Funding Models: Cost Plus Versus Deficit Financing
 Windowing
Media and Network
 Networks
 Economics of Networks
 Broadcasting Networks
5 06
 Global Networks in Transnational Publishing
 Online Content Distribution
 Social Networks and Microblogging
 The Changing Role of Networks in Media Economics
Economics of Media Organizations
 Sources of Revenue in A Newspaper / Magazine
 Cost and Revenue Relationship in A Newspaper/ Magazine
6 10
 TV Organization: Issues of Marketing And Distribution
 Cost and Revenue Relationship in A TV Channel
Cost and Revenue Factors in Web Based Organizations
Economics of Advertising
 The Advertising Industry
 Why Does Advertising Take Place?
 Firms Control on their Own Markets
08
7  Informative Versus Persuasive Advertising
 Advertising as a Barrier to Market Entry
 Advertising and the Performance of the Economy
 The Rise of Internet Advertising
 The Firm's Advertising Decision
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise self-learning and active classroom interaction based on
students‟ prior preparation. The instructor is expected to prepare a detailed session-wise
schedule, showing the topics to be covered and the reading material for every session.
Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources other than the prescribed
text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the library, or from websites and
other resources not accessible to the students, the course instructor should make the

material available to the students well in advance, so that the students can come
prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
 Classroom discussions of concepts and theory … About 40 sessions

 Case discussions … About 08 sessions
 Students‟ presentation … About 06 sessions
 Management Exercise/ Stimulations/Game … About 04 sessions
 Feedback … About 02 sessions
components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to apply the concepts of Media Economics and Analysis.
Text-Book
1. Doyel G., (Latest Edition), Understanding Media Economics, SAGE Publications Ltd.

Reference-Books
1. Porter, M. E., (Latest Edition), The Value Chain and Competitive Advantage, M. E. Porter,
Competitive Advantage (First., pp. 33–61).
2. Albarran, A. B., (Latest Edition), Media Economics: Understanding Markets, Industries and
Concepts, Ames, IA: Iowa State Press.
3. Albarran, A. B., (Latest Edition), The Media Economy, New York: Routled.


MB894.3: MEDIA ANALYTICS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
 To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and

solve business problems and to support managerial decision-making.
 To become familiar with the processes needed to develop, report, and analyze
business data.
 To learn use of statistical tools and software for business analytics.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Analytics
 Introduction to Analytics
1 03
 A Framework for Analytics
 Need and scope of Media Analytics
Data Visualisation and Interpretation
 Types of Data
 Data Summarisation and Visualisation
2 06
 Basic Probability Concepts
 Sampling and Estimation
 Data Interpretation
Data Modelling- I
 Fitting and Interpreting Regression Model
3 06
 Identifying and Selecting Important Predictors
 Operation Research and Linear Programming
Data Modelling- II
 Dummy Variables and Interaction Terms
4 10
 Nonlinear Relationship and Data Transformation
 Multi-Collinearity and Variable Selection
Decision Framework
 Decision Need
5  Decision Model 10
 Decision Making
 Decision Execution
Media Channel Analytics
 Audience Analytics
 Quality Service Monitor
6 10
 Viewer Diagnostics
 Social Media Analytics
 Mobile Analytics

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to MS Excel and Statistical Software
7  Use of MS Excel for Analysis 10
 Use of SPSS/ SAP for Analytics
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to apply the tools of business analytics.
Text-Book
1. Rahul Saxena, and Anand Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: A

Practitioner‟s Guide, Springer Science and Business Media, New York
Reference-Book
1. Wolfgang Jank, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics for Managers, Springer Science and
Business Media, USA.
2. Chuck Hemann, Ken Burbary, (Latest Edition), Digital Marketing Analytics: Making
Sense of Consumer Data in a Digital World, Que Publising, USA.
3. S. Albright, Wayne Winston, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: Data Analysis and
Decision Making, Cengage Learning, USA.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester – 4)

MB805.3: COMPREHENSIVE PROJECT (CP) (PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To enable the students to investigate in detail a topic relating to one of their areas /
streams of specialisation, and in the process, develop a comprehensive
understanding of the area/stream.
III. Pedagogy
For this course, each student will choose his/her faculty guide in the area/stream and
work on the issue jointly with the faculty. The students will work on their projects
individually and not in pairs or teams. The institute may appoint a faculty guide in case a
student is not able to choose a guide, or if a faculty member is chosen as a guide by too
many students to allow him to do justice to the students by way of guidance. As a rule,
no faculty member may be permitted to guide more than five students. A faculty co-guide
may also be appointed for every/any student.
The investigation will be in the nature of a research through:
i. Study of secondary data from books, journal and magazine articles,

newspaper articles, websites, electronic and physical databases, etc;
ii. Primary data collection through interviews, discussions, and other research
instruments. Students are encouraged to pursue the research in the
organisation where they had undergone their summer internship.
The outcome of the research will be a comprehensive report which would contain,
among others, the following:
 Area of research chosen, with reason

 Problem Definition
 Research Method
 Data Collection and Analysis
 Conclusions and Recommendations, if any.
 Limitations of the study and lead for further work
The detailed format of the report will be circulated to the students at the beginning of
the third semester by the faculty guide.

the faculty guide on the basis of the regularity and quality of work by the student under
his/her guidance. The internal evaluation will be for 30% of the course.
The University examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students‟

reports and a viva-voce and will carry 70% marks for the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the students should have developed a comprehensive
understanding of the chosen area of specialisation and the major issues in the area.

MB806.3: LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT (LSCM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
I. Number of credits : 3
 To develop an appreciation of importance of an effective supply for competitive

advantage.
 To introduce students to the supply chain network and enable them to gain the
knowledge of planning and managing the supply chain processes.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Building Strategic Framework to Analyze Supply Chains
 Understanding Supply Chain Management
1 07
 Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope
 Supply Chain Drivers and Obstacles
Designing the Supply Chain Network
 Designing the Distribution Network in a Supply Chain
2 08
 Network Design in the Supply Chain
 Network Design in an Uncertain Environment
Planning Demand and Supply in A Supply Chain
3  Demand Forecasting 08
 Aggregate Planning
Planning and Managing Inventories in A Supply Chain
4  Managing Economies of Scale: Cycle Inventory 08
 Managing Uncertainty: Safety Inventory
Sourcing, Transporting and Pricing Products
5  Sourcing Decision in Supply Chain 07
 Transportation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to understand and critically evaluate the principles of supply chain
management.
 The ability to understand how a supply network should be organized and effectively
managed, taking account in particular of supply strategy, inter-organizational
relationships and logistics issues.
 The ability to appreciate the wider societal implications of supply chain
management including public sector implementation, environmental impact, and
globalization.

Text-Book
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindi, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management: Strategy,
Planning and Operation, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. John T., (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Mentzer Response books, Sage
Publication.
2. Robert B. Handfield, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall.
1. Supply Chain Management Review

Websites
1. http://www.ism.ws/
2. http://www.supplymanagement.com/
3. http://supply-chain.org/

MB807.3: MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS (MAE) (PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To prepare students to internalise managerial personality traits so that they can

perform their roles in their chosen careers with effectiveness;
 To develop the students‟ negotiating and salesmanship skills; and
 To help the students manage their emotions for achieving a harmonious work-life
balance.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding and Mapping Personality
 Introduction
 Personality Factors
(Leadership Morale Vs. Individual Motivation)
1  Types of Personality 05
 Mapping Personality
(SWOT Analysis and Exercises)
 Building Manners and Etiquettes
(Individual / Group)
Forming the Habits for Effectiveness
 The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People
o Being Proactive and Personal Vision Development
o Personal Leadership
o Time Management
2 o Win-Win and Interpersonal Leadership 05
o Empathic Communication
o Synergy and Creative Cooperation
o Balanced Self-Renewal
 The Eighth Habit
o Striving for Excellence /Greatness
Emotional Management
 Personal
o Conflict, Individual Internal Conflict – How to
Overcome it?
o Scope for Introspection
3 05
o Stress Management and Coping Techniques
 Interpersonal
o Life Position
o Management Development Methods for Decision
Making: Case Study, In-Basket, Management

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Games, etc.
o Interpersonal Skills: Situation Training, Role-
Playing, Transaction Analysis, Johari Window, etc.
o Individual‟s Knowledge: Conferences, etc.
o Group: Crises Management (Disaster)
Learning The Managers’ Way
4 05
 Unwritten Laws of Business
5 Negotiation and Salesmanship 05
Project Preparation
6 05
 Interviewing High Profile Personality (IHPP)
Total 30
IV. Pedagogy
reading material and case material for every session. He/she is expected to adopt
innovative approaches to make the classroom and tutorial/laboratory sessions
interactive, participatory and enriching. In view of the significance and importance of
the life management skills for successful managerial practice, the instructor is expected
to provide individual attention to the students and give them constant feedback for
improvement. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources beyond the
prescribed reference books, journals and magazines in the library, websites and other
resources accessible to the students, the course instructor should make the material
available to the students well in advance, so that the students can come prepared for the
classes. In addition to these, every student is expected to undergo and undertake an
interview. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
Classroom Contact Sessions
 Classroom discussions of concepts and cases … About 13 Sessions

 Exercise-based Practice and Simulation Games … About 10 Sessions
 Students‟ Interview / presentations based on Project … About 05 Sessions

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Book Review and / or Presentation 1 60 60 20
2 Assignments 3 60 180 60
3 Interview of High Profile Personality 1 30 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The internal marks will constitute 30% of the course
evaluation.
The University examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students‟

reports and a viva-voce / interview and will be for 70 % of the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the participant should have developed skills and self-confidence
necessary for managerial performance and build in to meet the organizational challenges.
Text-Books
1. Stephen R Covey, (Latest Edition), The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, Simon and
Schuster UK Ltd., UK.
2. Covey Stephen R, (Latest Edition), The 8th Habit from Effectiveness to Greatness, Simon
and Schuster UK Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Covey Stephen R, (Latest Edition), First Things First, Simon and Schuster UK Ltd.
(www.simonsays.co.uk)
2. Stephen R Covey with A. Roger Merrill, (Latest Edition), Principle Centered Leadership,
Simon and Schuster UK Ltd.
3. Pestonjee, (Latest Edition), Stress and Coping – The Indian Experience, Sage Publication,
California.
4. Shalini Verma, (Latest Edition), Body Language – Your Success Mantra, Sultan Chand
and Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Shiv Khera, (Latest Edition), You Can Win, Macmillan Co.

6. Anthony Grant and Jane Greene, (Latest Edition), It‟s Your Life. What are you going to do
with it?- Pearson Publishing House.

MARKETING
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB815.3: PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT (PBM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop an understanding of basic branding principles and their exposure to

classic and contemporary branding application through real-life examples and cases;
 To make the students aware about the role of brands, the concept of brand equity,
and the advantages of creating branding applications.
 To increase understanding of the important issues in planning, implementing, and
evaluating brand strategies.
 To acquaint the students with the appropriate concepts, theories, models and other
tools to make better brands.
 To understand the latest developments and cultivate an understanding of the
adjustments to be made in branding strategies over time and geographic boundaries
to maximize brand equity.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Product Management: An Introduction
 The Business Objective
1  The Market Opportunity 03
 Refinement of the Product Concept into New Product and
Business
New Product Development Process
 Opportunity Identification and Selection
 Creativity and the Product Concept
 Finding and Solving Customers Problems
 Analytical Attribute Approaches: Perceptual Mapping and
2 Trade Off Analysis 12
 Concept Evaluation System
 Concept Testing
 Sales Forecasting and Financial Analysis
 Product Use Testing
 Implementation of the Strategic Plan: Commercialization /
Launch
Brand Management: An Introduction
3 03
 Brand and Brand Management
Identifying and Establishing Brand Positioning and
4 Values 09
 Customer Based Brand Equity

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Brand Positioning and Values
Planning and Implementing Brand Marketing Programs
 Choosing Brand Elements to Build Brand Equity
 Designing Marketing Programs to Build Brand Equity
5  Integrating Marketing Communications to Build Brand 06
Equity
 Leveraging Secondary Brand Knowledge to Build Brand
Equity
Measuring and Interpreting Brand Performance
 Developing a Brand Equity Measurement and Management
System
6  Measuring Sources of Brand Equity: Capturing Customer 06
Mindset
 Measuring Outcomes of Brand Equity: Capturing Market
Performance
Growing and Sustaining Brand Equity
 Designing and Implementing Brand Strategies
 Introducing and Naming New Products and Brand
7 Extensions 12
 Managing Brands Overtime
 Managing Brands Over Geographic Boundaries and Market
Segments
8 Project and / or Book Reviews and Presentations 06
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 Clear understanding of fundamentals, concerns of new product development and

branding, brand elements and the process of creating / developing customer based
brand equity.
Text-Books
1. Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, (Latest Edition), Product Design and
Development, Tata McGraw - Hill Education.
2. Linda Gorchels, (Latest Edition), The Product Manager's Handbook, Tata Mcgraw Hill
Education Private Limited.
Reference-Books
1. Majumdar Ramanuj, (Latest Edition), Product Management in India, PHI Learning.

2. Kevin Lane Keller, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Pearson Education or
PHI.
3. Jean Noel Kapferer, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Creating and Sustaining
Brand Equity Long Term, Kogan Page.
4. Dr. S. Ramesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Managing Indian Brands, Marketing Concepts and
Stretegies, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
5. YLR Moorthi, Brand Management, (Latest Edition), The Indian Context, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
6. Subroto Sengupta, (Latest Edition), Brand Positioning, Strategies for Competitive
Advantage, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
7. David A. Aaker, (Latest Edition), Building Strong Brands, Free Press.
8. Jean Noel Kapferer, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Free Press.
1. Journal of Brand Management

5. Pitch
6. The Economic Times (Brand Equity)
7. The Hindu - Branding
8. Business Line-Catalyst

MB816.3: SERVICES AND RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT (SRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop insights into emerging trends in the service sector and understand the
significance of marketing and management services.
 Various challenges faced by the marketers of service organization and strategy
development.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foundations for Services Marketing
 Introduction to Services
 Understanding of Service Economy
1.  The Difference between Marketing of Product and
06
Services and Its Managerial Implications
 The Expanded Marketing Mix
 The Gaps Model of Service Quality Describing 5 Gaps –
A Customer Gap and 4 Provider Gaps
Focus on the Customer
 The Aspects of Customer Gap, Consumer Behaviour in
Services
 Impact of Culture on Consumer Behaviour in Services-Its
Strategic Implication.
 Customer Expectation of Service, the Zone of Tolerance
2.  The Factors Influencing Customer Expectation and how 08
Service Marketers Tackle them
 Customer Perception, Customer Satisfaction and Service
Quality
 Moments of Truth, Measuring and Managing Customer
Satisfaction and Service Quality in Every Service
Encounter
Understanding Customer Requirement
 The Customer Expectation Gap ( Provider Gap: 1)
 Understanding Customer Perception and Expectation
through Marketing Research Strategies.
3. 10
 Concept of Relationship Marketing and Its Goals
(Including CRM Process, Implementation and Audit)
 Foundation for and Levels of Relationship Strategies
 Service Recovery Strategies. Service Guarantees

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Aligning Service Design and Standards
 Quality Specification Gap (Provider Gap: 2)
 Aligning Strategies
o Service Design
o Redesign and Development
4 o Process for Developing Customer-Defined 06
Standards
 Physical Evidence
o Its Importance
o Its Roles and Strategies for Effectively
Designing Physical Evidence
Delivering and Performing Service
 Service Delivery Gap (Provider Gap- 3)
 Strategies for Closing this Gap
 Strategies for Integrating Appropriate Human Resource
5 Practices in Service Firms
08
 Role of Customers in Service Firms
 Role of Customer in Service Delivery
 Strategies for Effective Service Delivery through
Intermediaries
 Demand Management and Capacity Management
Managing Service Promises
 Marketing Communication Gap ( Provider Gap: 4 )
 Role and Need of Integrated Service Marketing
Communication
6 06
 Strategies for Managing Service Promises and Internal
Marketing Communication by Adopting Appropriate
Pricing Strategies
 The Financial and Economic Effect of Services
Relationship Marketing
7  Key Concepts in Relationship Marketing 06
 Planning for Relationship Marketing
Customer Relationship Management
 Customer Lifetime Value
8 06
 IT Enabled RM
 Customer Retention
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The skills to understand the customers and their requirements and frame strategies
for the same.
 The skills to get new customers and maintain long-term relationship with the
existing ones.

Text-Books
1. Valarie Zeithaml and Mary Bitner, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing- integrating
customer focus across the firm, Tata McGraw- Hill.
2. Christopher Lovelock and Jochen Wirtz, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. Hellen Woodruff, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing, McMillian India Ltd.

2. Douglas Hoffman and John Bateson, (Latest Edition), Essentials Of Services Marketing:
Concepts, Strategies and Cases, Thomson, South-Western.
3. Francis Buttle, (Latest Edition), Customer Relationship Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann, Elsevier.
4. Graham Roberts-Phelps, (Latest Edition), Customer Relationship Management,
Hawksmere, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
5. Sheth, Parvatiyar, Shainesh, (Latest Edition), Customer relationship Management, Tata
McGraw- Hill.
6. S. Shajahan, (Latest Edition), Relationship Marketing, Tata McGraw- Hill.

1. Journal of Services Marketing, Emerald
2. Services Marketing Quarterly, Taylor and Francis
3. Journal of Services Marketing, ICFAI
4. Journal of Services Marketing, USA

MB 817.3: INTERNATIONAL MARKETING (IM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To expose the students to the concept of international marketing, enabling them to

acquire an appreciation of the complexities of marketing on an international basis.
 To understand the ever expanding scope of international marketing & acquaint
them with cross cultural implications on international marketing decisions.
 To learn global marketing strategies and export-import procedure.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to International Marketing
 The Scope and Challenge of International Marketing
1 05
 The Dynamic Environment of International Trade
 Trade Theories
International Marketing and Functional Approaches to
Trade
2  International Trade Distortions and Marketing Barriers 05
 International Economic Institutions
 Regional Economic Groups
The Cultural Environment of Global Markets
 History and Geography: The Foundations of Culture
 Cultural Dynamics in Assessing Global Markets
3 08
 Culture, Management Style, and Business Systems
 The Political Environment
 The International Legal Environment
Assessing Global Market Opportunities
4  Developing a Global Vision through Market Research 04
 Emerging Markets
Developing Global Marketing Strategies
 Global Marketing Management: Planning and Organization
 Products and Services for Consumers
 Products and Consumers for Businesses
 International Marketing Channels
5  Exporting and Logistics: Special Issues for Business 16
 Integrated Marketing Communications and International
Advertising
 Personal Selling and Sales Management
 Pricing for International Markets

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foreign Markets and Export Management
6  Foreign Markets and Export Marketing Process
06
 Export Marketing Documentation
 EXIM Policy
Financial Environment and Decision Making
 Sources of Financing and International Money Markets
7 08
 Currencies and Foreign Exchange
 Risk Management in International Marketing
Implementing Global Marketing Strategies
8  Negotiating with International Customers, Partners, and 06
Regulators
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the nature and behaviour of international market and frame
strategies accordingly to support the service or business he is in.
Text-Books
1. Philip R Cateora and John L Graham, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, TATA
McGraw Hill.
2. Sak Onkvisit and John J. Shaw (Latest Edition), International Marketing, PHI
3. R.L. Varshney and B. Bhattacharya, International Marketing Management- An Indian
Perspective, Sultan Chand and Sons.
Reference Books
1. P K Vasudeva, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Excel Books.

2. Rakesh Mohan Joshi, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Oxford University
Press.
3. Isobel Doole and Robin Lowe, (Latest Edition), International Marketing Strategy-
Analysis, development and Implementation, Thompson press Publication.
4. Vern Terpstra and Ravi Sarathy, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Thompson
South Western.
5. Charles W. L. Hill and Arun K Jain, (Latest Edition), International Business – Competing
in Global Market place, TATA McGraw Hill.
6. Acharya and Jain, (Latest Edition), Export and Import Procedure and
Documentation, Himalaya Publications
7. Export and Import Policy of Government of India Issued from time to time.
8. Annual Report of the Department of Commerce, Ministry of Commerce and
Industry, Government of India Issued from time to time.
1. Asia Pacific Journal of Marketing

2. International Journal of Advertising
3. Global Journal of Marketing
4. International Journal of Logistics and Supply Chain Management
5. Journal of International Business

6. Economic and Political Review
8. Economic Times
9. The Times of India

MB818.3: RETAIL MANAGEMENT (RM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To give comprehensive view of retailing, an analysis of the retail environment and

exposure to issues and developments in the industry.
 To understand the impact of retailing on the economy.
 To comprehend retailing‟s role in society and, conversely, society’s impact on
retailing.
 To see how retailing fits within the broader disciplines of business and marketing.
 To recognize and understand the operations-oriented policies, methods, and
procedures used by successful retailers in today’s global economy.
 To know the responsibilities of retail personnel in the numerous career positions
available in the retail field.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 The Domain of Retailing
1 05
 Indian Retail Industry
 Retailing in Other Countries
Understanding Consumer Behaviour
2  Retail Market Segmentation 06
 Shopping Patterns in India
Retailing Strategy
 Delivering Value through Retail Formats
 Deciding Location
3  Supply Chain Management 10
 Pricing in Retail
 Communication in Retailing
 Building Store Loyalty
Store Management
 Category Management
4 08
 Retail Buying
 Store Layout and Design
Merchandise Management
 Basics of Retails Merchandising
 The Process of Merchandise Planning
5 08
 The Methods of Merchandise Procurement
 Retail Pricing and Evaluating Merchandise Performance
 Private Labels

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Category Management
Managing Retail
 Human Resource Management Retail – A Strategic Tool
 Retail Store Operations
6  The Legal and Ethical Aspects of the Retail Business 08
 Store Design and Visual Merchandising
 Retail Management Information Systems
Creating and Sustaining Value
 Managing Retail Infrastructure
7  Understanding Retail Viability 10
 Retail Marketing and Branding
 Servicing the Retail Customer
 Role of Technology in Retail
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to apply the knowledge of retail management concepts in practice and
adapt to the changes taking place in the retail industry.
Text-Books
1. P. K. Sinha and D. P. Uniyal, (Latest Edition), Managing Retailing, Oxford University

Press.
2. Swapna Pradhan, (Latest Edition), Retailing Management, TMH.
Reference-Books
1. James R. Ogden and Denise T. Ogden, (Latest Edition), Integrated Retail Management,
Biztantra.
2. Levy and Weitz, (Latest Edition), Retail Management, TMH.
1. Retail Biz
2. Journal of Consumer Behaviour
3. Journal of Marketing Management

MB819.3: DIGITAL AND SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING (DSMM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide an overview of Digital Marketing and emerging perspectives of Digital

Marketing.
 To provide some of the challenges and opportunities of Digital Marketing.
 Learn how to use web site analytics tools and know how to interpret the data.
 To know the major online advertising approaches.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introduction
 Strategies in Digital Marketing
 Aligning Internet with Business Objectives
1  Examples of Great Case Studies 06
 User Behaviour and Navigation
 Branding and User Experience
 Developing A Digital Plan
Search Engine Optimization (SEO)
 Keyword Research
 How Google Works
2  Search Engine Factors 06
 On-page and Off-page Optimisation
 Metatags, Images, Content, Video
 Links and How to Get Them?
Pay Per Click Marketing
 How to Create a PPC Campaign
3  Implementing your PPC Budget 08
 Targeting your Advertising
 Measuring and Managing your Campaign
Website Analytics
 Website Analytics
 Google Analytics Explained
4 08
 Understanding your KPI‟s
 Increasing Traffic to your Website
 Measuring Website Traffic
Permission Marketing
 Mobile Marketing
5 08
 Email Marketing

Title/Topic
No sessions
Digital Display Advertising
 Display Advertising
 Buying and Selling of Banner
6 08
 Banner Formats and When to Use them?
 Creating and Implementing a Banner
 Campaign
Social Media Marketing
 Social Media Marketing
 Overview of Facebook, Twitter, Linkedin, Blogging, Youtube
7 and Flickr 12
 Increasing Website Traffic Using Facebook, Twitter, Video,
Etc.
 Building Brand Awareness Using Social Media
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to frame effective strategies in the area of digital and social media
marketing and becomes able to contribute in the growth of business.
Text-Books
1. Mary Lou Roberts, (Latest Edition), Internet Marketing, Cengage Publication
2. Nancy Lee and Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition), Social Marketing- Influencing Behaviours
for Good, SAGE Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Rob Donovan and Nandine Henely, (Latest Edition), Principles and Practices of Social
Marketing- an International Perspective, Cambridge University Press.
2. Damian Ryan and Calvin Jones, (Latest Edition), Understanding Digital Marketing:
Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation, Kogan Page Limited.
3. Lorrie Thomas, (Latest Edition), Online Marketing, McGraw- Hill.
4. Avinash Kaushik, (Latest Edition), Web Analytics 2.0: The Art of Online Accountability and
Science of Customer Centricity, McGraw- Hill.

1. Journal of Marketing Management

FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB825.3: BEHAVIOURAL FINANCE
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce the students to the role of human behaviour in financial decision

making. This will enable them to understand some psychological biases which
lead to various anomalies.
 To help students appreciate the limitations of „rational‟ models of investment
decision making.
 To learn and understand heuristics and biases that can cause irrational financial
decisions.
 To help students identify persistent or systematic behavioural factors that
influence investment behaviour.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Introduction to Behavioural Finance
 Overview
1  History of Behavioural Finance 08
 From Standard Finance to Behavioural Finance
 Are Financial Markets Efficient?
Limits to Arbitrage
 Fundamental Risk
2  Noise Trader Risk 08
 Implementation Cost
 Evidence of Limits to Arbitrage
Cognitive Biases, Beliefs and Heuristics-Preferences-I
 Prospect Theory
 Ambiguity Aversion
 Loss Aversion
3  Framing 08
 Non-Consequentialism
 Disjunction Effect
 Self-Deception
 Neuro-Finance (Introduction Only)
Cognitive Biases, Beliefs and Heuristics-Preferences-II
 Mental Accounting
 Self-Control
4 08
 Regret Avoidance
 Representativeness and Availability
 Anchoring and Belief Perseverance

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
 Overconfidence
 Optimism and Wishful Thinking
 Overreaction
Anomalies-Key Concepts
 Endowment Effect
 Disposition Effect
 Reference Price Effect
 Herd Behavior
 Hindsight
5 08
 Winners‟ Curse
 Cognitive Dissonance
 Familiarity Bias
 Status Quo Bias
 Law Of Small Numbers
 Information Overload
Application-The Aggregate Stock Market
 Equity Premium Puzzle-Prospect Theory
 Loss Aversion
 The Volatility Puzzle-Beliefs
 Preferences
6 08
 The Cross Section of Average Returns-Size Premium
 Long Term Reversals
 Predictive Power of Scaled Price Ratios
 Momentum
 Event Studies
Application-Corporate Finance
 Security Issuance
7 08
 Capital Structure and Investment
 Dividends, Managerial Irrationality
Contemporary Issues
8 04
 Understanding the Psychology of Philanthropy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
 An ability to understand the major concepts and topics of behavioral finance and to
be able to apply these concepts.
 An understanding to deal with the major implications of human psychology for
financial decision-makers and for financial markets.
 An ability to make better investment decisions.

Text-Books.
1. William Forbes, (Latest Edition), Behavioural Finance, John Wiley and Sons.
2. Kahneman, Daniel and Tversky, Amos, (Latest Edition), Choices, Values and Frames,
Cambridge University Press.
3. Shleifer, Andrei, (Latest Edition), Inefficient Markets-An Introduction to Behavioral Finance,
Oxford University Press.
4. Thaler, Richard and Barberis, Nicholas, (2002), A Survey of Behavioral Finance.
Reference-Books
1. H. Kent Baker, John R. Nofsinger, (Latest Edition), Behavioural Finance: Investors,

Corporations, and Markets, John Wileyand Sons.
2. Lucy Ackert, Richard Deaves, (Latest Edition), Behavioral Finance: Psychology, Decision-
Making, and Markets, Cengage.
1. Journal of Behavioral and Experimental Finance, ELSEVIER

2. Journal of Behavioral Finance, Taylor and Francis Online

MB826.3: CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING (CR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To let students appreciate the process of how investors, managers, and legal frameworks
pursue restructurings in Indian and global economy. We will do this through a series of
case studies.
 To increase students understanding and appreciation of some of the strategies, models
and financial concepts specifically in the restructuring process.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
 Meaning of Corporate Restructuring
 Need and Scope of Corporate Restructuring
1  Forms of Corporate Restructuring 08
 Historical Background
 National Scenario
 Global Scenario
Strategies
 Mergers
 Acquisition
2 08
 Takeovers
 Disinvestment and Strategic Alliances
 Demergers and Hiving Off
Mergers and Amalgamation
 Meaning and Concept
 Legal, Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and
3
Financial Aspects of Merger and Amalgamation 08
 Interest of Small Investors
 Amalgamation of Banking Companies
 Cross Border Mergers
Takeovers
 Meaning and Concept
 Types of Takeovers
4  Legal Aspects of Takeover- SEBI Regulations
08
 Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and Financial
Aspects of Takeover
 Takeover and Defence Tactics
 Cross Border Takeovers
Funding of Mergers and Takeovers
5 08
 Financial Alternatives

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Equity and Preference Shares
o Options and Securities
o Funding through Financial Institutions and Banks
o Rehabilitation Finance
o Management Buyout / Leveraged Buyout
Valuation of Shares and Business
 Introduction
6  Need and Purpose 08
 Factors Influencing Valuation
 Methods of Valuation of Shares
Corporate Demergers and Reverse Mergers
 Concepts of Demerger and Reverse Mergers
7  Modes of Demerger 08
 Legal, Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and
Financial Aspects
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

At the end of the course,
 The students would be able to develop an understanding of Mergers and

Acquisitions as significant economic activity.
 It would enable the students to evaluate the firm‟s decision and areas affected by
Restructuring.
Text-Books
1. Dr. K.R. Chandrate, (Latest Edition), Corporate Restructuring, Bharat Law House Pvt.
Ltd
2. Prasad G. Godbole, (Latest Edition), Mergers Acquisitions and Corporate Restructuring,
Vikas Publication.
3. B Rajesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Mergers and Acquisitions: Text and Cases TATA
McGraw Hill Publications
4. James Fred Weston, Mark Mitchell, Harold Mullerin, (Latest Edition), Takeovers,
Restructuring and Corporate Governance, Pearson Education.
5. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Theory and Practice, TATA
McGraw Hill Publications.

Reference-Books
1. Brealey, Mayers, (Latest Edition), Principles of Corporate Finance, TATA McGraw Hill
Publications.
2. I M Pandey and Ramesh Bhatt, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, TATA
McGraw Hill Publications.
3. Pandey and Bhat, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
(CFM).
4. Robert F. Bruner, (Latest Edition), Case Studies in Finance, Tata McGraw-Hill. (CSF)
5. Dr. J.C. Verma, (Latest Edition), Corporate Mergers and Takeovers, Bharath Publishing
House.
6. Companies Act 2013.

1. Economic Times
3. Indian Journal of Finance
4. Chartered Financial Analyst
5. Business Today / India / World
6. CFA Reader
8. Journal of Applied Finance

MB827.3: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE (IF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To familiarize the students to the arena of international finance.

 To introduce students to foreign exchange markets (arbitrage, speculation,
hedging) and foreign exchange arithmetic will be introduced.
 To introduce students to factors influencing the prices of currency derivatives,
relationship between of exchange rates and dynamics of fundamental economic
factors (balance of payments, inflation, interest rates, and market expectations)
will be covered.
III. Course Outline

Topics/Title
No. Sessions
Foundations of International Financial Management
 Strategizing Around the Globe
 Globalization and the Multinational Firm
 International Monetary System 08
1
 Balance of Payments
 The Market for Foreign Exchange
 International Parity Relationship and Forecasting Foreign
Exchange Rate
Exchange Arithmetic
 Forward Exchange Contracts
 Forward Exchange Rates Based on Cross rates
2 08
 Interbank Deals
 Execution of Forward Contract
 Cancellation or Extension of Forward Contract
Foreign Trade Contracts and Documents
 Incoterms
3  Letters of Credit-Meaning and Mechanism 08
 Types of Letters of Credit
 Operation of a Letter of Credit
Finance of Foreign Trade
 Financing Exports
 Post Shipment Finance
4  Project Exports and Investment Abroad 08
 Export-Import Bank of India
 Export Credit Insurance
 Financing Imports
5 World Financial Markets 08

Topics/Title
No. Sessions
 International Banking and Money Market
 International Bond Market
 International Equity Market
 Futures and Options on Foreign Exchange
 Currency and Interest Rate Swaps
 International Portfolio Investment
Foreign Exchange Exposure and Management
 Management of Economic Exposure
6 08
 Management of Transaction Exposure
 Management of Translation Exposure
Financial Management of the Multinational Firm
7  Foreign Direct Investment and Cross-Border Acquisitions 08
 Multinational Cash Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
 The nuances of foreign exchange transactions.

 The ability to know the factors that drive exchange rates particularly interest rates
and inflation dynamics.
 Awareness of the important changes happening in the international finance.
Text-Books
1. Eun Resnick, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill
2. C. Jeevanandam, (Latest Edition), Foreign Exchange and Risk management, Sultan Chand
and Sons.
Reference-Books
1. P. G. Apte, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, PHI.

2. Madhu Vij, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, Excel Books.
3. J. Madura, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, South Western
Publication.
4. Alen Shapiro, (Latest Edition), Multinational Financial Management, John Wiley
Publication.
5. H. P. Bhardwaj (Latest Edition), Foreign Exchange Handbook, Bhardwaj Publishing Co.

1. Indian Economic Review
2. Economic and Political Review
3. Finance India
5. Journal of Finance
6. Business Newspapers
 Business Standard
 The Economic Times
 Financial Express

MB828.3 DEVELOPMENT BANKING, RURAL AND
MICROFINANCE (DBRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop abilities to assess the banking and credit needs of the rural people
 To develop capabilities to tackle the challenges in dealing with the rural poor and
financial exclusion
 To develop skills to tap social capital for the economic development of rural areas
 To sensitize the students to the key issues linked to the whole discourse on social
banking including the challenges inherent therein, in the particular context of India,
and to familiarize them (the students) with the initiatives taken in the country for
addressing the said issues.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Developments in Development Banking
 Evolution of the Concept
 The 20th Century Developments
1 08
 Experiments in India
o Private Initiatives
o State Initiatives
Developments after Independence
 Industrial Finance Corporation of India
 State Financial Corporations
 Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India
 National Industrial Development Corporation
 Life Insurance Corporation of India
2  Refinance Corporation of India 08
 State Industrial Development Corporations
 Unit Trust of India
 Industrial Development Bank of India
 Industrial Reconstruction Bank of India
 General Insurance Corporation of India
Present Structure of Development Banking in India
Financing Rural Development
 Introduction to Rural Finance
 Regulation of Rural Financial Services
3 08
 Rural Credit Institutions
 Financing Agriculture / Allied Activities
 Financing Rural Non-Farm Sectors.

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 SME Finance
Problems and Prospects in Rural Banking
 Problems of Rural Branches of Commercial Banks
o Transaction and Risk Costs
 Emerging Trends in Rural Banking
o Introduction to MFI‟s
 Micro Credit
 Self-Help Group
 NGO‟s
 Linkages with Banking
Introduction to Subsidy-Linked credit Programmes of
the Government like
 PMRY
 SGSY
4  SJSRY and SLRS, etc.
08
Initiatives of the Government (without Subsidy-Link)
like
 Kisan Credit Card (KCC) Scheme
 Financing of Agriclinic or Agribusiness Centres and the
Differential Rate of Interest (DRI) Scheme
Perspectives in Microfinance and Banking
 Introduction to Microfinance
5 08
 Evolution of Microfinance in India
 Microfinance Delivery Methodologies in Detail
Operational Aspects of Microfinance
 Financial Products and Services
 Revenue Models of Micro- Finance
6 o Profitability 08
o Efficiency
o Productivity
 Risk Management in Microfinance.
Microfinance and Development
 Microfinance and Women Empowerment
 Microfinance and Health
7  Microfinance, Micro-Entrepreneurship and Business 08
Development
 Microfinance and Education
 Microfinance and Networking and Linkage Building
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 Thorough knowledge of the concept of microfinance and how microfinance institutions

work, including the operational aspects of an SHG/MFI.
 The financial literacy of the students in microfinance and SME sector.
Text-Books
1. Debadutta K. Panda, (Latest Edition), Understanding Microfinance, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
2. Karmakar, (Latest Edition), Microfinance In India, SAGE INDIA.
3. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Micro-Finance: Perspectives and Operations, Macmillan India Ltd.
4. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Rural Banking, Macmillan India Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Mr Abhijit Roy, NCFM, (Latets Edition), Commercial Banking in India: A Beginners

Module.
2. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Principles and Practices of Banking, Macmillan.
3. A. Ranga Reddy, C. Rangarajan, (Latest Edition), Rural Banking and Overdues
Management, Mittal Publications.
4. Madhu Vij, (Latest Edition), Management of Financial Institutions in India, Anmol
Publications.
5. U.C. Patnaik,(Latest Edition), Rural Banking in India, Anmol Publications.

1. Journal of Microfinance
2. World Bank Economic Review

MB829.3: DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT (DRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To acquaint students with various derivative instruments, functioning of derivative

markets and their working mechanism.
 To help students understand different derivative strategies and its application.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Cash and Derivative Market
 Meaning and Types of Derivatives Instruments
 Forwards
1 08
 Future
 Option
 Swaps
Derivatives Markets in India
 Growth of Derivative Markets in India
2  Types of Traders-Hedger 08
 Arbitrageur and Speculation Regulatory Framework
Forward and Future Markets
 Introduction
 Mechanics of Forward and Future Market
3  Pricing of Forward and Future Markets 08
 Margins
 Open Interest Positions etc.
 Cost of Carry
Option Markets
 Options Basics
 Put
 Call
 Option Greeks
4
 Factors Affecting Option Prices 08
o Binomial Model
o Black Scholes
 Put Call Ration
 Open Interest
 Option Trading Strategies
Innovations in Indian Derivative Market
5  Introduction to Commodity and Currency Derivatives 08
 Purchasing Power Parity

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Covered Interest Arbitrage
 Currency Futures
o Arbitrage
o Hedging
o Speculation
 Interest Rates Futures
 Currency and Interest Rate Swaps
Application of Derivatives-I
 Analyzing Various Contract Specification
 Understanding Trading and Settlement Process
6 08
 Practical Calculation of Future Option Pricing
o The Binomial Model for Option Pricing
o Black and Scholes Option Pricing Model
Applications of Derivatives-II
 Applying Options and Futures Hedging Strategies on Real
Time Data from Exchanges I.E. Equity, Commodity and
7 08
Currency Exchanges
 Calculating Mark to Market Margins on Real Time Data
Base from Exchanges
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

At the end of the course, the students are expected
 To understand the mechanics, valuation and trading strategies of derivative market.

 To frame their own trading strategies in different market conditions.
 The understanding related to derivative markets and its instruments i.e. futures,
options, swaps etc… students are also expected to be able to appear and pass
certificates exams related to currency, commodity conducted by National Stock
Exchange, Bombay Stock Exchange and National Institute of Security Market
(established by SEBI), to enhance the placement and career opportunities.
Text-Book
1. Rajiv Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Derivatives and Risk Management, Oxford University.
Reference-Books
1. John C Hull, (Latest Edition), Future and Option Markets, Pearson Education.
2. Vohra and Bagri, (Latest Edition), Future and Options, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Patwari and Bhrgava, (Latest Edition), Options and Futures: An Indian Perspective, Jaico
Publishing House.
4. Rajiv Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Derivatives and Risk Management, Oxford University.

5. NSE‟s Certification for Derivative Market, (NCFM) Modules workbook.
1. Business Line
2. Mint

HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB835.3: HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT (HRD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To help students to develop the understanding of HRD systems and process.

 To help students to develop HRD facilitator‟s skills; to develop and design HRD
programmes, to implement and control them in various organizational setup in
different sectors.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Human Resource Development
 The Evolution of HRD
 Relationship between HRM and HRD
 Major HRD Function
05
1  Roles and Competencies of HRD Professional
 HRD Methods
 Need for HRD
 Need for HRD in the Indian Context
Planning and Organizing the HRD System
 Planning the HRD System
 HRD Philosophy
2  HRD Objectives 08
 HRD Policies and Practices
 HRD Sub-Systems
 HRD Strategy and Action Plans
Assessing HRD Needs
 Strategic / Organizational Analysis, Task analysis and
Personal Analysis
3 08
 Importance of Identifying Individual Performance Deficiencies
and Developmental Needs in Planning and Developing
Training and HRD Programs
Competency Mapping and Potential Appraisal
 Introduction
 Methodology for Competency Mapping
 Implementation and its Implication
4 06
 Designing and Managing Assessment Centers
 To Study the Potential Appraisal System and Linking to other
Systems
 Multi Rater Assessment Feedback System (MAFS)

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
HRD Competencies
 Challenges
 Professionalism in HR
 Myths and Realities of HRD
5 10
 Competencies Needed
 Auditing HRD Competencies
 Individual Interviews, Group Interviews, Observation
 HRD Audit Instruments
Designing, Implementing and Evaluating HRD Programs
 Defining the Objective of HRD Intervention
 Selecting and Preparing Training Plan, Methods and
6 Materials 10
 Training Delivery Methods
 Issues Concerning Training Programs and Implementation
 HRD Evaluation – Purpose, Design and Ethical Issues
Employee Counseling (EC) and Wellness Services
 EC as an HRD Activity
7  Employee Assistance Programs 08
 Stress Management Intervention
 Employee Wellness and Health Promotion Programs
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


the following components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute – Level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute – level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
marks of the course.
Text-Books
1. Randy Desimore and John Werner, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development,
Thomson south – Western Publications.
2. Udai Parekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Designing and Managing Human Resource
System, Oxford and Oxford Publication, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. P.C. Tripathi, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development, Sultan Chand and Sons,
New Delhi.
2. P.P Arya and B.B Tandon, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development, Deep and
Deep Publication
3. Udai Parekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Understanding HRD System, Mcgraw Hill
Publication.
4. V.D. Dhudeja, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and Development,
Common wealth Publishers, New Delhi.


3. Human Capital

MB836.3: HUMAN RESOURCE INFORMATION SYSTEM
(HRIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To enable students to gain knowledge of human resource information systems and its
significance in functional application within the organization.
 To understand the ways in which HRIS are bought or developed and implemented for
various levels in organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Concepts
 Evolution of HRMS
1  Employee Life Cycle 06
 HRIS System Life Cycle
 Role HRIS in Functioning of HR Department
Pre-Implementation Stage
 Packaged HRIS
 Business Process Re-Engineering
 Enterprise Resource Planning Systems
 HRIS Planning
2 06
 HRIS Expectation
 Productivity through HRIS
 HRIS Cost-Benefit Value Analysis
 Getting Management Support for HRIS
 Limitations of Computerization of HRIS
HRIS Needs Analysis
 System Development Life Cycle (SDLC)
3  HRIS – Long Range Planning 08
 HRIS –Short Range Planning
 Gap Analysis
Application of HRIS
 Organisation Design and Management
 HRP and Recruitment
 Employee Administration and Data
4  Maintaining Payrolls 12
 Generating Leaves Records
 Time Management
 Travel Expenses
 Benefits of HRIS

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Global Employee Management
o HR Administration
o Training and Learning
 Talent Management
 Integration and Interfacing
Implementation
 HRIS Implementation Life Cycle
 Systems Integration – Analysis, Design, Build and Deploy
 Project Management and Governance
 Time lines
5  Contingency Plans 10
 Challenges Faced during the Implementation of HRIS
Developing the HRIS
 Tools in HRIS Development
 HR Responsibility in each Phase of HRIS Development
 HRIS in Large and Small Organizations
HR Data and Security
 Managing HR Data
6  Data Discussion by HRIS Modules 08
 Security and Access to Data
 Data Transmissions
HR Data Challenges and HR Shared Services
 Historical Data and Data Achieved
 HR Transactions-Pay Roll, Tax Processing
 HR Shared Services
HR Operations
7 05
 Run Time and Maintenance
 Managing Changes to Business
 Managing Changes to Systems
 Reporting and Analytics
 Measuring Operations and Success
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the principles of designing the Pay structure in Compensation

Management and
 Inquisitiveness in knowing, appreciating and comparing the different dimensions of
compensation structure across the industries

Text-Book
1. Satish M Badgi, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Information Systems, PHI Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Michel J. Kavanagh, Mohan Thite, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Information

Systems- Basics, Applications and Future Decisions, Sage Publications.
2. Alfred J. Walker, Towers Perrin, Steven Fein, (Latest Edition), Web-Based Human
Resources: The Technologies and Trends that are Transforming HR, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Human Capital

MB837.3: COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT (CM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To enable the students to understand the principles underlying the compensation

structure.
 To appreciate and adopt their understanding of significance of compensation
management in maintaining the organisation‟s competence.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Compensation Management
 Compensation - Definition
1  Forms of Pay 06
 A Pay Model
 Strategic Pay Decisions Guided by the Pay Models
Pay strategy: The Totality of Decisions
 Developing a Total Compensation Strategy
2 06
 Source of Competitive Advantage
 “Best Practices” and “Best Fit”
Internal Alignment: Determining the Structure
 Defining Internal Alignment
3  Strategic Choices in Designing Internal Structures 08
 Job Based Structures
 Person Based Structures
External Competitiveness: Determining the Pay
Level
 Defining Competitiveness
 Organisation Factors
4 08
 Industry and Technology
 Employer Size
 People‟s Preference.
 Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives
Designing Pay Levels, Mix and Pay structures
5  Surveying Market and Compensation Practices 10
 Designing a Base Pay structure
Employee Contributions: Determining Individual
Pay
6  Pay for Performance Plans 10
 Designing Pay for Performance
 Performance Appraisals

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Statutory Benefits Including Health Care
 Employee Welfare
 Retirement Benefits
Compensation Strategy for Special Groups
 Corporate Directors
7  Executives 06
 Scientists and Engineers in High Technology Industries
 Contingent Workers
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An appreciation of the principles of designing the Pay structure in Compensation

Management and
 Inquisitiveness in knowing, appreciating and comparing the different dimensions of
compensation structure across the industries
Text-Book
1. George T. Milkovich, Jerry M. Newman, C. S. Venkata Ratnam, (Latest Edition),
Compensation (SIE), Tata McGraw Hill
Reference-Book
1. Richard I Henderson, (Latest Edition), Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based

World, Tata McGraw Hill
1. Compensation and Benefit Review

MB838.3: INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
(IHRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce the diversity of HRM in an international context and the key HR/ER
challenges facing organizations working internationally.
 To give inputs regarding cross-cultural management and to measure the impact of
national culture on how individuals react to HR/ER interventions in different
countries.
 To study the impact of national institutions and systems on designing HR/ER
policies and practices in different countries.
 To identify the linkage between corporate internationalization strategies and IHRM
strategies, and how multinational organizations manage the global-local dilemma.
 To study the impact of internationalization on the role of HR professionals in
multinational organizations.
II. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Overview
 Defining International HRM
 Difference between Domestic and International HRM
 Approaches to Staffing
 Transferring Staff for International Business Activities
1 08
 The Role of an Expatriates
 The Role of Non-Expatriates
 The Role of the Corporate HR Functions
 Understanding Culture, its Coverage, Determinants
 Cross Cultural Theory
The Organizational Context
 Approaches to IHRM
2  The Path to Global Status 08
 Control Mechanisms
 Mode of Operation
Recruiting and Selecting Staff for International Assignments
Performance Management
 Staffing Policies
3  Selection Criteria 10
 Issues in Staff Selection
 Factors Associated with Individual Performance
 Appraisal Criteria for Appraising International Employees

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Training and Development
 Types of Cross Cultural Training
 Expatriate Training
 Components of Effective Pre-Departure Training 08
4  Developing International Staff
 Developing Staff through
 Dual Career Couples
International Compensation System
 Objectives
5 08
 Approaches to International Compensation
 Practices to International Compensation
Repatriation
 The Repatriation Process
6  Repatriation Process 08
 Individual Reactions to Re-Entry
 Designing a Repatriation Program
Industrial Relations
 Introduction
7  Key Issues in International Industrial Relations 06
 The Response of Trade Unions to Multinationals
 The Issues of Social Dumping
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to diagnose and explain the factors that influence the success or
otherwise of an international expatriate assignment.
 The ability to understand the international human resource management strategies
and practices developed and implemented by organizations operating on a global
basis.
 The ability to critically assess and evaluate the cultural impact on IHRM strategies
and practices in the organizational setting.
Text-Books
1. Peter J. Dowling, Denice E. Welch, Randall Schuler, (Latest Edition), International

Human Resource Management: Managing People In Multinational Context, Southwestern
Thomson Learning.
2. Tony Edwards, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Pearson
Education.
3. Terence Jackson, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management A Cross-
Cultural Approach, Sage Publication.
4. Sinha and Shekhar, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations, Trade Unions and Labour
Legislations.

Reference-Books
1. Brewster, Chris and Sparrow, Paul, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource
Management, University Press.
2. Betty Jane Punnett, (Latest Edition), International Perspectives on Organizational Behavior
and Human Resource Management, Sage Publications.
3. Monier Tayeb, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Oxford.
4. P Subba Rao, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Himalaya
Publications.
5. Pritam Singh, Sabir, (Latest Edition), Organizing and Managing in the Era of Globalization,
Sage Publications.
6. Paul Evans and Vladimir Pucik, (Latest Edition), The Global Challenge: Frameworks for
International Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill.
7. Randall S. Schuler, Dennis R Briscoe and Lisbeth Claus, (Latest Edition), International
Human Resource Management (Global HRM), T and F Books.
2. The International Journal for cross culture Management

3. The International Journal of Human Resource Management
4. International Journal of Human Resources Development and Management
5. International Journal for Applied HRM
6. HRM Review
7. Human Capital
Websites
1. www.inderscience.com/info/inarticletoc.php?jcode=ijhrdm
2. http://www.ihrim.org/
3. http://www.cihrm.jbs.cam.ac.uk/
4. http://global-sei.com/ghrm/

MB839.3: INDUSTRIAL JURISPREUDANCE (IJ)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To induct the students to the principles governing industrial adjudication with

special reference to the various legal concepts as applicable to industrial law
through a process of case analysis and reasoning covering almost all the important
pieces of labour legislation.
 To help students to gain and apply the knowledge of the doctrine and the rules of
jurisprudence.
 To help students to interpret various statutes and the rules of natural justice.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Jurisprudence
 Meaning and Scope
1  Principles of Industrial Adjudication 05
 Statutory Construction
 Legal Concepts as Applied to Industrial Law
Constitution and Labour Legislation
Legal Concepts
 Rights (Moral vs. Legal)
 Wrongs (Public vs. Private)
 Liability (Direct vs. Vicarious)
2 10
 Obligations
 Duties
 Powers
 Immunity
 Disability
Doctrines and Rules of Jurisprudence and
Interpretation of Statutes
 Status vs. Contract
 Freedom of Contract
 Contract of Service vs. Contract for Service
 National Extension of Employment
3 10
 Apportionment of Blame
 Implied Power
 Error of Fact vs. Error of Law
 Error of Law Apparent on the Face of the Record
 Relation Back
 Mischief Rule

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Rule of Hard Cases
Basic Judicial Terminologies
 Judicial Precedent
4  Judicial Hierarch 06
 Judicial Activism
 Judicial Inconsistency and Unpredictability
Introduction to Latin Terminologies
 Ultra Vires
 Res Judicata
 Ejusdem Generis
5 06
 Noscitur a Sociis
 Ratio Decidendi
 Obiter Dicta
 Stare Decisis
Rules of Natural Justice
6  Perverse Finding - Bias vs. Perverse Finding 08
 Ipse Dixit
Analysis of Various Pieces of Labour Legislation with
7 Reference to the Legal Concepts, Doctrines and 10
Principles
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 Understanding of the basic concepts of industrial jurisprudence and insights into

analysing and learning from the live cases in the area of industrial jurisprudence.
Text-Book
1. E. M. Rao, (Latest Edition), Industrial Jurisprudence A Critical Commentary, Lexix Nexix

Publications.
Reference-Book
1. V. R. Krishna Iyer, (Latest Edition), Social Justice and Labour Jurisprudence, Sage
Publications.
1. The Hindu
2. Columbia Law Review: The Development of Industrial Jurisprudence

INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
MANAGEMENT
ELCTIVES

MB845.3: DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING (DWDM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce the concept of data mining with in detail coverage of basic tasks,
metrics, issues, and implication. Core topics like classification, clustering and
association rules are exhaustively dealt with.
 To introduce the concept of data warehousing with special emphasis on
architecture and design.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Data Warehousing Introduction
 Data Warehouse System Study Data Warehouse Users
1 06
 Need for Data Warehouse
 Applications of Data Warehouse Concepts
The Data Warehouse Data Base
 Context of Data Warehouse Data Base
 Data Base Structures
 Organizing Relational Data Warehouse
 Multi-Dimensional Data Structures
 Choosing a Structure, Getting Data into the Data Warehouse
2 08
 Extraction, Transformation, Cleaning, Loading and
Summarization
 Meta Data
 Human Meta Data
 Computer Based Meta Data for People to use
 Computer-Based Meta Data for the Computer to use
Introduction : Data Mining
 Functionalities
 Classification of Data Mining Systems
 Major Issues in Data Mining
3  Multi Dimensional Model 08
 Data Warehouse Architecture
 Data Warehouse Implementation
 Future Development of Data Cube Technology
 Data Mining for Business Intelligence with Cases
Data Preprocessing
4  Data Cleaning 08
 Data Integration and Transformation

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Data Reduction
 Concept Hierarchy Generation
 Data Mining Primitives: What defines a Data Mining Tasks?
Mining Association Rules in Large Databases
 Association Rule Mining
 Mining Single Dimensional
5 10
 Boolean Association Rule from Transactional Databases
 Mining Multidimensional Association Rules from Relational
Databases and Data Warehouses
Classification and Prediction
 What is Classification
6  Issues Regarding Classification 08
 Classification by Decision Tree Induction
 Bayesian Classification
Cluster Analysis
 Types of Data in Cluster Analysis
7  Categorization of Major Clustering Methods 08
 Partitioning Methods
 Hierarchical Methods
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to identify the key processes of data mining, data warehousing
and knowledge discovery process.
 The ability to describe the basic principles and algorithms used in practical data
mining and understand their strengths and weaknesses.
 The ability to apply data mining techniques to solve problems in other disciplines in
a mathematical way.
 The ability to apply data mining methodologies with information systems and
generate results which can be immediately used for decision making in well-defined
business problems.
Text-Books
1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, (Latest Edition), Data Mining – Concepts and
Techniques, Harcourt India.
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, (Latest Edition), Data Mining – Concepts and
Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers.

Reference-Books
1. McLaren and McLaren, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing and Data Mining, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. Alex Berson, Stephen Smith and Kurt Thearling, (Latest Edition), Building Data
Mining Applications for CRM, TMH.
3. Richard T Watson, (Latest Edition), Data Management Data Bases and Organizations,
John Wiley and Sons.
4. Gary W Hansen, James V Hansen, (Latest Edition), Data Base Management and Design,
PHI New Delhi.
5. Hector Garcia, Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Jennifer Widom, (Latest Edition), Data
Base System Implementation, Pearson Education.
6. Arun K Majumdar, Primtimoy Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Data Base
Management Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
7. Efrem G Mallach, (Latest Edition), Decision Support and Data Warehouse Systems, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
8. Michael J. A. Berry, Gordon S. Linoff, (Latest Edition), Mastering Data Mining, John
Wiley and Sons.
9. Marakas, (Latest Edition), Modern Data Warehousing, Minning, and Visualization Core
Concepts, Pearson Education.
10. Richard Pike and Bill Neale, (Latest Edition), Corporate Finance and Investment-
Decisions and Strategies, PHI.
1. The IUP Journal of Information Technology.

2. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application.
3. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems.
4. International Journal of Mobile Communication and Networking.
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing.

MB846.3: BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING (BPR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To understand what and how business processes can be radically improved,

dramatically reducing process cycle time and cost, improving the quality of the
process products or outcomes.
 To understand challenges and opportunities for BPE across the process life cycle
using technologies.
 To understand and apply knowledge-based concepts, techniques, and tools for
BPR centered on Electronic Commerce and network information system
applications.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to BPR
 Re-Engineering and Its Relationship with Functional Areas of
Business
 History of Re-Engineering
1  Suggested Re-Engineering Framework 06
 Deterministic Machines
 Complex Dynamic System
 Interacting Feedback Loops and Social Constructs
Perspectives of BPR
Managing Process Flows
 Business Process and Flows – Through Put Rate
 Work-in-Process
 Cycle Time
2  Little‟s Law 10
 Cycle Time and Capacity Analysis – Cycle Time Analysis
 Capacity Analysis
 Managing Cycle Time and Capacity – Cycle Time Reduction
 Theory of Constraints
Implementation Process
 Redesign of Business Processes – Systematic or Clean Sheet
 Main and Supporting Processes
3  Rationale of BPR 08
 Key Enablers of BPR
 Technology for BPR
 Critical Success Factors

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Cross Functional Teams
 Mentoring and Facilitating
 Models and Methodologies of BPR
 Tools and Techniques of BPR
Making Effective BPR
 Virtual Ingredient – People, Top Management‟s Involvement,
Involvement of Consultants,
 Empowerment and Autonomy
4  The IT „Black Hole‟ 08
 Using Process Simulation to Minimize the Risk
 Business Process Map and Simulation Model
 Parameter Analysis
 Simulation and Key Performance Indicators
Change Management in BPR
 Introduction
5  Process of Change 08
 Management of Change in BPR
 Strategic Aspects of BPR
Concept of Quality Management
 Managing for Quality
 Impact of Quality Management in Business and Commerce
 Quality Assurance
6 08
 Statistical Quality Control
 Recent Trends in Quality Management Role of Bench Marking
and Business Process Engineering in TQM
ERP and BPR
 ERP in Modeling Business Processes
 Workflow Management Systems in BPR
 Steps of BPR
 Description of the Case Company, Business Case
7  Five-Stage Model of AS-IS/TO-BE Analysis 08
 Managing Implementation
 Business Process Management
 Process Centric Organizations
 Business Process Maturity Model
 Business Process Performance Measurement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to understand the concepts, views, and latest methodologies of BP

design and participate in and contribute to process design/redesign efforts in
organisations.

 The ability to utilize software tools to assist in business process design and
understanding of issues pertaining to organisational design and organisational
change management in the context of business process management.
 An understanding of the key processes involved in business networks; and the key
concepts in the design and utilisation of best business practices embedded in the
lean philosophy.
Text-Books
1. Holt, Jon, (Latest Edition), A Pragmatic Guide to Business Process Modelling, BCS Books.
2. Hansen, (Latest Edition), Automating Business Process Re-Engineering, Prentice-Hall.
3. Laguna, (Latest Edition), Business Process Modeling, Simulation and Design, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. Re-engineering: Blueprint for the Future, (Latest Edition), International Engineering
Consortium.
2. Martyn A Ould, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management: A Rigorous Approach,
BCS Books.
3. G. Darnton and M. Darnton, (Latest Edition), Business Process Analysis, Thompson
Business Press, Boston.
4. D. Kosiur, (Latest Edition), Understanding Electronic Commerce, Microsoft Press,
Redmond.
5. R. Bernard, (Latest Edition), The Corporate Intranet, John Wiley and Sons.
6. R. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Business Process Reengineering.
7. Chan Meng Khoong, (Latest Edition), Re-Engineering In Action, Cambridge.
8. Charles Poirier, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management Applied, Cengage.
9. Martyn A. Ould, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management, BCS Viva Books.
10. Tony Carter, (Latest Edition), The Aftermath of Re-engineering, Viva Books.
11. Dey, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, Wiley.
12. K. Sridhra Bhat, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, HPH.
13. Saxena K.B.C., (Latest Edition), Business Process Outsourcing, Excel.
14. Mahadeo Jaiswal, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, McMillan.
15. M.S. Jayaraman, et al, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, TMH.
16. Varun Grover, M. Lynne Markus, (Latest Edition), Business Process Transformation,
PHI.
17. Daniel Minoli, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, Routledge.


MB847.3: INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAW (ISCL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide attendees with a thorough understanding of the issues associated

with the design, provision and management of security services for modern
communication and information systems.
 To learn different aspects of information and network security.
 To provide the concepts, properties, and functions of computer/information
systems security and controls.
 To enable the students to learn the tools and techniques for protecting the
documents, databases and computers from unauthorized access.
 To understand Legal and ethical aspects and management‟s role in planning the
security program are also included.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Security
 Definition of Security
 Assessing Security
 Security Terminology
1 06
 Historical Developments
 Structure of Security
 Meaning of Security Attacks, Computer Crime, Methods of
Defense, Encryption
Cryptography
 Applications of Cryptography
 Terminology
2 08
 Evolution of Cryptography, Caesar Ciphers, One-Time Pads
 Operation of DES, AES
 Public-Key Cryptosystems
Topics in Information Systems Security
 Minimum Privilege
 Compartmentalization
 Dual Controls
3 08
 Security Perimeters
 Trustworthy Software
 Proof of Design Correctness
 Single-Points-of Failure

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Covert Channels
 Inference
 Security Models
Security Protocols
 Zero-Knowledge Proofs
 Subliminal Channels
 Oblivious Transfer
 Digital Signature Schemes
4 08
 Bit Commitment
 Digital Cash
 Secure Contract Signing
 Secure Voting
 Digital Certified Mail
Operating Systems Security
 Access Control
 File Protection
5 08
 User Authentication
 Security Policies
 Models of Security
Cyberspace Laws and Cyber Crimes
6  International Efforts Related to Cyberspace Laws 08
 Council of Europe (COE) Convention on Cyber Crimes
Penalties, Compensation and Offences Under the
Cyberspace and Internet in India
 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) in Cyber Law
 Penalties, Compensation and Adjudication of Violations of
7 10
Provisions of IT Act and Judicial Review
 Some Important Offences under the Cyberspace Law and the
Internet in India
 Other Offences under the Information Technology Act in India
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
 The ability to describe the fundamental concepts of information system security

and to understand the terms of security policy, host based security, firewall,
packet filtering and intrusion detection.
 The ability to use various software tools to analyze network and host
vulnerabilities and to design systems that comply with commonly accepted
security standards.
 To differentiate threats to information systems from attacks against information
systems and laws and ethics.

Text-Books
1. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, (Latest Edition), Security in

Computing, Pearson Prentice Hall.
2. Bruce Schneier, (Latest Edition), Secrets and Lies: Digital Security in a Networked World,
Wiley.
3. Stamp, (Latest Edition), Information Securtiy: Principles and Practice, Wiley.
4. Whitman and Mattford, (Latest Edition), Principles of Information Security, Cengage
or Thomson.
5. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belapure, (Latest Edition), Cyber Security, Wiley.
6. Chander, Harish, (Latest Edition), Cyber Laws and It Protection, PHI Learning
Reference-Books
1. Bruce Schneier, (Latest Edition), Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms, and Source
Code in C, Wiley.
2. Matt Bishop, (Latest Edition), Computer Security: Art and Science, Addison-Wesley.
3. William Stallings, (Latest Edition), Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and
Practices, Prentice Hall.
4. John Viega and Gary McGraw, (Latest Edition), Building Secure Software: How to Avoid
Security Problems the Right Way, Addison-Wesley.
5. Mark Graff and Kenneth van Wyk, (Latest Edition), Secure Coding: Principles and
Practices, O‟Reilly.
6. D. Stinson, (Latest Edition), Cryptography Theory and Practice, RCR press, USA.
1. Journal of Information Security.

Websites
1. http://www.jissec.org
2. http://www.acm.org
3. http://www.computer.org

MB848.3: INFORMATION SYSTEMS AUDIT (ISA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To gain application ability of necessary controls, laws and standards in

computerized Information system. The objectives are also covers
 To gain an appreciation for the difficulties in assessing systems effectiveness and
efficiency
 To understand the new system control risks created by the use of the internet for
business applications and electronic business.
 To identify auditor's objectives in performing an audit of a computerizes system
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Overview of Systems Audit
 Information Systems Audit
 Information Systems Auditor
 Legal Requirements of an Information Systems Audit
 Systems Environment and Information Systems Audit
1 06
 Information System Assets
 Classification of Controls
 The Impact of Computers on Information
 The Impact of Computers on Auditing
 Information Systems Audit Coverage
Hardware Security Issues
 Hardware Security Objective
 Peripheral Devices and Storage Media
 Client-Server Architecture
 Authentication Devices
 Hardware Acquisition
2 08
 Hardware Maintenance
 Management of Obsolescence
 Disposal of Equipment
 Problem Management
 Change Management
 Network and Communication Issues
Software Security Issues
 Overview of Types of Software
3 08
 Elements of Software Security
 Control Issues during Installation and Maintenance

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
 Licensing Issues
 Problem and Change Management
Information Systems Audit Requirements
 Risk Analysis
 Threats, Vulnerability, Exposure, Likelihood, and Attack
 Information Systems Control Objectives
 Information Systems Audit Objectives
4 08
 System Effectiveness and Efficiency
 Information Systems Abuse
 Asset Safeguarding Objective and Process
 Evidence Collection and Evaluation
 Logs and Audit Trails as Evidence
Conducting an Information Systems Audit
 Audit Program
 Audit Plan
 Audit Procedures and Approaches
 System Understanding and Review
 Compliance Reviews and Tests
 Substantive Reviews and Tests
5  Audit Tools and Techniques 10
 Sampling Techniques
 Audit Questionnaire
 Audit Documentation
 Audit Report
 Auditing Approaches
 Sample Audit Work-Planning Memo
 Sample Audit Work Process Flow
Risk-Based Systems Audit
 Conducting a Risk-Based Information Systems Audit
 Risk Assessment
6  Risk Matrix 08
 Risk and Audit Sample Determination
 Audit Risk Assessment
 Risk Management Strategy
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan
 Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Process
 Business Impact Analysis
 Incident Response Plan
 Disaster Recovery Plan
7 08
 Types of Disaster Recovery Plans
 Emergency Preparedness Audit Checklist
 Business Continuity Strategies
 Business Resumption Plan Audit Checklist
 Recovery Procedures Testing Checklist

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
 Plan Maintenance Checklist
 Vital Records Retention Checklist
 Forms and Documents
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A conceptual framework of internal controls in a computer environment and

understanding of knowledge of the primary steps in conducting a risk assessment of
an IT system.
 The ability to describe the various phases of systems development from the
perspective of the auditor and review the evaluation and testing procedures for
General and Business Process Application Controls
Text-Books
1. Veena Hingarh, Arif Ahmed, (Latest Edition), Understanding and Conducting Information
Systems Auditing, Wiley.
2. R. Weber, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Control and Audit, Prentice Hall.
3. Managing Enterprise Information Integrity: Security, Control and Audit Issues, (Latest
Edition), IT Governance Institute.
4. Risks of Customer Relationship Management: A Security, Control, and Audit Approach, (Latest
Edition), Pricewater House Coopers Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. V. Raval, A. Fichadia, (Latest Edition), Risks, Controls and Security: Concepts and
Applications, Wiley.
2. J. E. Hunton, S. M. Bryant, N. A. Bagranoff, (Latest Edition), Core Concepts of
Information Technology Auditing, Wiley.
3. J. J. Champlain, (Latest Edition), Auditing Information Systems, Wiley.
4. A. H. James, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Auditing and Assurance, South-
Western.
5. EDP Auditors Foundation, (Latest Edition), EDP Journal Quarterly British Standard
BS.

MB849.3: MODELING AND ANALYSIS WITH SPREADSHEETS
(MAS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To model, analyze, solve, and interpret solutions to business decision problems
on spreadsheets.
 To develop, implement and utilize business models for managerial decision
making.
 To interpret model results in the context of the business situation.
 To demonstrate competence in using a spreadsheet for analysis.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Spreadsheet Modeling
 Deterministic, Stochastic and Optimization Models
 Formulas
1 06
 Formatting
 Printing
 Functions
Applications in Marketing, Sales and Supply Chain
 Relative or Absolute Cell References
 Structural Referencing (Named Ranges)
 Advanced Formulae
 Look-Up Tables
2 10
 Linking Disparate Workbooks
 Dynamic Linking
 Updating Links
 Integrating and Manipulating Data from External Sources
 Data Validation
Warehousing and Distribution Decision Making Lab
 Solver
3 08
 Goal-Seek
 Advanced formulae
Applications in Corporate Finance and Investments
 Advanced Formulae
 Charting and Presentations
4  Grouping Data 08
 Scenarios
 What-if Analysis
 Data Tables

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Break Even Analysis
Applications in Human Resources
 Working with large datasets
 Lookup Tables
5  Filtering 08
 Multiple Worksheets Linking
 Advanced Formulas and Macros
 Charting and Presentations
Linking Multiple Spreadsheets and Datasets with Access
 The Need for More Powerful Databases
 Relational Database Concept
6  Excel Vs. A Relational Database 08
 Table Creation and Table Field Properties
 Importing Spreadsheets
 Table Relationships
Data Warehouses and Integrating Data from Multiple
Sources
 Linking Disparate Spreadsheets and Datasets From Research
Insight
 Audit Analytics
 Building and Working with Sets in Research Insight
 Lookup Tables
 Auto, Advanced and Custom Filters
7 08
 Conditional Formatting
 Concatenation
 Text to Columns
 Transposing Data
 Converting Soft Text to Hard Text
 Summarizing Data with Measures of Central Tendency,
Frequency Tables, Charts and Graphs
 Pivot Tables and Pivot Charts
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An extensive knowledge and skills to apply electronic spreadsheets in business

decision-making and problem-solving.
 The ability to understand and be able to apply in business and accounting
selected intermediate and advanced features of electronic spreadsheets.
 The ability and skills to work with large data sets and integrate data from
different tables and sources.
 The ability to understand fundamental risks associated with using spreadsheets
and be able to take basic precautions to address them.
 The ability to understand the need for relational databases and use selected
features of a relationship database to enhance the capabilities of your
spreadsheet even more.

Text-Book
1. Kenneth R. Baker, (Latest Edition), Optimization Modeling with Spreadsheets,

Wiley.
Reference-Books
1. Denise Etheridge, (Latest Edition), Excel Data Analysis: Your Visual Blueprint for Creating
and Analyzing Data, Charts and PivotTables, Wiley.
2. Winston, Wayne L, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Excel Data Analysis and Business Modeling,
PHI.


HEALTH CARE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB855.3: HOSPITAL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (HOM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To gain an integrated understanding of strategic operations and its applicability

to health care industry
 To understand the importance of tools and techniques for reducing the costs and
improving the quality and overview of the significant environmental trends in
the healthcare industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Healthcare Operations
 The Challenge and the Opportunities
1 06
 History of Performance Improvements
 Evidence Based Medicine and Pay-For-Performance
Setting Goals and Executing Strategy
2  Strategy and the Balance Scorecard 08
 The Project Management
Performance Improvement Tools, Techniques and
Programs
 Tools for Problem Solving and Decision Making
3 10
 Using Data and Statistical Tools for Operations
Improvement
 Simulation
Application to Healthcare Operations Issue
 Process Improvement and Patient Flow
4 10
 Scheduling and Capacity Management
Putting it all together for Operational Excellence
 Holding the Gains
Materials Management
 Role of Computers in the Materials Function.
 Operations Research Techniques in the Materials Function
 Stores Management
5  Responsibilities and Functioning of Stores 08
 Types of Stores in Hospitals.
 Location and Layout of Stores
 Stock Verification Techniques
 Control of Pilferages.
 Inventory Control Techniques Purchase Management
 Disposal of Waste and Scrap Value Analysis

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Lean Enterprise
6  Lean Concepts and Health Care Applications 08
 Lean Processes Applied to Operating Room Performance
Total Quality Management in Health Care Institutes
 Quality Improvement
7 04
 Need for Quality Management Initiatives in Health Care
 Indian Health Care Organisation
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to analyse health care services management objectives and translate them
into output requirements, while integrating clinical and business information.
 The ability to compare the costs and benefits of various types of health care data
processing systems and make decisions regarding the purchase and use of such systems.
Text-Book
1. Daniel B McLaughlin and Julioe M Hays, (Latest Edition), HealthCare Operations

Management, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. James R. Langabeer, (Latest Edition), Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative

Approach to Business, Jones and Bartlett Learning.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management.

MB856.3: HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM
(HMIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide students with the ability to define operational and strategic objectives for
health services management information systems and to guide the design of systems to
meet those objectives.
 To emphasise on the conceptualization of variables to be included in such systems; the
design of the systems (including an understanding of hardware, software and
communication links) and the proper interpretation and utilization of processed
information for program management purpose.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Operational and Strategic uses of Information Systems
in Health Care Management
1 06
 Analysing Organisational Activities and Procedure Flow-
Chartings
Translating Organisational Activities into Output
2 Requirements 08
 Derivation of Input Content from Output Requirements
Data Quality Control
 Input Devices: Internal Organisation and Operation of
3 10
Computers
 Output Devices: Processing Modes and their Relative Costs
Health Care Application Software
4  Electronic Medical (Health) Records 10
 Patient Scheduling Software
Medical Records Privacy and Ethical Issues Related to
5 Patient Information 08
 Methods of used Authentication
Introduction to the Software’s Related to the Hospital
Management
 Hospital Management System
6  Payroll System 08
 Accounting System
 Inventory Control System and other Computer Applications
in Hospitals
Health Information Exchange (HIE)
7  Health Information Standards 04
 Health Information Security

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
 Consumer and Patient-Oriented Information Systems
 Clinical Information Systems and Value
 Meaningful Use and Health IT Policy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


care industry.
 A keen interest in observing various operations of hospital, aptitude for applying
Lean tools and techniques.
Text-Book
1. Austin, Charles J. and Stuart B. Boxerman, (Latest Edition), Information System for
Health Care Management, Health Administration Press.
Reference-Book
1. Alferd Winter, Reinhold Haux, (Latest Edition), Health Information System :

Architectures and Strategies, Springer Publications.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management

MB857.3: MEDICAL AUDIT AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT
(MA&QM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide an in-depth knowledge about the medical audit leading to TQM
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Medical Audit
 Definition
 Origins & Development in Medical Audit
 Medical Audit Policy
1  Concept of Medical Audit 08
 Medical Record
 Medical Audit Relationship
 Medical Audit related to Diagnosis, Investigations and
Therapy
Medical Audit – Global Perspective
 Types of Medical Audit
2 08
 Appraisal of Medical Audit
 Methods of Medical Audit
Quality Management
 Origin & Growth of Quality Management
 Importance and Significance of TQM for Hospitals
3  Prerequisites of Quality Management in Hospitals 10
 Role of Medical Record in Quality Management
 Quality Circles
 Quality Assurance
Quality Management in Hospital
 Front Office
 OPD
 Casualty
 Labs
4  OT 08
 CSSD
 Dietary, HK, ICU
 Nursing
 Laundry
 Canteen

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
TQM Tools
 Quality Function Deployment
 Concurrent Engineering
5  FEMA 08
 P.C.D.A. Cycle – JIT (Just in Time)
 Kaizan
 „O‟ Defect Programme
Statistical Tools in TQM
 Flow diagram
 Pareto Analysis
 Cause and effect diagram
6 08
 Control Charts
 Bench Marking
 Business Process Reengineering
 TQM practices in Indian Hospitals
Accreditation
 Introduction
 Concept of Hospital Accreditation
 Accreditation Scenario in India and Abroad
7 04
 Organisations, Authorities for Accreditations in India
 Accreditation Process
 Role of the Government in Developing an Accreditation
System.
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

care and environmental policies.
 A keen interest in observing health issues, scientific understanding of causes, and
possible future approaches to control of the major environmental health problems
Text-Book
1. D.C. Joshi and Mamta Joshi, Hospital Administration, published by Jaypee Brothers,
Medical Publishers, New Delhi, Latest Edition
2. Anjan Prakash, Medical Audit, published by Jaypee Brothers, Medical publishers (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, Latest Edition
Reference-Book
1. B.M.Sakharkar, Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning, published by Jaypee

Brothers, Medical Publishers (P) Ltd., New Delhi, Latest Edition

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management

MB858.3: HEALTH COMMUNICATION: DEVELOPMENT AND
DISSEMINATION (HCDD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To engage students in critical thinking (analyze and evaluate), creative thinking

(imagine and create), and practical thinking (solve problems and make decisions)
with regard to developing and evaluating public health communications campaigns.
 Within a broad ecological framework, assess the need and develop a macro,
strategic, partnership, implementation and evaluation plan for public health
communications.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Introduction
 An Overview of Substantive Areas of Study Within Health
 Communication Like Interpersonal
1 06
 Mass Media Health Images
 Communication Campaigning
 Alternative Medicine Health Ethics
Use of Artifacts
 Pamphlets, Print Ads, Video
2  Analysis the Rhetoric of Successful and Unsuccessful Health 08
Communication Campaign
 AIDS Awareness and Smoking Cessation
Health Information
 Plan, Deliver and Evaluate Health Information and Disease
3 10
Prevention Campaigns
 Advocate for Health Policy Initiatives
Manage Health Care Delivery Systems
 Produce the Written Material for A Healthy Campaigning
4 10
 Strategy Dissemination in Areas of Public Health Emerging
from Research
5 Develop A Television Programme or Health Literacy 08
Produce Material for Complex Disease
6 08
I. E Material for Genetic Counselling in Area of Inherited Disorders
7 Project/Presentation 06
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 Keen interest to develop advertisement and campaigns related to health care system.
Text-Book
1. Parvanta, C. F., Nelson, D. E., Parvanta, S. A., and Harner, R. N., (Latest Edition),
Essentials of Public Health Communication, Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Payers, Lynn, (Latest Edition), Medicine and Culture, New York, Henry Holt and
company.
2. DuPre, Athena, (Latest Edition), Communicating About Health; Current Issue and
Persepective , Mountain view, Mayfield publishing company.


MB859.3: LEGAL ASPECTS OF HEALTH CARE (LAHC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
The objective of this course is as follows:
 To provide basic understanding of legal foundations of health care in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Laws Relating to Hospital Formation
 Promotion-Forming Society
1  The Companies Act 06
 Law of Partnership
 A Sample Constitution for the Hospital
Laws Relating Purchases and Funding
 Law of Contracts
 Law of Insurance
2 08
 Export Import Policy
 FEMA
 Exemption of Income Tax For Donations
Laws Pertaining to Health
 Central Births and Deaths Registration Act, 1969
3 10
 Recent Amendments
 Infant Food Act, 1992
Laws Pertaining to Hospitals
 Transplantation of Human Organs Act, 1994
 Pre-Natal Diagnostic Techniques (Regulation and
Prevention of Misuse) Act, 1994
4 10
 Medical Negligence
 Medico Legal Case
 Dying Declaration
 MCI Act on Medical Education
The Biomedical Waste
5  Management and Handling 08
 Rules-Radiation Safety System
Laws Pertaining to Manufacture and Sale of Drugs
 Drugs and Cosmetics Acts, 1940
 Pharmacy Act, 1948
6  Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable 08
Advertisement) Act, 1954
 Poison Act, 1919
 Legislation for Tobacco Control

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Role of Governments
 Law In Promoting and Protecting Health
 Functions of Courts
7 04
 Legislatures
 Administrative Agencies in Relation to Health Care
Law and Policy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An understanding of relationship between the legal system, health care providers,

and patients; be able to identify and analyze legal issues in health care.
 An ability to effectively communicate, both orally and in writing, the interpretive
understanding of a case, statute, and regulatory scheme.
Text-Book
1. C .B. Memoria, (Latest Edition), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Jain Book depot.
Reference-Book
1. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Industrial Laws, Sultan Chand Publication.


PROJECT AND
INFRASTRUCTURE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB865.3:PROJECT AND INFRASTRUCTURE MARKETING AND
PRICING (PIMP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To understand Infrastructure Marketing and pricing practices in India.

 To understand policies and problems of Infrastructure Marketing and pricing
practices in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
1 Understanding Infrastructure 06
Infrastructure Marketing and Practices
 Marketing Infrastructure and Marketing Reforms
 Strategic Approach for Marketing
2  Marketing Environment 12
 Group Marketing
 Cooperative Marketing
 Direct Marketing
Infrastructure Pricing and Practices
 Selecting the Right Pricing
 Models for Infrastructure Services
3 12
 Pricing Principles
 Efficiency Concepts
 Incentive Models
Policies and Problems of Infrastructure Marketing and Pricing
 Project Outsourcing
 Price Benchmarking
4 12
 Pricing Trends
 Technology Pricing
 Licensing
5 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Railway 04
6 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Agriculture 04
7 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Transport Infrastructure 04
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An understanding about Infrastructure Marketing and pricing.

 An understanding of practical aspects of Infrastructure finance with the help of
cases.

Text-Book

MB866.3: PROJECT AND INFRASTRUCTURE FINANCING (PIF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide an understanding of financing technique that is widely used to finance

infrastructure projects.
 To give an exposure to the world of project finance on the areas of Project

structuring, understand the complexities of accurately constructing and
evaluating cash flows, Risk assessment and management in infrastructure projects,
Financing and valuation of infrastructure projects, PPP's in infrastructure.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Overview
1  Introduction to Project Finance 06
 Introduction to Infrastructure Projects
Uses of Project Finance
2  Motivations for Using Project Finance 08
 Unique Features of Infrastructure Projects
Essential Elements of Project Financing
 Trends in Project Financing
 Market for Project Finance
3 10
 Project Finance in the Power Sector
 Project Finance in the Roads Sector
 Project Finance in Airports
Different Sources of Finance
 Sources for Project Finance, Equity, Debt
4 08
 Multi-Lateral Agencies and Financial Institutions
 Project Leasing
Types of Finance Structure
 Special Purpose Vehicles
5  Structuring the Project Company 08
 Public Private Partnerships
 BOT, BOOT and other Form of Financing
Financial Analysis of Projects
 Valuation
 Free Cash Flows
6  Equity Cash Flows 08
 Project Risk Identification
 Assessment
 Management

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Credit Risk in Project Finance
 Basel Committee Recommendation
7 08
 Rating Grade Criteria
 Concept of Loss and Value at Risk
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to evaluate cash flows, Risk assessment and management in

infrastructure projects,
 Familiarity with all the issues related to financing and valuation of infrastructure
projects, PPP's in infrastructure.
Text-Books
1. Stefano Gatti,(Latest Edition),Project Finance in Theory and Practice, Academic Press.
Reference-Books
1. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition),Projects, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

2. Andrew Fight, (Latest Edition),Introduction to Project Finance, Elsevier Publications.
3. John Finnerty,(Latest Edition),Project Financing - Asset Based Financial Engineering, John
Wiley and Sons.
4. E.R. Yescombe,(Latest Edition),Principles of Project Finance, Allied Press.
Journal / Magazine / Newspaper
1. The International Journal for Project Management.

MB867.3: COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS OF PROJECTS (CBAP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide students the tools to evaluate projects for businesses, non-profit

organizations, and governments, as cost benefit analysis has to consider a proposal's
economic costs and benefits from a larger perspective.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
1  Overview of the Cost Benefit Analysis 06
 Overview of Infrastructure Projects
Financial Appraisal
 Review of Basic NPV
 Criteria for Project Evaluation
 Benefit-Cost Ratio
2 08
 IRR, and Pay-Back Period
 Choice of Discount Rate
 Dealing with Inflation
 Option Value
Resource Allocation and Welfare - Efficient Markets
 Efficiency of Competitive Markets
 MRS and Budget Constraints
 Consumer Choice
3 10
 Marginal Utility
 Pure Exchange
 Pareto Optimum
 The Fundamental Theorem of Welfare Economics
Valuation of Benefits and Costs - Consumer and Producer
Surplus and Dead Weight Loss
4 04
 Consumers and Producers Surpluses
 Efficient Equilibrium; Simple Distortions (Taxes and Quotas)
Market Failure- Monopoly Power and Asymmetric
Information
 Natural Monopoly
 Justifying Price Regulation and Quotas
5 08
 Rosen Hedonic Model and the Idea of Safety and Other Similar
Standards Pricing Issues
 Shadow Wages and Unemployment
 Monopoly Pricing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Traded-Non-Traded Goods and Border Pricing
Evaluating Projects that are Subject to Risk and Uncertainty
 Expected Value
6  Risk Aversion 04
 Certainty Equivalent
 Uncertainty and Irreversibility
CBA and Human Life
 The Value of Human Life
 CBAin Health and Health Care
7  Cost of Saving A Life or Reducing the Amount of Accidents 08
 The Value of Saving Time
 Investment in Human Capital
 Human Capital Projects
CBA and Society
 The Travel Time Method
 Contingent Valuation
 Irreversibility
 Inequality
8 08
 Social Welfare and Social Choice
 Income Distribution and Expenditure Programs for the Poor
 The Distribution Element of Projects
 The Use of Distributional Weights in Social CB Analysis
 Intergovernmental Grants
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
 An ability to apply economic principles towards an improved understanding of how

to assess all relevant costs and benefits of a particular project, action, policy or
program.
Text-Book
1. Anthony Boardman, David Greenberg, Aidan Vining, and David Weimer, (Latest
Edition), Cost Benefit Analysis – Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Boardman, Greenberg, Vining, and Weimer, (Latest Edition), Cost Benefit Analysis:
Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall Publications.
2. Hugo Priemus and Bent Flyvbjerb, (Latest Edition), Decision-Making On Mega-Projects:
Cost-Benefit Analysis, Planning and Innovation, Edward Elgar Publication.
Journal / Magazine / Newspaper

MB868.3: ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
(ESIA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To know the different principles and concepts of ecology and sustainable

development.
 To understand the basic concepts and principles of environmental impact
assessment (EIA).
 To understand the process and different methodologies of Environmental Impact
Assessment.
 To Know how to identify, predict and assess the impacts of a development project.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Principles of Ecology and Sustainable Development
 Ecology: Scope and Meaning
 The Ecosystem and its Components
1  Ecosystem Structure and Function 06
 Some Important Ecological Principles
 Community Properties
 Sustainable Development
Principles of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
 Definition of EIA
 Goals and Principles of EIA
 Role of EIA in Environmental Management, Planning and Decision-
2 10
Making and Development Planning
 Methods and Process of EIA
 Ways and Strategies for a Successful EIA
 EIA in the Project Cycle
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Regulatory
Framework
 Legal Framework of EIA
 Administrative Framework of EIA
3 10
 Coverage of the Philippine EIA System
 Monitoring and Enforcement in EIA
 Problems and Limitation of the Philippine EIS System
 Public Participation in EIA
Process and Methodologies of Environmental Impact
4 Assessment 08
 The Environmental Impact Assessment Process

Title/Topic
No Sessions
 Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies
Identification, Prediction and Assessment of Impacts
 Methods of Identification, Prediction and Assessment of Impacts of
Physical and Biological Resources
 Physical Resources (Air)
 Physical Resources (Soil)
5 10
 Physical Resources (Water)
 Biological Resources Plant and Animal Ecology
 Spatial Expansion of Agricultures
 Agricultural Intensification
 Impacts of Deforestation
Environmental Risk Assessment
 Purpose of ERA
 Uses of ERA
6 08
 Steps in ERA
 ERA Process
 Risk Management
7 ESIA in global Affairs 04
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise participatory and individual learning through active classroom
interaction and students‟ prior preparation. The course instructor is expected to prepare a
detailed session-wise schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the reading material and
case material for every session. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from
sources beyond the prescribed text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the
library, websites and other resources accessible to the students, the course instructor
should make the material available to the students well in advance, so that the students
can come prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The skills to propose development project plans for possible environmental effects
and prepare appropriate initial studies.
 The skills to utilize EIA documents for policy development, project planning or for
legal or political action planning.
Text-Book
1. Jain, R. K., (Latest Edition), Environmental Assessment, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Canter L., (Latest Edition), Environmental Impact Assessment, Mc Graw Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Latest Government / Other regulatory bodies Reports on ESIA.
1. Environmental Impact Assessment Review

MB869.3: THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS (TOC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To create an awareness of the Theory of Constraints as a new management

philosophy, based on physical sciences.
 To help create an appreciation of its potential for effective management in several
areas like operations management, project management, information management,
human resources management, etc.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Theory of Constraints
1 04
 Thinking Process, Constraints, Tools of TOC
Theory of Constraints (TOC)
 Inadequacy of Constrained Optimisation for Real-World
Management Problems
2  Re-look at Goals as the Focus of Managerial Action, Instead of 10
Constraints
 Emergence of Theory of Constraints (TOC) as a Better Approach to
Management Problem Solving
TOC Steps
 Goal
3 08
 Constraint and Elevation
 Re-look at Goal and Constraints
Finance and Measure
 Economic Decisions
4 08
 TOC and Product Costing
 Economic Decision using TOC Decision
Project Management
 Project Planning and Management Tools
5  Phases of Project Management 08
 Common Problems in Project Management
 Critical Chain Project Management: A TOC Approach
Drum-Buffer-Rope Solution
 Introduction
 The Drum – The Master Production Schedule of the Capacity
6 08
Constraints Resources
 Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope
 Master Production Schedule using Drum-Buffer-Rope Scheduling

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Method
Theory of Constraints in Supply Chain Management
 Introduction
7  TOC in Distribution Solution 06
 Drum-Buffer-Rope in Distribution
 Examples and Problems
TOC Applications to
 Operations
8  Projects 04
 IT
 Other areas
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An understanding of TOC and its potential in current business environment.

 An understanding of mechanics, valuation and trading strategies of derivative
market.
 Ability to frame their own trading strategies in different market conditions.
Text-Book
1. S. K. Mukhopadhyay, (Latest Edition), Theory of Constraints, Jaico Publication.
Reference-Book
1. James F Cos III, Jhon G. Schleier, (Latest Edition), Theory of Constraints Handbook,
Tata McGraw Hill.

FAMILY BUSINESS &
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB.875.3: SUCCESSION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop a basic understanding of the theory, practice, principles, concepts and

language of succession planning and management.
 To learn how to develop an integrated strategy in both traditional and new economy
organizational environments.
 To understand the key elements of succession management to sustain competitive
advantage.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Family Business: What It Is, What Makes It Unique
1 08
 The Family Business: What It Is, Its Assets, and Vulnerabilities
Succession Planning
 Understanding Succession Planning
 Defining Objectives
2 08
 Choosing the Right Ownership Structure
 Promoting Stewardship
 Getting help from Board of Directors
Management Succession: Integrating the Family
Component into the Management Succession Process
 Formalizing Management Processes
 Taking the Lead
 Family Communication and Decision Making
o Family Business Meetings
 How to Set Up the Family Business Meeting?
o Family Council Meetings
 How to Set Up the Family Council?
 Family Business Rules
3 o How to Establish Family Business Rules? 08
 Make a Commitment to Family Communication
o Getting The Family Meetings Started – Outside
Assistance
 Management Succession Issues
o Employment of Family Members
o Grooming Family Managers to be Successors
o Assessing Family Member Managers
o Compensation for Family Members
o Managing Family Disagreements
 Integrating the Family Component in Business Planning

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Making use of Outside Advice
Developing Successors
 Preserving Company Values
4
 Support for Senior Managers 08
 Help for Employees, Suppliers, Customers
 From Second to Third Generations
Successful Business Succession by Women
5
 Role of Women in Family Business 08
 Raising A Daughter as the Next CEO
Transferring Control and Ownership
 Match Ownership to Control
6  Tools for Transferring Ownership 08
 Trusting the Firm to Trustees
 Incentives for Nonfamily Caretakers
Letting Go
7  The Deep Reasons for Founders Resistance 08
 Letting Go with Grace and Style
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 An ability to appreciate family business and apply the theory, practice, principles,
and concepts of succession planning and management.
 An ability to understand the family business owner‟s concerns and run and let go the
family business successfully.
Text-Books
1. Mark Fischetti, (Latest Edition), The Family Business Succession Handbook, Family
Business Publishing Company.
2. Stephen L. McClure, John L. Ward, Craig E. Aronoff, (Latest Edition), Family Business
Succession: The Final Test of Greatness A Family Business Publication, Macmillan.
3. Poza, E. J., (Latest Edition), Family Business, Mason, OH: Thomson South-Western.
4. Gersick, K. E., Davis, J. A., Hampton, M. M., and Lansberg, I., (Latest
Edition), Generation to Generation: Life Cycles of the Family Business, Boston, MA: Harvard
Business School Press.

Reference-Books
1. Grant Walsh, (Latest Edition), Family Business Succession Managing the All-Important
Family Component, KPMG Enterprise.
2. Justine C. Law and James J. Baderman, (Latest Edition), Everyday Legends: The Ordinary
People Changing Our World, the Stories of 20 Great UK Social Entrepreneurs. WW Publishing.
3. Willie Cheng, (Latest Edition), The World That Changes The World: How Philanthropy,
Innovation, And Entrepreneurship Are Transforming The Social Ecosystem. John Wiley and
Sons.
1. Family Business Review, Sage Journals

2. Journal of Family Business Management, Emerald
3. Journal of Family Business Strategy, Elsevier

MB876.3: ENTREPRENEURSHIP MARKETING AND ANALYTICS
(EM&A)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce students to different choices and challenges of entrepreneurial

marketing.
 To understand the Business Analytics and Intelligence Methodologies.
 To implementing the same for making strategies and decisions faster by
converting data into reliable information using rational approach.
 To prepare students for careers like consulting in data-rich environments,
analytical marketing, information technology, and financial data analysis.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurial Marketing
 Marketing and Entrepreneurship
 Identifying Market Opportunities
1 08
 Positioning, Targeting and Segmentation
 Selecting, Developing and Evaluating New Products and
Services
Introduction to Business Intelligence
 Changing Business Environment and Computerized Decision
2 Support Framework and Architecture 08
 Intelligence Creation and Use
 Business Intelligence Governance
Introduction to Business Analytics
 What is Business Analytics?
3 08
 Why is Business Analytics Important?
 Integrating Business Analytics into the Organization
Marketing Mix Modeling
 Linear Regression
4
 Trend Analysis 08
 Product Market fit
o Gap Analysis
Segmentation Application-1
 Discriminant Analysis
5
 Factor Analysis 08
 Cluster Analysis
 Multidimensional Scaling Analysis
6 Segmentation Application-2 08

 Market Basket Analysis
 Structural Equation Modeling
 Decision Tree Analysis
o Approach with CHAID
o Classification and Regression Trees
o Regression-Based Forecasting
Data Mining
7  Data Mining Process 08
 Data Mining Tool XL Miner
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A thorough understanding about entrepreneurial marketing.

 An ability to transform large amounts of data into better decisions.
 The skills to formulate, communicate, and coordinate strategies to solve business
problems and pursue opportunities
Text-Books
1. Leonard M. Lodish, Howard Lee Morgan, Amy Kallianpur, (Latest Edition),

Entrepreneurial Marketing: Lessons from Wharton's Pioneering MBA Course.
2. Chaston, I., (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurial Marketing, Palgrave Macmillan.
3. Davidow, W. H., (Latest Edition), Marketing High Technology: An Insider‟s View,
The Free Press.
4. Rao, Purba Halady, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: An Application Focus, PHI
Learning
5. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel, Peter C. Bruce, (Latest Edition), Data Mining for Business
Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel® with
XLMiner®, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
6. Marc J. Schniederjans, Dara G. Schniederjans, Christopher M. Starkey (Latest
Edition), Business Analytics Principles, Concepts, and Applications with SAS: What, Why, and
How, Pearson Education Inc.
7. E. Turban, R. Sharda, J. Aronson, and D. King, (Latest Edition), Business Intelligence: A
Managerial Approach, Pearson Prentice Hall
8. Mohanty, Soumendra, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing Design Development and Best
Practices, Tata McGraw Hill.
9. Turban, Efraim & Sharda, Ramesh and Delen, Dursun and King, David & Aronson,
Janine E. (Latest Edition), Business Intelligence A Managerial Approach, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. R. Mosimann, P. Mosimann, and M. Dussault, (Latest Edition), The Performance

Manager: Proven Strategies For Turning Information Into Higher Business Performance, Cognos
Press
2. Anahory, Sam and Murray, Dennis, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing in the Real
World. Pearson Education.

3. Berson, Alex and Smith, Stephen J, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing, Data Mining &
OLAP. Tata McGraw Hill.
1. International Journal of Business Analytics (IJBAN), Information Resources

Management Association
2. International Journal of Business Analytics and Intelligence
Software
Excel and Excel add-ins will be the primary software used throughout the course. Both
of the add-ins: XL-Miner (available at www.solver.com/xlminer-data-mining) and
@Risk (www.palisade.com/trials.asp) are available as free 15 day trial versions

MB877.3: APPLICATION OF STRATEGIC FRAMEWORKS FOR SMEs
(ASF for SMEs)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce the student to the unique management issues facing the

family/privately owned business in today‟s economy.
 To identify strengths and weaknesses in the strategic management of the family
business.
 To prepare the strategic plan small for small or medium sized enterprises.
 To review and evaluate the selected strategy.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Overview of Strategic Planning for SMEs
 What are Small and Medium Enterprises
1  Strategic Planning Questions 08
 Developing A Strategic Planning Mindset
 Strategic Versus Operational Planning
The Strategic Planning Process Model
2 08
 Creating Vision and Mission
Assessing the Firms Strategic Potential
3 08
 Internal and External Analysis
Exploring Possible Business Strategies
 Discussing the Firms Strategic Priority
4
 Selecting the Strategic Direction 08
 Evaluation of the Basic Business Strategy
 Identifying the Unique Advantages
Strategies for SME Development
 Skill Development
 Technology Transfer and Export Marketing
5
 Public Private Partnership 08
 Industry Institution Interaction
 Cluster Strategy
 Strategic Asset Building
Implementation and Evaluation of Government Schemes
 MSME Ministry Scheme
 NSIC Scheme
6 08
 SIDBI Scheme
 BSE SME Exchange

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Final Strategy and Reinvestment Decision
 Assessing The Investment Decision
7  Analyzing Business Market Values 08
 Other Factors Affecting The Reinvestment Decision
 Reinvestment Issues
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The ability to select appropriate strategy by identifying strengths and weaknesses in

the strategic management of the family business, SME
 The ability to prepare a business plan to start a new business or to extend/improve
existing business and be able to review and evaluate the business plan of an existing
business company, including opposing its feasibility
 The ability to prepare the strategic plan small for small or medium sized enterprises
and to review, implement and evaluate the selected strategy.
Text-Books
1. May, Gary, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management: Strategic
Planning: Fundamentals for Small Business, Business Expert Press.
2. Randel Carlock and John Ward, (Latest Edition), Strategic Planning for the Family
Business: Parallel Planning to Unify the Family and Business, Palgrave Macmillan, New
York.
Reference-Books
1. David Smallbone, Kiril Todorov, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Research on Strategic

Management in Small and Medium Enterprises, IGI Global.
2. John Kyriazoglou, (Latest Edition), Managing your SME more effectively, Bookboon.
3. Farhad Analoui, Azhdar Karami, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management: In Small And
Medium Enterprises, Cengage Learning.
1. International Journal of Business Analytics (IJBAN), Information Resources

Management Association.
2. International Journal of Business Analytics and Intelligence.
Websites
 www.dcmsme.gov.in (Government of India, Ministry of MSME)

MB878.3: PROFESSIONALIZATION OF FAMILY BUSINESS (PFM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To discuss in depth about the need and various aspects of professionalization

starting from what is considered as a professionally run business.
 To discuss what one needs to do to professionalize and
 To understand various challenges and hurdles that one needs to overcome in that
journey and how to travel that path successfully.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Family Business Management Formula
 Structural Management of the Family Business
1  Family Complexity 08
 Business Complexity
 Effects of Complexity on the Family Business Structure
Family Business Models
 Captain Model
 Emperor Model
 Family Team Model
2  Professional Family Model 08
 Corporation Model
 Family Investment Group (FIG) Model
 Comparative Analysis of the Models
 Mindset and Structure: How Thoughts Influence Deeds?
Professionalization of Family Business
 What?
3 08
 Why?
 How?
Aspects of Professionalization
 Decentralization of Activities
4
 Empowerment of Employees 08
 Methodological Decision Making
 Setting of Systems and Processes
Challenges of Professionalization
 Unincorporated Enterprises
 Lack of Succession Planning and Plans
5
 Unawareness of Government Policies on Entrepreneurship 08
Policies and Entrepreneurship Development in the Country
 High Operational Costs
 Financial Constraints

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Poor Infrastructures
 Competition
 Multiple Taxes
Managing Growth and Transformation
6  Applying Survival Skills as A Son or Daughter in the Family 08
Business
Indian and International Cases of Professional Family
7 Business 08
 What can we Learn and Apply?
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The skills to be able to manage differing views between the older generation and the
newer generation.
 The skills to be able to professionalize existing family business and to plan for
sustenance of business.
Text-Book
1. Alberto Gimeno, Gemma Baulenas, Joan Coma-Cros, (Latest Edition), Family Business
Models-Practical Solutions for the Family Business, Palgrave Macmillan.
Reference-Books
1. Bowman – Upton, N., (Latest Edition), Challenges in Managing a Family Business

Washingston: US Small Business.
2. Kelin E. Gersick, John A. Davis, Marion McCollom Hampton, Ivan Lansberg, (Latest
Edition), Generation to Generation: Life Cycles of the Family Business, Harvard Business
Review Press.
1. Family Business Review

2. Ivey Business Journal- Improving the Practice of Management

MB879.3: COMPETITIVE STRATEGY AND MANAGEMENT OF
FAMILY BUSINESS PORTFOLIO (CS & MFBP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To focus on the competitive strategy of the firm.

 To examine issues central to its long and short term competitive position
 To understand the development of firm-specific capabilities, including the role of
knowledge that contributes to a firm‟s competitive advantage
 To focus on industry analysis and competitive advantage as it derives from the firm's
strategic investments
 To find out how strategy differs in global contexts, the role of mergers and acquisitions
and the logic of resource allocation in the diversified firm to enhance competitive
advantage in each market
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Analysis of the Environment
 Industries and the Life Cycle
 Extending the Five Forces Framework
1  The Contribution of Game Theory 08
 Competitors Analysis
 Segmentation Analysis
 Strategic Groups
Identifying and Analyzing Significant Family Business
Competitive Advantage
 Loyalty
 Legacy
 Access to Labour
2 08
 Access to Capital
 Key Employees
 Patience
 Values
 Community and Philanthropy
Strategies for Competitive Advantage
 Generic Strategies
 The Value Chain
3  Cost Leadership 08
 Differentiation
 Focus
 The Dangers of Hybrid Strategies

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Vertical Links and Moves
 Defining Vertical Relations
4
 Trends in Vertical Relations 08
 What Vertical Integration is Not?
 The Costs of Markets
Horizontal Links and Moves
5  The Diversification Game
08
 Why Diversify?
 Forms of Diversification
International Strategy
 Global Diversification Strategy
 The Question of International Competitiveness
 Porter‟s Diamond Framework
6  Using the Diamond Framework 08
 Framing Company Strategy
 Competing in International Markets
 Competing Abroad: The Principles
 Globalisation Vs. Localisation
Making the Moves
7  Adding Value from Combination 08
 Mergers and Acquisitions
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 Be able to play the role of key decision makers and answer the questions related to
the creation or reinforcement of competitive advantage.
IX. Reference Material
Text-Books
1. Grant, R. M. (Latest Edition), Contemporary strategy analysis: Text and cases, Edison, NJ:
Wiley.
2. Danny Miller, Isabelle Le Breton-Miller, (Latest Edition), Managing For The Long Run:
Lessons In Competitive Advantage From Great Family Businesses, Harvard Business Review
Press.
3. Michael E. Porter, (Latest Edition), Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing
Industries and Competitors, Free Press.
Reference-Books
1. Contractor, Farok J., (Latest Edition), Cooperative Strategies in International Business:

Joint Ventures and Technology Partnerships between Firms, Amsterdam: Pergamon.
2. Liebowitz, Jay, (Latest Edition), Strategic Intelligence: Business Intelligence, Competitive
Intelligence, and Knowledge Management, Auerbach Publications.

1. Journal of Developmental Entrepreneurship

2. Journal of Family Business Management

TOURISM
AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB885.3: INTERNATIONAL TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT (ITHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To introduce students to the international organizations involved in tourism and

hospitality management.
 To help students to understand the geographical significance while arranging
international tours.
 To introduce students to the most preferred destinations in America and Europe.
 To help students to understand the critical issues that needs to be dealt with
very carefully while on international tour.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Geographical Significance in Tourism
 Fundamentals of Geography
 Importance of Geography in Tourism
 Climate Variations
 Climatic Regions of World
1 08
 Study and Significance of Maps
 Longitude and Latitude
 International Date Line
 Time Variations
 Time Difference
International Destination Management in Major or
2 08
Selected Countries
Managing International Tourism
 Steps involved in Setting an International Tourism
3 Assignment 06
 Financial, Legal and Technical Issues involved in
International Tourism
Critical Issues related to International Tourism
 Using the Tour Guide Book
 Understanding the Cultural Differences
 Understand the Local Norms, Rules and Guidelines
4  Understanding the Public Sentiments Associated with 12
International Tourist Destinations
 Preservation of Local Ecology
 Culture and Natural Environment
 Cross-Cultural-Etiquettes, Mannerisms

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Understand the Meaning of Gestures and Postures in
International Contest
 Organized and Unorganized Tourism
e-Tourism
 Development of e-Tourism
5 04
 Using Technology for Booking the Tourist Packages
 Collaborative Travel and Tourism
International Organizations associated with Travel and
Tourism Industry
 International Union of Official Travel Organization
(IUOTO)
 World Tourism Organization (WTO)
6 10
 International Air Transport Association (IATA)
 International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
 Pacific Area Travel Association (PATA)
 Universal Federation of Travel Agents Association
(UFTAA)
Indian Organization associated with Travel and Tourism
Industry
 India Convention Promotion Bureau (ICPB)
7 08
 Federation of Hotel and Restaurant Association of India
(FHRAI)
 Travel Agent Association of India (TAAI)
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding and exposure to the norms and guidelines and critical issues
associated with the international tourism and hospitality management.
 The ability to understand the role played by various agencies in international
tourism.
Text-Books
1. Yvette Reisinger, (Latest Edition), International Tourism, Routledge Publishers.

2. Alan Clarke, Wei Chen, (Latest Edition), International Hospitality Management: Concepts
and Cases, Butterworth-Heinemann Pub.
Reference-Books
1. Philip Kotler, John Bowen, James Makens, (Latest Edition), Marketing for Hospitality
and Tourism: International Edition, Pearson Publications.

1. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, ISSN: 144-6770

2. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management ISSN: 0959-6119
3. Tourism and Souvenirs: Global Perspectives from the Margins

MB886.3: QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY BUSINESS (QMTHB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop an understanding of quality management concept and the issues

related to it in tourism and hospitality management among students.
 To illustrate a critical awareness of the fundamentals of quality, and its relevance
to both environmental conservation and tourism management.
 To help students to understand the tools and techniques of quality management
associated with tourism and hospitality business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Quality Management in Tourism and Hospitality
Business
 Concept, Need and Importance of Quality Management in
Tourism
1 05
 Quality Management in Urban and Rural Tourism and
 Seasonability in Tourism : Problems and Measurement
 Attraction and Land Use Management
Tourists and Tourist Destinations Quality Management
 Improving the Tourist Experience
 Quality Management Applied to Tourist Destinations.
2  Importance of Quality Management in Developing and 08
Tourist Destination
 Key Elements of Managerial Skill in Tourism and
Hospitality Industry
Project Management
 Concept of Managing Quality in Projects
3  Significance of Project Quality Management 08
 Managing Recourses and Time
 Quality Project Management Techniques and Skills
Service Quality Management
 Concept of Service : Definitions and Meaning of Types of
Service Classifications of Services
4 10
 Growing Importance of Services in Future Societies and
Impact of Service in Daily Life
 Role of Customers in Service Process

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Service Quality
 Deterioration of Quality
 Productivity and Quality Improvement
 Management Challenges in Service Sector
Certifications and Techniques in Quality Management
 Applying the Concept of Benchmarking to the Tourism and
 ISO Certifications involved in Tourism and Hospitality
5 08
Business
 Impact of Quality Certifications on Tourism and Hospitality
Business
 Internal and External Service Quality Measures
Tools and Techniques in Tourism and Hospitality
Quality Management
 The Five Gap Model
6  SERVQUAL Model 08
 Critical Incident Technique (CRIT)
 Satisfaction Surveys
 Mechanism for Quality Regulation in Tourism and
Hospitality Services
Quality Accreditation
 Concept of Quality Accreditation Schemes
 Eco-Labels
7 08
 ISO
 EU Foundation for Quality Management
 Role of Stakeholders in Quality Accreditation
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 A clear understanding of the role and importance of quality management in Tourism

and Hospitality Industry.
 The ability to gain and understand the knowledge of the tourism and hospitality
quality management tools and techniques and the importance of certification and
accreditation.

Text-Book
1. Jay Kandampully, Connie Mok, Beverley A. Sparks, (Latest Edition), Service Quality
Management in Hospitality, Tourism, and Leisure, Haworth Hospitality Press, Latest
Edition.
Reference-Books
1. Robert Johnston, Graham Clark, Michael Shulver, (Latest Edition), Service Operations
Management: Improving Service Delivery, Pearson Publications.
2. YLR Moorthi, (Latest Edition), Brand Management, The Indian Context, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd.
1. International Standard, Quality Management and Quality Assurance-Vocabulary :

ISO 8402:1994.

MB887.3: FACILITY AND EVENT MANAGEMENT (FEM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop students‟ knowledge and competencies to plan, manage and implement

special events successfully.
 To familiarize the managerial activities in facility management.
 To inculcate the spirit and enable the students to set up their own enterprises in the
field of facility and event management.
 To acquire an understanding of the techniques and strategies required for successful
of facility and event management.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Facility Management
 Facility Planning, Design and Layout
 Planning Process
 Developing the Concepts
1 06
 Equipment Requirements
 Space Requirements
 Bidding and Awarding Contracts
 Planning Team
Functional Planning
 Concepts of Flow
 Functional Requirements , Other Requirements
 Work Place Planning
 Environment of Work Place
2  Material Handling 08
 Space Requirement
 Space Estimation
 Total Facility Size
 Space Calculations : Dining Area, Receiving Area, Storage
Area, Serving Area etc.
Concept of Designing
 Designing of Hospitality Properties
 Development of Strategy and Brand Image
3  Asset Management 10
 Complimentary Facilities: Yoga, Gymnasium, Steam Bath,
Sun Bath
 Route Management and Vehicle Management (Two Wheelers

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
And LMV)
 Presentation and Communication Skill
 Operations of Office Gadgets - Xerox, Fax, Video
Conferencing, Power Point Etc.
Event Management
 Definition, Event Types
 Cultural Festivals
 Religious Business
4  Activities Conceptualizing And Designing Events 08
 Event Planning
 Five C‟s of Events
 Event as a Marketing Tool
 Role of Events in Promotion of Tourism
Event Management Activities
 Meeting
 Incentives
 Conference
 Convention
 Exhibition
5 08
 Trade Shows and Fairs
 Leisure Event
 Sports Events
 Organizers
 Sponsorship
 Event Management as a Profession
Event Marketing
 Nature and Process of Event Marketing
 The Marketing Mix
6  Sponsorship 08
 Advertising
 Publicity
 Image / Branding
Proposing and Staging the Event
 Choosing the Event Site
7  Developing the Theme 08
 Conducting Rehearsals
 Providing Services
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


II. Learning Outcomes
 The ability to arrange facilities for guests, clients and employees for smooth
running of an organization and to co-ordinate special events.
Text-Books
1. Sanjaya Singh Gaur, Sanjay V. Saggere, (Latest Edition), Event Marketing and
Management, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Getz D., (Latest Edition), Event Management and Event Tourism, Cognizant
Communication Corporation.
3. John Beech, Sebastian Kaiser, Robert Kaspar, (Latest Edition), The business of Event
Management, Pearson Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Lynn Van Wagen and Brenda R Carlos, (Latest Edition), Event Management, Pearson
Education.
2. Goldblatt, John Wiley and Sons, (Latest Edition), Best Practices in Modern Event
Management.
3. J. M. Mathews, (Latest Edition), Hospitality marketing and management.
1. Event Management: For Tourism, Culture Business and Sporting Events

MB888.3: COST AND OPERATIONS IN TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY BUSINESS (COTHB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To equip students with the operating knowledge and skills required to work in
tourism and hospitality business.
 To create an awareness on Tour pricing strategy and Tour costing.
 This paper emphasis the students to the professionals in Tourism Industry.
 To help students to understand the role of housekeeping department, that is the
back bone of the industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Operations in Hospitality Business
 Introduction to Housekeeping Department
 Organizational Hierarchy
 Layout of Housekeeping Department
1 05
 Housekeeping Personnel
 Job Description: Inter-Departmental, Co-Ordination
 Qualities of House Keeping
 Staff-Recruitment, Selection and Planning
Functions of Housekeeping Department
 Staff Scheduling and Briefing
 Knowledge of Rooms
 Rules on a Guest Floor, Maids cart, Room cleaning, Room
2 maintenance Procedure 08
 Desk Control Security
 Types and Control of Key Budgeting of Housekeeping
Department
 Lost and Found Procedure
Health and Safety Management
 Health and Safety of Customers
 Prevention of Fire and First Aid
3 08
 Safety of Room Interiors-Ceramics, Glass, Metals and
Sanitary- Textile and Floral Arts- Interior Decoration-
Lighting, Heating, Ventilation and Flowers
Tour Operation Management
4  Meaning, Definition and Functions 08
 Tour Operator Product, Components and Features

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Types of Tour Operations
 Overseas and Domestic Specialist
 Actual Tour Operation
Tour Packaging Management
 Concept and Definition
 Tour Design Process
 Destination Research
 Preparation and Handling Agency
 Negotiation of Tour Package
 Tour Brochure
5  Marketing of Tour 10
 Tour Packages: Nosted, Escarted, Independent, Two Centre
or Multi Centred Holidays
 Self-Drive Package
 Luxury Arias Package
 Pilgrim Package
 Campsite Holidays
 Adventure and Overland Holidays
Travel Agents and Tour Operators Organizations
 Role and Contribution of National Organization in Tourism
Costing and Operations
6  Role Played by Travel Agents and Agencies in Tourism 08
Operations
 Indian Association of Tour Operators (IATO)
 Travel Agents Association of Tour Operators (TAATO)
Costing in Tourism and Hospitality Business
 Tour Cost and Pricing
 Definition and Components Of Tour Cost
 Travel Cost
 Accommodation Cost
 Transfer Cost
7 08
 Administrative Cost
 Marketing Cost
 Category of Tour Cost
 Direct and Indirect Cost
 Fixed and Variable Cost
 Costing of Tour Package
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 A clear understanding and exposure of the fundamentals, concerns of costing and

operations in tourism and hospitality industry with a ability to demonstrate those
learning.
Text-Books
1. Jagmohan Negi, (Latest Edition), Travel Agency and Tour Operation : Concepts and
Principles, Kanishka Publishers.
2. Pat Yale, (Latest Edition), Business of Tour Operations, Longman Publications.
Reference-Book
1. Christopher Holloway, Neil Taylor, (Latest Edition), The Business of Tourism, Pearson
Publications.
1. Tourism and Souvenirs: Global Perspectives from the Margins

MB889.3: CRISES MANAGEMENT IN TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
BUSINESS (CMT&HB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To develop an understanding of basic concepts of crisis management applied to

tourism and hospitality industry.
 To make the students aware about the role as a leader while managing the crisis
situation.
 To help students to understand the local and national security framework in tourism
and hospitality industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Basics of Crisis Management
 Concept and Approaches
 Definition and Key Terms
1  Identification of Crisis Events 05
 Disaster Management
 Emergency Management
 Risk Management
Basics of Tourist Security
 Fire Prevention
 Basics of Fire Fighting
 Accidents and their Causes and Prevention during Travel and
Lodging
2 08
 First Aid and Emergency Services
 Hotlines for Consumer Protection
 Tourist Complaint Services and Resolution Mechanism
 Tourist Security Information
 Diplomatic Assistance
Risk Assessment and Risk Management
 Vulnerability Analysis
 Vulnerability Audit
 Risk Assessment
3  Risk Management 10
 Risk Communication
 Business Area Impact Analysis
 Business Contingency Planning
 Emergency Response Plans

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
 Corporate Crisis Management Plans
 Corporate Crisis Communication Plans
 Disaster Recovery Plans
 Business Continuity Plans
Safety and Security Issues during Crisis Management in
Tourism and Hospitality Management
 Concept and Definition of Safety and Security
4  Psychological Aspects of Fear and Feeling of Security 08
 Roles and Responsibility of Tourist Agencies in Crisis
Management
 Tourist‟s Role during Crisis Situation
Tourism, Terrorism and Crime
 Role of Local and National Security Agencies in Crime
Prevention
 Government Security Agencies and their Functioning
 Legal Regulatory and Judicial Framework
 Civil Unrest Issues
5 08
 Crime Issues including Premises Liability
 Drug Trafficking
 Theft and Street Robbery
 Creating Local Networks for Visitors and Resident Security
 Media Relations
 Police Protection
Crisis Management and Communication and Leadership
 Internal Crisis Communication
 Managing Mass Media
6 08
 Crisis Communication and Public Relations
 Leadership in Crisis Management
 Leadership Framework for Crisis Management
Stress Management
 Decision Making under Stress
7  Social and Environmental Change Strategies 08
 Cognitive and Behavioural Interventions
 Lifestyle Behaviour Patterns and Stress Response
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

 The skills to clearly understand the mechanism of crisis management in tourism and
hospitality industry.
 The abilities to manage and deal with a stressed tourist in crisis situations.

Text-Books
1. Yoel Mansfeld and Linda Chapin, (Latest Edition), Tourism Security and Safety, Elsevier
Science and Technology.
2. C. Michael Hali, Dallen J. Timothy, David Timothy Duval, (Latest Edition), Safety and
Security in Tourism, Jaico Publishing House.
Reference-Books
1. Dirk Glaesser, (Latest Edition), Crisis Management in the Tourism Industry, Butterworth-
Heinemann Publication.
2. Otto Lerbinger, (Latest Edition), The Crisis Manager: Facing Risk and Responsibility,
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
1. Journal of Crisis Management in Tourism and Hospitality Industry

JOURNALISM AND
MASS
COMMUNICATION
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB895.3: PRINT MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS (PMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
 To provide students with an in-depth understanding of the Nature of News and

the Process of Reporting.
 To acquaint them with the Techniques of Writing Simple but Polished News
Stories.
 To emphasize the essentials of the Human Interest story and the Depth Report.
 To help students develop Creativity in Writing and the Imaginative Approaches
to Features, Profiles and Interview Stories and prepare students to undertake
Opinion Writing.
 To help students gain an understanding of the Mechanics of Editing.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to News Paper Media
 Nature of News
 Qualities of News
 News Value
 Hard and Soft News
 Orientation and Perspective
 Objectivity and Fairness
 News as A Process
 Verification
 Special Interests
 Difference Between
1 10
o News and Information
o Journalism and Communication
 Stories of High Interest
 Celebrity Journalism
 Trends in Modern Journalism
 Influence of TV Channels on Serious News Reporting in
Print Media
 Sensationalism and Entertainment
 Functioning of News Media
 Three Modes of Daily Journalism
 National Media
Print Journalism
2  Newspaper 08
 Sub-Editor

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Copy and Schedule
 Newspaper Design
 Feature Writing
 News Reporting and Writing
News Values for Pictures
 Photo Essays
 Photo Features
 Qualities Essential for Photo Journalism
3 08
 Picture Magazines
 Colour Photography
 Impact of Technology
 Practical, Field Assignments and their Evaluation
Creativity in Writing
 Features
 Interviews
 Profiles
 Middles
4 08
 Columns
Opinion Writing
 Editorials
 Reviews (Book, Movie, Music Album)
 Letters to the Editor
Report Writing
 Headlines
 Lead
 Body of A Story
 Inverted Pyramid Structure
5 08
 Hour Glass Structure
 Featurized News Report
 Human Interest
 Colour Story
 Specialist Reporting
Editing
 Nature and Need for Editing
 Principles of Editing
 Editorial Desk
 Functions of Editorial Desk
 Copy Editing Preparation of Copy for Press
6 08
 Style Sheet
 Editing Symbols
 Proof Reading Symbols and their Significance
 Grammar
 Punctuation
 Tight Writing

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Rewriting
Field Work
 Applying the Yardsticks of Newsworthiness
7  Report Preparation by Covering Events on Campus and the 06
City
 Conduct Interviews and Write Feature Stories
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100



 The abilities to deal with print media and develop skills that are required for
effective media and broadcasting Journalism.
 The ability to understand the fundamentals of the newspaper as an up-to-date text.
 Inculcated the creativity in mechanics of newspaper writing.
Text-Books
1. Aruna Zachariah, (Latest Edition), Print Media Communication and Management: Elements,
Dimensions and Images, Kanishka Publishers Distributors
2. Robin Jeffrey, (Latest Edition), India's Newspaper Revolution, Capitalism, Technology
and the Indian Language Press.
3. Stein, M. Paterno, Susan, and Burnett, Christopher, (Latest Edition), The News
Writer‟s Handbook Introduction to Journalism, Blackwell Publishing.
Reference-Books
1. Agarwal, Vir Bala and V. S. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Journalism and Mass
Communication, Concept Pub. Co. New Delhi.
2. Ed. Hakemulder, Jan R., Fay A.C. de Jonge and P.P. Singh, (Latest Edition), News
Reporting and Editing, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd
3. Mencher, Melvin, (Latest Edition), News Reporting and Writing, McGraw-Hill
Companies
1. Journal of Print and Media Technology


MB896.3: ELECTRONIC MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS (EMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To evaluate the relationship between television or Film and society.
 To understand the way that content, form, and contexts work together to create
meaning in film.
 To be able to critically explore how film is a dynamic, multi-faceted medium, and
how a work is created and received from a cultural, ideological and theoretical
perspective.
 To understand the myriad of creative and technical choices that construct a
work, and how ultimately each individually impacts a finished film.
 To consider film‟s position in participatory culture and the shifting convergent
media landscape.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Film and Television
 Growth and Development of TV in India
 TV Forms and Conventions
 Genre, Format and Scheduling
 Main Features of Film and TV Language and Grammar
(Framing, Types of Shot, Camera Movement Editing, use of
1 Sound, Lighting, Narrative, Etc) 10
 Film History, Introduction to Scriptwriting from Conception to
Final Script
 Study of Script Structure and Practice Writing Various Short
Program Formats Such as Demonstration, News, Feature, and
Variety Shows
 Analysis of Films
Radio Journalism
 Understanding the Medium
 Understanding News
2 08
 Radio News Reporting
 Writing Radio News
 Compiling A Bulletin
TV Journalism
 Understanding the Medium
 Visual Language
3  Understanding News 08
 TV News Reporting
 Writing and Editing TV News
 News Presentation

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Electronic and Online Journalism
 Nature, Features, History, Spread, Knowledge Society,
Convergence
 Internet Editions, E-Newspaper, HTML Content Management
4 System, Online Tools for Texts, Links, Photos Etc. 08
 Role of Multimedia
 Open Source Journalism
 Role of Social Media
 Laws and Ethics
Creative Brief
 Elements of Good Advertising, Copy and Art
 Importance of Visual Thinking
5 06
 Appeals and Promises
 Importance of Design and Layout
 Use of Typography, Graphics etc.
Audiences and Reception
 Audience
 Blindness
 Codes
 Co-Presence
 Hot and Cool Media
 Imagined Community
 Intimacy
6 08
 Liveness
 Noise
 Radiogenic
 Radio World
 Reception
 Secondariness
 Sound Culture
 Sounds Cape
Current Affairs
 Post-Independence History of India
7  India and its Neighbouring Countries 06
 International Affairs
 Recent Developments in the Course Period
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Sl. Marks internal
incidence
No. evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to deal with electronic media and develop skills that are required for
effective media and broadcasting Journalism

Text-Books
1. Toby Miller, (Latest Edition), Television Studies: The Basics, Routledge Publication,
London.
2. Jeremy G. Butler, (Latest Edition), Television: Critical Methods and Applications, TMH.
Reference-Books
1. Michele Hilmes, (Latest Edition), Radio Voices: American Broadcasting, Minneapolis,

University of Minnesota Press.
2. Hugh Chignell, (Latest Edition), Key Concepts in Radio Studies, SAGE Publications.
1. Journal of Broadcasting and Electronic Media, Taylor and Francis Group

MB897.3: PUBLIC RELATION AND CORPORATE FILM CREATION
(PR&CFM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To Evaluate the relationship between television/Film and society
 To understand the way that content, form, and contexts work together to create
meaning in film.
 To enable students to critically explore how film is a dynamic, multi-faceted
medium, and how a work is created and received from a cultural, ideological and
theoretical perspective.
 To help students to understand the myriad of creative and technical choices that
construct a work, and how ultimately each individually impacts a finished film.
 To consider film‟s position in participatory culture and the shifting convergent
media landscape.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding PR
 Definitions
1  Purpose and Utility 06
 Advertising and Propaganda
 Status of PR in India
Role of PR in Different Sectors
 Government
 Corporate
 Defense Establishments
 Educational Institutions
 Hospitals
 Individuals
 Political Parties
2  NGOs Etc. 10
Types of PR
 Internal or External
 Publics of PR
 Communication Audit
 Qualities Required of A PR Professional
 Role and Responsibilities of PR Professional
 In-House PR Department
 PR Consultancy

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
PR Tools
 Internal House Journals
 Bulletin Boards
 Events
 Mailing Groups
 Social Networking Sites
 External Exhibitions
3 08
 Trade Fairs
 External Journals
 Media Publicity
 Programmes and Events
 CSR Projects
 PR During Crisis
 Some Recent Case Studies
Media Relations as a PR Function:
 Importance of Media Publicity in PR
 Necessity and Ways of Building and Maintaining Media
4 Relations 06
 Organizing Press Conferences and Visits Writing Press
Releases and Arranging Other Publicity Material (Audio,
Video, CDs, Etc.)
PR and Corporate Communication
 Theory and Practice of PR, Definition, Role and Functions
 PR in Changing Social and Political Environment
 Art of Persuasion, Feedback, Campaign Planning and
Strategies
 Financial PR
 Media Tracking – Cross Country Issue Propaganda
5  Definition, Scope and Functions of Corporate 06
Communication
 Corporate Identity, Philosophy, Image
 Corporate Culture, Citizenship, Philanthropy / Social
Responsibility
 Publicity – Concept and Scope of Private PR
 Image, Event and Conference Management
 Counselling, Crisis or Disaster Management
Corporate Film Creation
 Scriptwriting
 Audiovisual Writing
 The Elements of Scriptwriting
6 12
 Characterisation
 Screen Grammar and Elements of Corporate Film-
Making
 Design TV Commercials through Creative Brief

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Project: Making A Short Film
 Pre-Production of the Short Film
 Production of the Short Film
o Shooting
 Post-Production of the Short Film
7 08
 Screening
o Screening the Film
o Submitting it to the Film Festivals
o Putting the Film on You-Tube and Social
Networking Sites
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The ability to deal with theory and practice of Public Relations and Corporate
Communication that is imperative and crucial for building up of an image of any
corporate entity.
Text-Books
1. Linda Low, (Latest Edition), Economics of Information Technology and the Media, World
Scientific, Banglore.
2. Michele Hilmes, (Latest Edition), Radio Voices: American Broadcasting, Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press
3. Hugh Chignell, (Latest Edition), Key Concepts in Radio Studies, SAGE Publications.
Reference-Books
1. James E. Grunig, David M. Dozier, William P. Ehling, Larissa A. Grunig, Fred

(Latest Edition), Excellence in Public Relations and Communication Management, TMH.
2. C. Repper, Jon White; Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, (Latest Edition), The Unseen
Power: Public Relations, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
3. Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Thomson, (Latest Edition), Public Relations in Asia: An
Anthology, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
4. Kenneth K. Sereno, C. David Mortensen; Harper and Row, (Latest Edition),
Foundations of Communication Theory, TMH.
5. Ronald D. Apr Smith, (Latest Edition), Strategic Planning for Public Relations Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
6. Marvin N. Olasky, (Latest Edition), Corporate Public Relations: A New Historical
Perspective, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
1. Journal of Public Relations Research, Taylor and Francis Journals

2. Public Relations Review, Elsevier
3. Journal of School Public Relations, Rawmen and Liitlefield

MB898.3: CYBER JOURNALISM: CONVERGENCE AND NEW
MEDIA (CJ: C &N)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To introduce the students to Online or Cyber Journalism.
 To understand the use of social media and live streaming for real-time reporting.
 To apply a variety of storytelling techniques and identify the most appropriate.
media for different kinds of stories.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Overview of Online Journalism Around the World
 What is Online Journalism?
1  The Changing Landscape: Why Newspapers and Broadcast 06
Outlets are on the Web?
 Online Journalism in India
Tools of Online Journalism Multimedia
 Interactivity
2 08
 Hyperlinks
 Weblogs and Content Management Systems
Citizen and Participatory Journalism
 Citizen Journalism
 Hyper local Journalism
 Weblogs
New Media and Social Networks
3  New Media 10
 Social Media
 Social Networking Websites
Security and Ethical Challenges in Online Journalism
 Security Challenges
 Applying Journalism Ethics to Online Journalism
Current Trends and Future of Cyber Journalism in India
 Net Convergence and Journalism
4  Web Magazine and Web Newspaper 08
 Changing Format of News Presentation
 Readers as Publishers
Internet and New Media
 Basics of Internet and their Characteristics
 Networking, ISP and Browsers
5 08
 Features of Online Communications
 Digital Media and Communication
 ICT, Digital Divide, Information Society and Media

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Convergence
Online Journalism and Social Media
 Traditional Vs. Online Journalism
 Difference in News Consumption
6 08
 Online Writing and Editing
 Social Media, Web 1.0, 2.0 3.0
 Mobile Communications and Technology
Cyber Crimes and Security : Types and Dimension
 Cyber Laws and Ethics
7 08
 Elements and Principles of Web Designing
 Basic Programming – HTML and DREAM WEAVER
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 The familiarity with online journalism around the world and will demonstrate a
clear understanding and articulation of the field of online journalism through
scholarly writing and presentations relative to the course contents.
 The ability to identify the unique features of news Web sites – such as multimedia,
and interactive chats and blogs and will become familiar with multimedia and
interactivity of the same.
 The skills to create blogs and will participate in Social media by creating a Twitter
account and posting tweets regularly using re-tweets and hash tags
 The skills to further demonstrate the ability to record and edit basic online audio
interviews and will master the tips and techniques for gathering reliable
information on the internet.
Text-Books
1. Pablo J. Boczkowski, (Latest Edition), Digitizing The News: Innovation in Online

Newspapers, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
2. James C. Foust, (Latest Edition), Online Journalism: Principles and Practices of News for the
Web.

Reference-Books
1. Dan Gillmor, (Latest Edition), We the Media: Grassroots Journalism by the People, for the
People, Cambridge, MA: O'Reilly.
2. Bill Kovach and Tom Rosenstiel, (Latest Edition), The Elements of Journalism: What News
People Should Know and the Public Should Expect, New York: Crown Publishers.
3. Tapas Ray, (Latest Edition), Online Journalism: A Basic Text, Cambridge University
Press.
4. Andrew Dewdney and Peter Ride, (Latest Edition), The New Media Handbook.
5. Jason Whittaker, (Latest Edition), The Cyberspace Handbook.
6. Sunil Saxena, (Latest Edition), Breaking News, Tata McGraw-Hill.
7. Tom Negrino and Dori Smith, (Latest Edition), Dreamweaver CS6: Visual Quick Start
Guide.
8. Smith, Gene, (Latest Edition), Tagging: People-powered Metadata for the Social Web.


MB899.3: MEDIA MANAGEMENT AND AD CAMPAIGN
STRATEGIES (MM&ACS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

 To provide students with detailed insight into the structures, management,
processes, economics of and controversies in surrounding the media industries.
 To understand the organizational and economic structures of the major media
industries.
 To understand programming methods and strategies used in media industries.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Organisations as Communication Systems
 Media Structures, Size Business Models and Roles and
Purposes
1 06
 Traditional Media
 New Electronic Media and Emerging Technologies
 Organisational Culture in Media Companies
Media and Content
 The Role of Content in A Strategic Media Organisation
 Business Decisions and Contribution of Content
 Inhibits Competitive Advantage through Content in
2 Communication 10
 Techniques for Survival in A Rapidly Changing Technological
Environment
 Personalised Information to Mass Messages in News
 Advertising and Entertainment
Media and Integrated Market
 Integrated Communication for Products from Various
Categories Delivered Via Print, Television, Radio, Film,
3 08
Internet, Direct Mail, or Live Event Channels
 Management Strategies of Large Media Companies
 Exploring the Media Side of Marketing Communications
Financial Management
 Cost and Profitability in A Media Company
 Costing Classification and Allocation
4  Nature of Cost 08
 Factors Affecting Cost
 Fixed and Variable Costs
 Financial Statement Analysis
Writing for TV Commercials
5 08
 TV Spot Techniques

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
 Idea Presentations Treatments
 Scripting
 Storyboard
 Terms used for Camera Movement and Editing
 Visualizing the Commercial
 Working with Audio and Visual Elements
 Multimedia Applications in AD Film
Campaign Planning and Management
 Marketing Operations for the Campaign
 Target Audience Selection and Advertising Objectives
6 08
 Planning Strategies and Media Characteristics
 Creative Execution of the Campaign
 Campaign Evaluation and Measuring Effectiveness
Media Strategy and Implementation
 Impact of Media Operations and Business Models
7  Major Trends for Shaping The Media Landscape 08
 Techniques for Developing Smart Strategies for Media
 Case Studies of Multimedia Companies
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


 An insight into the structures, management, processes, economics of and
controversies in surrounding the media industries.
 The ability to understand programming methods and strategies used in media
industries.
 The ability to learn to apply convergence, new technologies, and their impact on the
media landscape.
 Media strategies and ad executions and will effectively execute the media plan.
Text-Books
1. George Rodmann, (Latest Edition), Mass Media in a Changing World, Mcgraw Hill.
2. Storey, John, (Latest Edition), Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: An Introduction,
Pearson Education.
3. Stevenson, Nick, (Latest Edition), Understanding Media Cultures: Social Theory and Mass
Communication, SAGE Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Ravindran, R. K., (Latest Edition), Handbook of Reporting and Editing, Anmol

Publications.
2. Gibson, Martin, (Latest Edition), Editing in the Electronic Era, Iowa State University
Press.
3. Rivers, William L., (Latest Edition), The Mass Media: Reporting, Writing, Editing.
4. Harper and Row. Rao, L. R. Madhav, (Latest Edition), New Assignment in Journalism,
New Delhi, Sumit Enterprises.
5. Baird, Click, (Latest Edition), Traditional folk media in India, Gekha Books.
6. Westley, Bruce, (Latest Edition), News Editing, Houghton Miffin Co., The Riverside
Press.
1. International Journal on Media Management, Saint Gall, Switzerland

2. Journal of Advertising, Taylor and Francis Journals
3. Journal of Advertising Research, Cambridge Journals

Final Mba Syllabus CBCS 2016 1 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Final Mba Syllabus CBCS 2016 1 PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Accredited with Grade A by NAAC, GoI

Accredited with Grade A by KCG, GoG

Faculty of Management Studies

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 1 of 533

Education Campus – Changa, (ECC), hitherto a conglomerate of institutes of

Faculty Institute Programmes

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 2 of 533

The University is characterized by state-of-the-art infrastructural facilities, innovative teaching

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 3 of 533

 Participatory and interactive discussion-based classes.

CHARUSAT welcomes you for a Bright Future

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 4 of 533

Faculty of Management Studies

Accredited with Grade A by NAAC, GoI

Charotar University of Science and Technology (CHARUSAT)

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 5 of 533

Master of Business Administration (MBA)

2.1 The Master of Business Administration (MBA) programme of Charotar University of

3. Eligibility and mode of admissions

4. Programme Structure and Credits

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 6 of 533

5.2 Student attendance in every course should be 80%.

6.1.1 Internal evaluation by the course faculty member(s) based on continuous

6.2 University Examination

6.3 Performance at Internal Evaluation Components & University Examination

Minimum percentage marks in Minimum total percentage marks

6.3.2 If a student secures minimum passing marks of 40% in the University

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 7 of 533

<80 <75 <70 <65 <60 <55

(i) SGPA = ∑ CiGi/ ∑ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i

Gi is the Grade Point for the course i

and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses in the semester

(ii) CGPA = ∑ CiGi/ ∑ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i

Gi is the Grade Point for the course i

and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses of all semesters up to which CGPA is computed.

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 8 of 533

8.1.1 He should have earned at least minimum required credits as prescribed in

Distinction: CGPA ≥ 7.5

First class: CGPA≥ 6.0

Second Class: CGPA≥ 5.0

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 9 of 533

Details of MBA Programme Structure, Credit Requirements and

A1. Programme Structure

Figure A1: MBA Programme Structure

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 10 of 533

TableA2: Semester-wise Distribution of Credits

3 Semester 3 - Summer Training/ Internship 04

4 Semester - 3 - Classroom Work 24

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 11 of 533

Below mentioned pull of courses will be offered to the students by different

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 12 of 533

Table A3: Areas / Streams of Specialisation/ Concentration

Functional Areas of Management

(i) At least six courses (amounting to a minimum of twenty four credits) in

A4. Courses, Curricula and Revision

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 13 of 533

M B Number 1 Number 2 Number 3

Management Business Level / Year Course Serial No.

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 14 of 533

Course Total Number

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 15 of 533

MB806.3 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3

© CHARUSAT 2016 Page 16 of 533